Home

User-Manual -

Contents

1. 2 Search Bar Search video files by title video date tag rating 357 Browsing Mode Multi select Resizing Bar Select DLNA AirPlay Player Network Media Player Refresh Settings or color label Switch between different browsing modes from left to right thumbnail browsing mode list browsing mode timeline browsing mode folder browsing mode to browse videos Select multiple items at the same time Resize video thumbnails Locate compatible devices in different rooms over your home network Refresh the current page Set video classification content filters or social network binding configure subtitles searching settings and miscellaneous settings e Video Classification Add remove and rescan folders to be classified and classify folders into the following categories Home Videos Movies TV Shows or Music Videos or manage your custom classifications The classified videos will be organized into a video library for smart collections e Content Filter Set folders as the content source of Video Station Use this feature to hide undesired videos and only show intended contents e Social Network Binding bind your social network accounts to share videos on social networks more on this in the below Sharing collections section e Search Subtitles Enable Video Station to search for subtitles on subtitles websites including OpenSubtitles and Shooter e Miscellaneous Check Always ask me to en
2. 13 The backup job and the status will be shown on the list Butto Name n gt Start m Stop 2 Edit a View Downlo ad x Delete Description Start a backup job Stop a backup job Edit the backup job View the job status and logs Download the backup job logs Delete a backup job This button is only available after a backup job is stopped To disable a backup job s schedule click Edit and select Disabled under Settings gt Schedule Type and click OK Default Backup Job Settings 1 To edit the default backup job properties click Options 2 Under Event Logs you can select to enable Download Detailed Logs and specify the maximum file size of the log file Select to send an email alert when a backup job fails or completes Note that the SMTP server settings must be properly set up in System Settings gt Notification 3 Specify the backup policy in Policy and filter settings in Filter These will become the default settings for all the backup jobs Download Backup Logs 1 To download a backup job s logs make sure the option Download Detailed Logs is enabled in Options gt Event Logs 2 Click the View Download button in Action column of a backup job 3 Go to Job Logs and click Download Logs The log file can be opened by Microsoft 241 Excel or any text editor This button is only available after you have enabled Download Detailed L
3. Filter Settings During file synchronization Qsync will skip the file types specified in filter settings Mail Set up E mail Set up an email account for sharing file links You can use the NAS SMTP server settings for administrators only your PC s mail server settings or configure a new SMTP server Proxy Set up Proxy Use a proxy server for the Qsync client device Advanced Debug log The system will record all of the synchronization activities between your computer and the NAS for diagnosing technical problems Note The Sync and Proxy tab is not available on Mac Version Control This will retain one copy of a file as a version whenever you add or modify it allowing you to retrieve a specific previous version at any time Or if you accidently overwritten a previous version made by others while editing the file in team folder you can still 214 restore the previous version And you can restore the previous versions even if you have deleted the file from the recycle bin Viewing the version history You can view the version history by using File Station Right click on a file or folder in the Qsync folder in File Station and select Previous Versions to show the version list or you can access it from menu bar More Action gt Previous Versions Or just click the Show Right Panel gt Version You can also access it from the Qsync client utility Right click on a file of folder in the
4. Shared Folders Display item 1 Onve 134 Drive 134 Onve 134 Onve 134 Onve 134 Dnve 134 Dnve 134 Onve 134 Drve 134 10 Total 13 Show Action amp amp amp amp o o a o DIOICICICIOIOIOIOIO w 6 w w 10 items You can create multiple shared folders on the NAS and specify the access rights of the users and user groups to the shares The number of shared folders you can create on the NAS varies according to the NAS models If your NAS model is not listed please visit http www qnap com for details Maximum number of NAS models shared folders 256 TS 110 TS 210 TS 112 TS 119 TS 119P TS 212 TS 219P TS x20 TS x21 TS 410 TS 239 Pro II TS 259 Pro 512 TS 412 TS 419P TS 410U TS 419U TS 412U 166 TS 419U SS 439 Pro SS 839 Pro TS 439 Pro II TS 459U RP SP TS 459U RP SP TS 459 Pro TS 459 Pro II TS 559 Pro TS 559 Pro II TS 659 Pro TS 659 Pro II TS 859 Pro TS 859U RP TS 859U RP TS 809 Pro TS 809U RP TS x70 TS 879 Pro TS 1079 Pro TS 879U RP TS EC879U RP TS 1279U RP TS EC1279U RP TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 To create a shared folder follow the steps below 1 2 Click Create gt Shared Folder Enter the basic folder settings o Folder name Enter the share name The share name does not support
5. 5 The imported user accounts will be displayed Note e The password rules if applicable will not be applied when importing users e The quota settings can be only exported when the quota function is enabled in Privilege Settings gt Quota The NAS supports importing user accounts from TXT CSV or BIN files To create a list of user accounts with these file types follow these steps TXT 1 Open a new file with a text editor 2 Enter a user s information in the following order and separate them by Username Password Quota MB Group Name 3 Go to the next line and repeat the previous step to create another user account Each line indicates one user s information 4 Save the file with UTF 8 encoding if it contains double byte characters Note that if the quota is left empty the user will have no limit in using the disk space of the NAS 163 CSV Excel 1 Open a new file with Excel 2 Enter a user s information in the same row in the following order o Column A Username o Column B Password o Column C Quota MB o Column D Group name 3 Go to the next row and repeat the previous step to create another user account Each row indicates one user s information Save it as a CSV file 4 Open the CSV file with Notepad and save it in UTF 8 encoding if it contains double byte characters BIN Exported from the NAS The BIN file is exported from a QNAP NAS It contains information including username
6. For setup details refer to the following links e Usershe e User Groupshe e Share Foldershe Quotalt7 e Domain Security h7 160 5 1 Users The NAS creates the following users by default admin The administrator admin has full access to system administration and all shared folders It cannot be deleted guest This is a built in user and will not be displayed on the User Management page A guest does not belong to any user group The login password is guest anonymous This is a built in user and will not be shown on the User Management page When you connect to a NAS by FTP you can use this name to login The number of users you can create on the NAS varies by NAS models If your NAS models are not listed visit http www qnap com for more details Maximum number NAS models of users 1 024 TS 110 TS 210 2 048 TS 112 TS 119 TS 119P TS 212 TS 219P TS 410 TS 239 Pro II TS 259 Pro 4 096 TS 412 TS 419P TS 410U TS 419U TS 412U TS 419U SS 439 Pro SS 839 Pro TS 439 Pro II TS 459U RP SP TS 459U RP SP TS 459 Pro TS 459 Pro II TS 559 Pro TS 559 Pro II TS 659 Pro TS 659 Pro II TS 859 Pro TS 859U RP TS 859U RP TS 809 Pro TS 809U RP TS 879 Pro TS 1079 Pro TS 879U RP TS EC879U RP TS 1279U RP TS EC1279U RP TS 269 Pro TS 269L TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 251 TS 451 TS 651 TS 851 TS 253 Pro TS 4
7. Green Orange Flashes orange Green Off Red Flashes green Green Flashes blue every 0 5 sec Blue Off Flashes Description The NAS is ready All the hard disk drives on the NAS are in standby mode The NAS is booting up The NAS is on and ready The disk data is being accessed from the network The NAS is connected to the network The 10GbE network expansion card is installed No 10GbE network expansion card is installed A hard drive read write error occurs The disk data is being accessed The hard drive can be accessed 1 A USB device connected to front USB port is being detected 2 A USB device connected to front USB port is being removed from the NAS 3 The USB device connected to the front USB port is being accessed 4 The data is being copied to or from the external USB or eSATA device A front USB device is detected after the device is mounted 1 No USB device is detected 2 The NAS has finished copying the data to or from the USB device connected to the front USB port of the NAS The eSATA device is being accessed 16 LED Color LED Status ji e Off Description No eSATA device can be detected The 10 GbE network expansion function is only supported by the TS 470 Pro TS 670 Pro TS 870 Pro TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 1079 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS EC879U RP and TS EC1279U RP TS 210 TS 212 TS 219 TS 439U SP RP
8. lt gt o Comment Enter an optional description of the shared folder o Disk Volume Select which disk volume on which to create the folder o Path Specify the path of the shared folder or select to let the NAS specify the path automatically Access privileges for users Select the way you want to specify access rights to the folder If you select to specify the access rights by user or user group you can select to grant read only read write or deny access to the users or user groups Folder Encryption Select to enable folder encryption with 256 bit AES encryption See Folder Encryptionh74 for more information Advanced settings this is only available when creating a shared folder o Guest Access Right Assign guest access rights of the folder o Media Folder Select to set the shared folder as a media folder o Hidden Folder Hide Network drive Select to hide the shared folder or not in Microsoft Networking When a shared folder is hidden you have to enter the complete directory NAS_IP share_name to access the share o Lock File Oplocks Opportunistic locking is a Windows mechanism for the client to place an opportunistic lock oplock on a file residing on a server in order to cache the data locally for improved performance Oplocks is enabled by default for everyday usage and should be disabled on networks that require multiple users concurrently accessing the same files o SMB Encryption Set the folder
9. password quota and user group The quota setting can only be exported when the quota function is enabled in Privilege Settings gt Quota Home Folders Enable Home Folders to create a personal folder to each local and domain user on the NAS Users can access their home folders via Microsoft networking FTP AFP and File Station All the home folders are located in the shared folder Homes which can only be accessed by admin by default To use this feature click Home Folders Select Enable home folder for all users and the disk volume where the home folders will be created in Click Apply 164 5 2 User Groups A user group is a collection of users with the same access rights to files or folders The NAS creates the following user groups by default e administrators All the members in this group have administration rights of the NAS This group cannot be deleted e everyone All the registered users belong to this group This group cannot be deleted The number of user groups you can create on the NAS varies by NAS model If your NAS is not listed visit http www qnap com for more details Maximum number of user groups 128 256 512 NAS models TS 110 TS 210 TS 112 TS 119 TS 119P TS 212 TS 219P TS 410 TS 239 Pro II TS 259 Pro TS 412 TS 419P TS 410U TS 419U TS 412U TS 419U SS 439 Pro SS 839 Pro TS 439 Pro II TS 459U RP SP TS 459U RP SP TS 459 Pro TS
10. ISCSI initiator on Windows Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator is an official application for Windows that allow users to implement an external iSCSI storage array over the network Using iSCSI initiator Start the iSCSI initiator from Control Panel gt Administrative Tools Under the Discovery tab click Add Portal or Discover Portal Enter the NAS IP and the port number for the iSCSI service The available iSCSI targets and their status will then be shown under the Targets tab Select the target you want to connect to and click Connect You can click Advanced to specify login information if you have configured the authentication otherwise simply click OK to continue Upon logging in the status of the target will show Connected After the target has been connected Windows will detect its presence and treat it as if a new hard disk drive has been added which needs to be initialized and formatted before we can use it Go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management gt Disk Management and you should be prompted to initialize the newly found hard drive Click OK then format this drive as you normally would when adding a new disk After disk initialization and formatting the new drive is attached to your PC You can now use this iSCSI target as a regular disk partition 102 This section shows you how to use Xtend SAN iSCSI Initiator on Mac OS to add the iSCSI target QNAP NAS as an ex
11. Next 11 Confirm the settings and click Next 12 Click Finish to exit the wizard Ico Name Description n gt Enable and Enable connection to a remote server Start Start a replication job m Stop Stop connection to a remote server or extemal drive m Stop Stop a replication job View View job status and logs download logs 2 Edit Edit the connection settings of a remote server 233 Edit the settings of a replication job x Delete Delete connection settings to a remote server 7 Delete a replication job This button is available only after a replication job is stopped or the connection to the remote server is stopped To edit the replication job properties click Options Under Event Logs you can enable Download Detailed Logs and specify the maximum file size of log files You can also set up sending email alerts when synchronization fails or completes SMTP server settings must be set up on the NAS before using email alerts System Settings gt Notification Specify the replication policy in Policy and filter settings in Filter These will become the default settings for all RTRR replication jobs Downloading Replication Job Logs To view the status and logs of a replication job click the View button under Action You can view job logs or download them by clicking Download Logs Log files can be opened by Microsoft Excel or text editors This button is only available after you have e
12. Safely Detaching Storage Pools Follow these steps to safely detach a storage pool 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to be removed to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Click Remove gt Safely Detach Pool 4 Click Apply 5 The selected storage pool will be removed Expanding Storage Pools Follow these steps to expand a storage pool 65 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to be expanded to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Click Expand Pool 4 Select to create and add a new RAID group Select Adding new hard drive s to an existing RAID group the option Create new RAID groups will be covered in the following section choose an existing RAID group from the drop down list and click Next 5 Select the hard drive s to expand the storage pool and click Next 6 Click Expand 7 Please note that all data on the selected hard disk drive s will be erased Click OK if you are certain about this 8 The chosen storage pool will be expanded Note Storage pool expansion is not supported for RAID 0 RAID 1 Single and JBOD configurations For these configurations it is necessary to create an additional RAID group in order to expand the storage pool Expanding storage pools by creating new RAID groups Follow these steps to create a RAID group for storag
13. Specify the port number of the FTP service e Unicode Support Toggles Unicode support The default setting is No If your FTP client does not support Unicode it is recommended to disable this option and select the specified language in General Settings gt Codepage so that the file and folder names can be correctly displayed If your FTP client supports Unicode enable this option for both your client and NAS e Enable Anonymous Enable this option to allow anonymous access to the NAS by FTP Anonymous users can connect to files and folders which are open for public access If this option is disabled users must enter an authorized username and password to connect to the NAS 200 e Connection Enter the maximum number of allowed FTP connections for the NAS and a single account and check Enable FTP transfer limitation to specify the maximum upload and download rates Advanced e Passive FTP Port Range You can use the default port range 55536 56559 or specify a port range larger than 1023 When using this function make sure you have opened the ports on your router or firewall e Respond with external IP address for passive FTP connection request Enable this function when a passive FTP connection is in use the FTP server NAS is behind a router and a remote computer cannot connect to the FTP server over the WAN When this is enabled the NAS replies with the specified IP address or automatically detects an external IP add
14. TVS x63 TS 563 1 3 and TS x53 TS x51 x51 TS x31 later TVS x71 TVS x63 TS 563 ies TS x63U TS x53 k TS x80 TVS x80 TVS x71U 4 1 2 4 TVS x71 TVS x63 TS 563 1 3 and TS x63U TS x53 TS x51 x51 later TVS x71 TVS x63 TS 563 4 1 1 TS x63U TS x51 x51 TS x80 TVS x80 TS x71U 4 1 2 4 TVS x71 TVS x63 TS x53 1 3 and TS x51 x51 later 31 No No No No No No 4 1 2 4 TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U 1 3 and later 4 1 1 TVS x71 1 3 and later 4 1 1 TVS x71U 4 1 2 4 1 3 and later 4 1 2 4 TS x80 TVS x80 TVS x710U 4 1 2 4 TVS x71 TVS x63 TS x53 1 3 and No TS x51 x51 later TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U 4 1 1 No TS x80 TVS x80 TS x71U 4 1 2 4 TVS x71 TVS x63 TS x53 1 3 and No TS x51 x51 later TS x80 TVS x80 TVS x710U TVS x71 TVS x63 TS 563 4 1 1 No TS x63U TS x69 TS x79 TS x70 TS x80 TVS x80 TVS x71U 4 1 2 4 TVS x71 TVS x63 TS 563 1 3 and No TS x63U TS x53 TS x51 x51 later NAS Models that DO NOT Support System Migration NAS models that do not support direct migration are listed in the below table For these NAS models first initialize the destination NAS and copy your data from the source NAS to the destination NAS refer to the RTRR or Rsynclz2 chapter for details on data backup and replication Source NAS Destination NAS Firmware Model Model Version TS x31 TS 4310U HS 251 251 TS x51 x5
15. To view photos on a map click on the photos gt Information and then click the red pin next to Coordinates This feature is only available for photos with GPS coordinates For photos with no GPS coordinates please follow the above steps to set their GPS coordinates Adding face tags to photos 1 Set face detection folders in Photo Station gt Manage Mode gt Settings gt Face Detection 2 Open a photo in the Media Viewer and enable Face Detection 3 Add face tags to the photo or manually change the face area To view photos with face tags switch to Manage mode and click Faces on the left panel Browsing PDF files You can also browse PDF files as photos using Photo Station To use this feature right click on a PDF file to create a new album After clicking on that album you will see all the pages of the PDF file displayed as individual photos Media Library and Privacy Settings 349 Photo and video files in Photo Station are listed and displayed according to shared folder privileges and media folders settings in the Media Libraryb13 For shared folder privileges only users with an appropriate permission to a shared folder can view its contents in the Photo Station For example if a user does not have read write or read only permissions to a certain shared folder that user cannot see the photos and videos in the shared folder Note e For x86 based NAS models all shared folders except recording
16. Use the default settings or specify the settings manually To understand more please check http www_qnap com go pptp htm Enable PPTP VPN server VPN client IP pool Advanced Settings Y In this chapte the following topics are covered e VPN Server Setupk7 e Third Party VPN Client Setup and Connectionk7A e VPN Client Managementkedl e Connection List kd VPN Server Setup 1 Select a network interface to connect Login the NAS as admin and go to Applications gt VPN Service gt VPN Server Settings Under General Settings select a network interface to connect to the desired network which the NAS belongs to 2 Enable PPTP or OpenVPN service The NAS supports PPTP and OpenVPN for VPN connection Select either one option and configure the settings o PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is one of the most commonly used methods for VPN connection It is natively supported by Windows Mac Linux Android and iPhone 277 o OpenVPN OpenVPN is an open source VPN solution which utilizes SSL encryption for secure connection To connect to the OpenVPN server OpenVPN client must be installed on your PC Click Download Configuration File to download the VPN client settings certificate key and installation guide from the NAS and upload the files to the OpenVPN client 3 Configure port forwarding by auto router configuration The NAS supports auto port forwarding for UPnP Universal Plug and Play network pr
17. Yes Then press Enter to confirm Password The default password of the LCD panel is blank Enter this option to change the password of the LCD panel Select Yes to continue 384 You can enter a password of maximum 8 numeric characters 0 9 When the cursor moves to OK press Enter Verify the password to confirm the changes Back Select this option to return to the main menu System Messages When the NAS encounters an error a message will be shown on the LCD panel Press Enter to view the message Press Enter again to view the next message System Message Description Sys Fan Failed The system fan has failed Sys Overheat The system has overheated HDD Overheat A hard drive has overheated CPU Overheat The CPU has overheated Network Lost Both LAN 1 and LAN 2 are disconnected in failover or load balancing mode LAN1 Lost LAN 1 is disconnected LAN2 Lost LAN 2 is disconnected HDD Failure A hard drive has failed Voli Full The disk volume 1 is full HDD Ejected A hard drive has been ejected Voll Degraded The disk volume 1 is in degraded mode 385 Voli Unmounted The disk volume 1 is unmounted Voli Nonactivate The disk volume 1 is inactive 386 13 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document
18. and web are media folders by default For ARM based NAS models only multimedia and homes are media folders by default However users can always add more media folders e In addition to shared folder privileges you can also store private videos in your home shared folder to hide them from other NAS users except the administrator The contents of the home folder can be found under Private Collection Anyone attempting to access this folder in Photo Station will be prompted for a password e Tocreate a shared folder go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders Photos and videos stored in the shared folders are only visible after they are detected and scanned by the Media Library To set the Media Library to scan for photos and videos manually or by schedule go to Control Panel gt Multimedia Management gt Media Library For more details on media folder settings please refer to the chapter on Multimedia Management Note As the media folders in the Media Library are shared by Photo Station Music Station Video Station and DLNA Media Server as their content source content will be affected in those applications if new media folders are added or existing media folders are removed from the Media Library 350 8 10 Station Manager The Station Manager is an integrated control panel for all QNAP Stations and they can be enabled or disabled here a Photo Station Download Station Sur
19. and the DNS settings will appear Follow the steps below 1 Click the setting to be modified 192 2 Edit the properties of the setting type and value adjust the order of the value with the green up arrow or down arrow button or delete the value with the red X button 3 Click Apply to save the changes Adding domains To add a domain first go to Control Panel Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt DNS tab and log in with the administrator username and password Follow the steps below 1 Click Action gt Add Domain 2 Enter the domain name and click Create Adding records To add a record first go to Control Panel Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt DNS tab and log in with the administrator username and password Follow the steps below 1 Select a domain 2 Click Action gt Add Record 3 Enter the record properties and click Create Note Only the following types of records are supported A AAAA PTR CNAME NS MX SRV TXT Deleting domains or records To delete a record first go to Control Panel Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt DNS tab and log in with the administrator username and password Follow the steps below 1 Select a domain or record 2 Click Action gt Delete 3 Click Yes Backup Restore 193 The domain controller status can be backed up or restored using the backup restore function Only the first
20. and up to 600 items can be included in each playlist To create a playlist click next to Playlist To add items to a playlist simply drag amp drop music files to the list Right click on a playlist to rename or delete it or add it to Now Playing e My Favorites All songs rated at least 1 star are listed here All un starred songs will be removed from here To rate a song switch to the detail album list or cover browsing mode and click the star s under Rating e Recently Added Songs recently added to the Media Library are listed here e Frequently Played Songs most frequently played are listed here e My Favorite Radio The user s favorite Internet radio stations can be added by entering the radio URL or by searching TuneIn Radio Up to 1024 stations are supported Please note that the type of files the radio station URL points to must be MP3 e TunelIn Users can browse and play Internet radio stations streamed by TunelIn e Trash Can All deleted music files can be found in here and permanently deleted or restored The Trash Can is always enabled Note e Characters not allowed for Playlists include lt gt and e Entries under Recently Added are listed based on the time they are scanned by the Media Library 320 e Music Station only supports AIFF APE FLAC M4A M4A Apple Lossless ALAC MP3 Ogg Vorbis WAV PCM LPCM WMA WMA PRO WMA VBR Right Panel 0
21. connected to the NAS via any USB eSATA interface c Select to back up the data from a local disk volume to the external storage or vice versa d Click Next 5 Select the source and destination folders for backup Then click Add Up to 512 folder pairs can be created Click Next 239 as the source or destination of another folder pair of the same backup job e The External Drive feature supports up to 32 jobs and each job supports up to 16 folder pairs 6 Choose between real time and scheduled backup Real time backup copies files that are new changed and renamed from the source folder to the target folder as soon as the changes are made after the first time backup Scheduled backup copies files from the source folder to the target folder according to the schedule The options are o Replicate Now Copy the data immediately o Periodically Enter the time interval in hours and minutes that the backup job should be executed The minimum time interval is 5 minutes o Hourly Specify the minute when an hourly backup should be executed for example enter 01 to execute backup on the first minute of every hour o Daily Specify the time when a daily backup should be executed for example 02 02 every day o Weekly Select a day of the week and the time when a weekly backup should be executed o Monthly Select a day of the month and the time when a monthly backup should be executed o Auto Backup Execute data
22. e Watch the video in another browser page or with VLC Adjust the player volume Playing photos and videos as slideshow 347 A slideshow is a collection of photos that are played in a sequential fashion at an interval in full screen mode for your photo enjoyment To play photos or video images as slideshow click the Slideshow button in Gallery mode to switch the viewing mode Use the buttons on the menu bar for slideshow or album operations gt 6 232 gt Wx N Name 1 Effect 2 Speed 3 Music 4 Play Pause 5 Last Next Slide 6 Background Music 7 Title 8 Download 9 Full Screen Description Set a different slide transition effect Set the slide speed Switch between different playlists defined in the Music Station from the Playlist personal playlist and shared playlist on the left panel Please refer to the chapter on Music Station31 for more details Play Pause the slideshow Go to the last next slide Turn the background music on or off Show the photo title Choose to download the current photo or every photo in the slideshow in large or original image size Switch between full screen and windowed modes Geotagging photos and photo map 348 To geotag a photo right click on a photo and select Set Coordinates to set its coordinates you can either type the coordinates or the location in the search box in the View Map dialog window Click Save after you finish the setting
23. gt Connect to Server and enter the URL of the folder Format http NAS_IP_or_HOST_NAME SHARE_FOLDER_NAME Enter the account login details that have WebDAV access rights to connect to the folder 3 You can connect to the folder through this link via HTTP WebDAV You can also find the mount point in the SHARED category in Finder and make it one of the login items These instructions are based on Mac OS X 10 6 and can be applied to 10 4 or later Ubuntu Follow these steps to connect to your NAS via WebDAV on Ubuntu Client Operating System Ubuntu 9 10 Desktop 1 2 3 Open Places gt Connect to Server Select WebDAV HTTP or Secure WebDAV HTTPS for the Service type according to your NAS settings and enter your host information Enter the account login details that have WebDAV access rights to connect to the folder Click Connect to initialize the connection The WebDAV connection has been successfully established a linked folder will be automatically created on the desktop MySQL Management Install phpMyAdmin and save program files in the Web or Qweb share of the NAS You can change the folder name and connect to databases by entering the URL in the browser 284 SQLite Management Follow these steps or refer to the INSTALL file in the downloaded SQLiteManager tar gz to install SQLiteManager 1 Unpack the downloaded file SQLiteManager tar gz 2 Upload the unpacked
24. gt Quarantine Note The antivirus engine selector next to the Enable antivirus checkbox is only available after an antivirus App has been installed from the App Centerks4 Scan Jobs 220 The NAS supports manual and scheduled scanning of all or specific shared folders Up to 64 schedules can be created and up to 5 scan jobs can run concurrently To create a scan job follow these steps 1 Go to Applications gt Antivirus gt Scan Jobs Click Add a Scan Job 2 Enter the job name and select the shared folders to scan To scan a specific shared folder select the share and click Add 3 Multiple shared folders can be selected To remove a shared folder click the Delete X button next to the share name and click Next Define the scan job schedule and click Next 4 Select to scan all the files in the shared folder s or quick scan to scan only potentially dangerous files Select Exclude files or folders and specify a file a folder or a file extension to be excluded from the virus scan and click Next Separate each entry with a space in the same line or enter one entry per line For example o Public testfile txt o Download o log o exe com o txt click Next 5 Enable other scan options and click Next o Specify the maximum file size 1 4096 MB allowed for scanning o Enable Scan compressed files to include these files in shared folders Specify the maximum amount of data 1 4096
25. on the left panel in Music Station 2 Right click the song you would like to change the cover gt Change cover 3 Click Upload to upload an image file from your PC or Search to find an image from the Internet Finding your music files quickly To quickly locate your music files you can rate or classify them e To rate a music file find it in the detail browsing mode album list browsing mode cover flow browsing mode and rate it e To classify a music file click the music file and Info on the right panel to modify its data e To batch rate or modify music files click the multi select button on the Main Menu or hold the Ctrl key select your desired music files and rate and modify all at once After music files are rated or classified they can be searched by their artist album or title in the search bar or quickly listed in My Favorites on the left panel Media Library and Privacy Settings Music files in Music Station are listed and displayed according to shared folder privileges 323 media folders and settings in the Media Library For shared folder privileges only users with an appropriate permission to a shared folder can view its contents in the Music Station For example if a user does not have read write or read only permissions to a certain shared folder that user cannot see the music files in the shared folder Music files stored in the shared folders are only visible after they are detecte
26. or select Set up manually to set the path 8 Select if you want to upload all photos from the photo gallery immediately 9 You can tick the checkbox Limit to Wi Fi to ensure that you only upload files through Wi Fi and not your phone s network 10 The uploaded files will be synchronized to the Camera Uploads folder under the Qsync folder on Qsync client devices Synchronization Management Click the Qsync Client icon on the taskbar to see the management functions 05 19 2013 5 14 212 Open Qsync folder View files by the web browser Sharing amp File Update Center Recently changed files Upload to NAS from QGenie Check NAS Space Pause syncing Sync with NAS now All files are up to date Preferences Help center Check for Updates Exit Add files and view the synchronization result on the NAS a Open Qsync folder Open the local Qsync folder to add files b View files by the web browser Browse files in the Qsync folder using File Station Control synchronization progress a Pause syncing Resume syncing Click to pause or resume syncing b Sync with NAS now Force Qsync to scan again and refresh the synchronization list Information for syncing and sharing a Sharing amp File Update Center i File Update Center List the file or folder update logs ii Sharing Center List the folders or files shared with others Users can choose to accept or decline the team folders
27. or simply use the default keyboard shortcut Command k Enter the connection information in the Server Address field such as afp YOUR_NAS_IP_OR_HOSTNAME Here are some examples e afp 10 8 12 111 e afp NAS 559 e smb 192 168 1 159 Note Mac OS X supports both Apple Filing Protocol and Microsoft Networking To connect to the NAS via Apple Filing Protocol the server address should start with afp To connect to the NAS via Microsoft Networking please use smb 198 NFS Service To connect to the NAS from Linux enable the NFS service To configure NFS access rights to shared folders on the NAS go to Privilege Settings gt Share Folders and click the Access Permission button on the Action column Select NFS host access from the drop down menu on the top of the page and specify the access rights If you select No limit or Read only you can specify the IP address or domains that are allowed to connect to the folder by NFS e No limit Allow users to create read write and delete files or folders in the shared folder and any subdirectories e Read only Allow users to read files in the shared folder and any subdirectories but they are not allowed to write create or delete any files e Deny access Deny all access to the shared folder Connecting to the NAS by NFS On Linux run this command mount t nfs lt NAS IP gt lt Shared Folder Name gt lt Directory to Mount gt For example i
28. photos only Rebuild thumbnail for selected photos or videos Delete photos or videos Display file details property and description of the photo video Set GPS information of a photo photos only Add a tag to photos or videos Rate photos or videos Color label photos or videos Finding your photos and videos quickly You can rate or classify photos videos to quickly locate them To do so right click on a photo or video and then tag rate or color label them To batch mark or classify multiple photos or videos first click the Multi select button on the main menu or hold the Ctrl key select your desired photos or videos and right click the photos or videos to perform desired actions After photos or videos are tagged rated or color labeled they can be searched by their rating color label or tag in the search bar Viewing photos and videos In Gallery mode double click on a photo or video or click the Display button in the thumbnail display style to launch the Media Viewer for viewing operations 345 elec oqgaihBiococcBose s Face Detection Download Share Slideshow Network Media Player Information EGENBT mn Description Enable Face Detection to show tagged faces You can also manually add a face tag Please refer to the Adding face tags to photosb4 section for more details Download the photo or video For photos there are four sizes small medium large and or
29. 4 1 x pas No SS x39 TS id 251 251 TS x51 x51 TS x59 TS x59U x53 SS x53 ae later later TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U 9 U X TS x69 TS x70 TS x70U a LX TVS x71 TVS x71U TS j an x79 TS x80 TVS x80 TS later x80U TS x31 TS 431U HS 251 TS x31 TS TS x51 x51 TS x53 SS 431U HS x53 4 0 5 4 1 x BONO NS aa TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U TT No OORE a ne TS x69 TS x70 TS x70U ang x53 SS x53 TVS x71 TVS x71U TS later TS x53S Pro x79 TS x80 TVS x80 TS x80U TS x69 TS 3 8 x 3 8 x x69U TS x70 and TS x10 TS x12 TS x19 TS and i o TS x70U TS older x20 TS x21 HS 210 older x79 TS x79U 4 0 2 4 0 2 30 TS x80 TS x80U TS x31 HS 251 251 TS x51 x51 TS x53U TS x53 Pro TS x53S Pro 4 0 5 4 1 x and later 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 and later 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 and later 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 and later TS x39 TS 509 TS 809 SS x39 TS x59 TS x59U TS x69 TS x69U TS x70 TS x70U TS x79 TS x79U TS x31 TS 431U HS 251 251 0 5 TS x51 x51 TS x53 SS 4 1 x x53 TS x69 TS x70 TS x79 TS 4 0 5 x80 TS x80U TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U a TS x69 TS x69U TS x70 TS pe LX x70U TVS x71 TVS x71U TS an x79 TS x79U TS x80 TS later x80U TVS ECx80 HS 251 251 4 TS x51 x51 4 1 2 and TS x53 SS x53 later TVS x71 TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U TS x53 TS x51 x51 4 1 1 x31 TS x80 TVS x80 TVS x71U 4 1 2 4 TVS x71
30. 453U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 879 Pro TS 853U TS 453U TS 451U TS 431U TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP Class B Class B TS 853S Pro TS 453S Pro TS 870 Pro TS 853 Pro TS 670 Pro TS 653 Pro TS 470 Pro TS 453 Pro TS 253 Pro TS 431 TS 231 TS 451S TS 451 TS 870 TS 851 TS 670 TS 651 TS 470 TVS 863 TVS 863 TVS 663 TVS 463 TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TS 451 TS 451 TS 431 TS 251 TS 251 4 TS 251C TS 231 TS 131 TS 269H TS 212P TS 112P HS 251 HS 251 HS 210 TS 453mini TS 563 1 3 Document Annotation Annotations in this document Warning This indicates the instructions must be strictly followed Failure to do so could result in injury to human body or death Caution This indicates the action may lead to disk clearance or loss OR failure to follow the instructions could result in data damage disk damage or product damage Important This indicates the information provided is important or related to legal regulations 10 1 4 Safety Information and Precautions 1 The NAS can operate normally in the temperature of O C 40 C and relative humidity of 0 95 Ensure the environment is well ventilated 2 The power cord and devices connected to the NAS must provide correct supply voltage 100W 90 264V 3 Do not place the NAS in direct sunlight or near chemicals Ensure the usage environment s temperature and humidity is suited for using electronics 4 Unplug the power cord and all connected cables b
31. A simple and intuitive interface makes management easy Thumbnails help you identify file types at a glance and you can move copy rename and delete files on your NAS without needing a PC Download 368 Available on the 0 App Store p Google play L Windows Phone Qmanager Qmanager is a powerful management platform with a simple to use and intuitive interface that makes monitoring and managing your NAS from mobile devices amazingly easy Monitor system information such as CPU usage memory usage system event info online users backup status download progress and file transfers Use App Center to turn application services on or off with a single click Restart or shut down your NAS remotely Download Available on the 0 App Store P Google play Qnotes is a powerful digital notebook and workspace for organizing your to do lists shopping lists lecture notes meeting notes and everything else you want to remember Synchronize your notes across your devices so you can access them wherever you go Add audio recordings or take a picture and save it to Qnotes to keep it for you Enjoy peace of mind that your notes are securely stored and available from anywhere You can easily share your notes with others Work together with your friends family classmates and colleagues Share your notebooks with others for viewing or editing Download 369 p gt Google play Qremote Qremote is QNAP s remot
32. CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS 400 401
33. Checking System Status LED Display amp System Status Overview LED Color LED Status Flashes green and red alternately every 0 5 sec System Red Red Status Green Flashes red every 0 5 sec Flashes green every 0 5 sec Flashes green every 2 sec Description 1 The hard disk drive on the NAS is being formatted 2 The NAS is being initialized 3 The system firmware is being updated 4 RAID rebuilding is in process 5 Online RAID capacity expansion is in process 6 Online RAID level migration is in process 1 The hard disk drive is invalid 2 The disk volume has reached its full capacity 3 The disk volume is going to be full 4 The system fan is out of function TS 119 does not support smart fan 5 An error occurs when accessing read write the disk data 6 A bad sector is detected on the hard disk drive 7 The NAS is in degraded read only mode 2 member hard drives fail in a RAID 5 or RAID 6 configuration the disk data can still be read 8 Hardware self test error The NAS is in degraded mode one member hard drive fails in RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 configuration 1 The NAS is starting up 2 The NAS is not configured 3 The hard disk drive is not formatted The NAS is in S3 Sleep Modet 15 LED Power LAN 10 GbE HDD USB eSAT A Color Green Orang Green Red Green Blue Orang LED Status Green Off Flashes green
34. Click Browse and select a CSV file which contains the user information in the following format account password description and email For steps to create a CSV file refer to the next section Creating a CSV File Excel 4 Click Next to import the users and Finish after the users have been created 5 The imported user accounts will be shown Note e The password rules if applicable will not be applied when importing the users e The account and password fields can not be empty for an account Creating a CSV file Excel 1 Open a new file with Excel 2 Enter an user s information in the same row in the following order o Column A Account o Column B Password o Column C Description o Column D Email 3 Go to the next row and repeat the previous step to create another user account Each row indicates one user s information Save the file in CSV format 4 Open the CSV file with Notepad and save it in UTF 8 encoding if it contains double byte characters Deleting users To delete a domain user account follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Users 2 Select the user account s to be deleted 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes 189 User account management Refer to the following table for available buttons under Action and their explanations Butto Name Description n Edit Edit the password of a domain user account Password 2
35. Controller gt Computers tab 2 Click Create a Computer 3 Fill out the computer name description and location and click Next 4 Choose the group s for the computer account and click Next 191 5 Click Create Deleting computer accounts To delete a domain user group follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Groups tab 2 Select the computer account s and click Delete 3 Click Delete Computer account management Refer to the following table for available buttons under Action and their explanations Butto Name Description 2 Edit Edit the description and location of the computer account Computer Propertie S a Edit Choose to add the computer account to the user group s Group or remove it from the user group s Members hip DNS The Domain Name System or DNS can help the domain controller locate services and devices within the domain or vice versa using service and resource records Two DNS zones are created by default the domain created when you first set up the NAS as the domain controller and the zone with a name starting with _msdcs System administrators can modify DNS settings add delete domains and add delete records Modifying DNS settings To edit a DNS setting first go to Control Panel Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt DNS tab and log in with the administrator username and password
36. Create gt Create a User 3 Follow the instructions of the wizard to complete the details Creating multiple users To create multiple domain users follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Users tab 2 Click Create gt Create Multiple Users 3 Click Next 4 Enter the name prefix e g test Enter the start number for the username e g 0001 and the number of users to be created e g 10 The NAS creates ten users named test0001 testO0002 test0003 test0010 The password entered here is the same for all the new users 5 Select to create a private shard folder for each user or not The shared folder will be named after the username If a shared folder of the same name has already existed the NAS will not create the folder 6 Specify the folder settings 7 You can view the new users created in the last step Click Finish to exit the wizard 188 8 Check that the users have been created 9 Check that the shared folders have been created for the users Batch importing users To batch import domain users follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Users tab 2 Click Create gt Batch Import Users 3 Select the option Overwrite existing users to overwrite existing domain users or leave this option unchecked if you want to import domain users without overwriting exist ones
37. EA E EEEE 235 7 2 4 Cloud BOCKUPesisistcdvcas cists shina dee sevindes a MAREELE Ia ARK Aa ANETAR SEENE AERAR AREENA EaR 238 7 2 5 External BACKUP wsisssiendisbeteevet pedi aay taheddattasdineaiante este dnedeaysansevessdedbeabdaieeasapdeiteesyieds 239 73 File Station a sec wtesinadids cence ean teinadiae nthe iddewds oer 244 724 LDAP SEVEL aniraa t Jae aaah ease eh AAAA EA AES ONETAN AS 259 Teo SQL SOVET a EaR ETIS KEARE TTEN Tues MERE VERETETT IAA EAA IONAS TS 261 7 0 NTP SCIVIGCE aan a T N A ATO OEE TTN E A ATTO OAA 263 7 7 RADIUS SEYE aaa nine o REE AGANO ATAN AA A AR EO AANE 264 1 8 SYSIOG SEVE rie ar Er baad A enc A E EE ROIA wints 266 729 TEV P SQW GR ice aa r ARA EAA NEE ERNA TAT 269 ALO Virtualization eunea ANEA ANAA LAIEN eee ick baad AARNEN RALIN OONA TA 271 AZAD NPN CHENE ceiarannsieadsnrvveeescaaasiahbedaa I NOTASI RRRA NATAN degsseers gaan ge IT EIRAN RARA 274 Ted YPN SONEL CA AA See AEA AASA ATENA TAA NETOA A ANNEN 277 T1 Web SNe rer a e E E T A EE E 282 AAA Vital Hosts e aa sonatas a ee das a eal ee 286 8 Other ApplicationS sssssssussnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 288 Bs Appr Cente a E A et es asthe aa a E A a a 289 8 2 DLNA Media SErvenrrssiro edea sin ARE AnA NANA EEA READER NI AA ERAR EER ENVERSA STA 292 873 Download Station oooirica ed neia VE AANA RAI AA IVANA 294 8 4 Hy bridDesk Station oier iai ae e aT a OANA KANEA NARAON 302 8 5 Unes SOW eRrirse ara a a i a a aa a O a a A
38. For the type of LUN allocation the maximum LUN capacity for both thin provisioning and instant allocation is 144TB or 250TB if the NAS has more than 4GB RAM Optimizing iSCSI Performance In environments that require high performance storage virtualization etc users are recommended optimize the iSCSI and NAS hard disks performance in the following ways e Use instant allocation When creating an iSCSI LUN select Instant Allocation to achieve slightly higher iSCSI performance However the benefits of thin provisioning will be lost e Create multiple LUNs Create multiple LUNs according to the number of processors on the NAS this can be found in System Status gt Resource Monitor If the NAS has four processors it is recommended to create four or more LUNs to optimize iSCSI performance e Use different LUNs for heavy load applications Spread applications such as databases and virtual machines that need high read write performance to different LUNs For example if there are two virtual machines which intensively read and write data on LUNs it is recommended to create two LUNs so that the VM workloads can be efficiently distributed Advanced ACL With the iSCSI advanced access control list ACL LUN masking policies can be configured for each connected initiator If the connected initiator is not on the list the Default policy will be applied to that initiator Note This function or its content is only applicab
39. Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Groups tab 2 Click Create a User Group 3 Select Yes and Next to assign domain user s to the group or No to create a domain group without domain users 4 Click Finish Deleting domain user groups To delete a domain user group follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Groups tab 2 Select user group s and click Delete Note It is advised not to delete the default existing group of the domain Editing group members To edit domain members within a group follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Groups tab 2 Click the Edit Group Membership button under Action 3 Select and check domain users to join them to the group or uncheck existing domain users to remove them from the group 4 Click Next Computers All computers that have already joined the domain will be listed here and with permissions granted they can access the list of domain resources such as the domain users and groups The computer accounts are created automatically after the computers or NAS joins the domain and administrators can manually create or delete computer accounts Creating computer accounts To create a domain computer account follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain
40. Green Video Yellow Music Blue Pictur e Bookm ark Repeat er Guide Record CH N A N A N A N A OK OK OK OK N A N A N A N A Previo us 310 View oO Setti ngs Hom Vide men Favo rite Repe ater Help Skip back Play Contro CH Go to Info Home Resum Return Option S OK Up Down Right Left Next N A OK OK N A OK N A OK OK OK OK OK Ww mn m Skip forw ard Vide progr ess bar File info Hom men Now playi ng Back Play back men OK Up Dow Right Left OK Up Down Right Left Video Play Video Settin g Move backw ard Move forwar Play Slow Pause Stop Audio Top Menu Subtitl e Zoom Pop up OK OK OK N A OK OK Audio List Video List OK N A N A Mov back ward oO Mov forw ard Play Slow Paus Stop Lang uage track Movi men Subti tle track 312 i Min O Be 8 5 iTunes Server Using this service MP3 files in the Qmultimedia Multimedia folder of the NAS can be shared with iTunes Computers on the LAN with iTunes installed will be able to find browse and play the shared music files After enabling iTunes server all the iTunes clients on the same subnet can play the music fi
41. However users cannot share team folders that are shared by others b Recently changed files Lists the recently updated files Preference a General i Link Status Shows the current status Click Logout to change users ii Network Recycle Bin Browse or recover files deleted from the Qsync folder b Sync i Manage paired folders Add delete or edit folder pair settings ii Import photos and videos Import photos and videos when an USB device is 213 connected This feature only checks for photos and videos in the DCIM folder in the root directory of USB devices Default folder choose a folder to import files from external drives or QGenie Do not remove any files on the NAS when synchronizing You can remove files within the local Qsync folder and files deleted from your computer will not be synchronized with the NAS The NAS will still retain copies of deleted files Policy E Conflict Policies The policies for handling the name conflicts between the Qsync server NAS and clients after it is back online from a disconnection 1 Rename the local files 2 Rename the remote NAS files 3 Replace local files with remote NAS files or 4 Replace remote NAS files with local files Sharing Policies The policies of the team folders when other Qsync users share them to this local computer 1 Always reject sharing 2 Automatically accept sharing or 3 Send a notification message once sharing occurs
42. If the job timed out again the NAS wait for another 60 seconds and retry for a third and final time RTRR Real time Remote Replication RTRR provides real time or scheduled data replication and one way and two way data synchronization between two locations such as a local NAS and a remote NAS local NAS and an FTP server or local NAS and an external drive or replication between two local folders In real time mode the source folder will be monitored and any files that are new changed and renamed will be immediately replicated to the target folder In scheduled mode the source folder will be replicated to the target folder according to the pre defined schedule One way synchronization refers to data synchronization from the source to the destination while two way synchronization means both the source and destination are synchronized after new files are copied in either side or files stored on either side are changed or deleted If the backup destination is a NAS the RTRR server Main Menu gt Backup Station gt RTRR Server or FTP service must first be enabled Main Menu gt Control Panel gt Network Services gt FTP on the remote NAS NAS models Firmware Maximum number of replication jobs supported x86 based NAS Prior to v3 5 0 64 v3 5 0 or above 32 ARM based NAS Prior to v3 5 0 RTRR replication not supported v3 5 0 or above 8 Each job supports up to 16 folder pairs 230 If your NAS
43. MB in a compressed file for scanning if applicable The maximum compressed file size may vary based on the NAS model and available memory o To scan MS Office and Mac Office files RTF PDF and HTML files select Deep scan for document files 6 Specify the actions to take when infected files are discovered and click Finish to create the scan job o Only report the virus The virus scan reports are recorded under the Reports tab No actions will be taken for the infected files o Move infected files to quarantine The infected files will be quarantined and cannot be accessed from their original shared folders Users can view the virus scan reports under the Reports tab and delete restore the infected files under the Quarantine tab o Delete infected files automatically Infected files will be deleted and cannot be 221 recovered o To receive an alert email when an infected file is found or after scanning has completed configure the SMTP server settings in System Settings gt Notification gt SMTP Server 7 The scan job will run according to its schedule Button Reports Name Run Stop Edit View last run log Delete Description Run the scan job now Stop the scan job Edit the scan job settings Open the last virus scan summary Delete the scan job View or download the reports of the latest scan jobs on the NAS Button gt DOWNLO AD Name Download Delete
44. Mac will automatically discover network services such as FTP running on the NAS without needing to enter IP addresses or configuring DNS servers Note You must activate the services on their setup pages and then enable them in this section so that the NAS can advertise them using Bonjour 205 6 6 Network Recycle Bin The Network Recycle Bin retains files deleted on the NAS Within each shared folder a dedicated folder with the name Recycle is created after the initial QTS installation Specify the number of days 1 180 to retain files and the daily time You can also specify the file extensions to be excluded from the bin This feature only supports file deletion via Samba AFP FTP and File Station Network Recycle Bin After enabling the Network Recycle Bin each deleted file or folder will be moved to the network recycle bin of the shared folder it belongs to a folder named Recycle Enable Network Recycle Bin Fileretentiontime 180 day s Daily check time 15 i 10 Exclude these file extensions case insensitive separated by comma tmp temp wtmp bik dat qold qtmp Empty Network Recycle Bin Clicking Empty All Network Recycle Bin will delete the files in all network recycle bins Using Network Recycle Bin e To delete all the files in the bin click Empty All Network Recycle Bin e To recover deleted files from the Network Recycle Bin right click on the files in the Recycle fo
45. Network to configure the NAS network settings Service Binding IP Address Edit Link Interface IP Address Subnet Mask 2 Ethernet 1 GbE N 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 0 ONS Server Default Gateway Use the settings from Ethernet 1 Use the following DNS server address Primary ONS server 8 Secondary DNS server 8 In this chapter the following topics are covered e TCP IPh12 e Wi FiM e IPv6h2d e Service Bindingh2 e Proxyli2 e DDNS Serviceh2 TCP IP i IP Address Configure the TCP IP settings DNS Server and default Gateway of the NAS on this page Click the Edit button next to an interface under Edit to edit the network settings including Network Parameters Advanced Options and DHCP Server For the NAS with two LAN ports users can connect both network interfaces to two different switches and configure the TCP IP settings The NAS will acquire two IP addresses which 112 allow access from two different subnets This is known as multi IP settings When using Qfinder to detect the NAS IP the IP of Ethernet 1 will be shown in LAN 1 only and the IP of Ethernet 2 will be shown in LAN 2 only To use port trunking for a dual LAN connection see section iii TS 110 TS 119 TS 210 TS 219 TS 219P TS 119P TS 219P TS 112 and TS 212 only have one LAN port and do not support dual LAN configuration or port trunking Network Parameters Under Network Parameters on the TCP IP
46. Options A Virtual LAN VLAN is a group of hosts which communicate as if they were attached to the same broadcast domain even if they are located in different physical locations The 113 NAS can join a VLAN and be configured as a backup storage of other devices on the same VLAN To join a VLAN select Enable VLAN and enter the VLAN ID a value between 0 and 4094 Keep the VLAN ID safe and make sure the client devices are able to join the VLAN If you forget the VLAN ID and cannot connect to the NAS you will need to reset the network settings by pressing the NAS reset button Once the NAS is reset the VLAN feature will be disabled If the NAS supports two Gigabit LAN ports and only one network interface is configured to enable VLAN you can also connect to the NAS via the other network interface Note The VLAN feature is only supported by x86 based NAS models DHCP Server A DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server assigns IP addresses to clients ona network Select Enable DHCP Server to set the NAS a DHCP server if there are none on the local network where the NAS is located Note e Do not enable DHCP server if there is one on the local network to avoid IP address conflicts or network access errors e The DHCP server option is only available to Ethernet 1 when both LAN ports of a dual LAN NAS are connected to the network and configured as standalone IP settings e Start IP End IP Lease Time Set the rang
47. Permissions for the designated folder under the Action column 2 Select WebDAV access from the dropdown menu on the top of the page and specify the access rights Choose the authentication level or scroll down to search for the account to grant its access rights Click Apply 3 Next mount the NAS shared folders as the shared folders on your computer using WebDAV Windows Vista If you are using Windows Vista you may need to install Software Update for Web Folders KB907306 This update is only for 32 bit versions of Windows Vista http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyId 17c36612 632e 4c04 9382 987622ed1d64 amp displaylang en 1 Right click on Computer and select Map Network Drive 2 Click Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and 283 pictures 3 Select Choose a custom network location 4 Enter the NAS URL with the folder name Format http NAS_IP_or_HOST_NAME SHARE_FOLDER_NAME 5 Enter the account login details that have WebDAV access rights to connect to the folder 6 Enter a name for this network place 7 The Web folder has been successfully created 8 You can locate the web folder in the Network Location section in Computer 9 You can connect to the folder though this link via HTTP WebDAV Mac OS X Follow these steps to connect to your NAS via WebDAV on Mac OS X Client Operating System Mac OS X Snow Leopard 10 6 1 1 Open Finder
48. Qmultimedia Download Qdownload and all the downloaded files will be retained The registered myQNAPcloud name on the source NAS will not be moved to the destination NAS after system migration To use the same myQNAPcloud name on the destination NAS change the myQNAPcloud name on the source NAS before system migration and register the same name on the destination NAS after the process is completed Contact the QNAP technical support department if you encounter any issues during this process Disk Volumes Supported for System Migration 33 Refer to the following table for the relationship between the number of NAS bays and the disk volume supported for system migration Destination NAS 1 bay NAS 2 bay NAS 4 bay NAS 5 bay NAS 6 bay NAS 8 bay NAS Migrating your NAS Disk volume supported for system migration 1 drive single disk volume 1 to 2 drive single disk volume JBOD RAID 0 2 drive RAID 1 1 to 4 drive single disk volume JBOD RAID O 2 drive RAID 1 3 to 4 drive RAID 5 4 drive RAID 6 4 drive RAID 10 1 to 5 drive single disk volume JBOD RAID O 2 drive RAID 1 3 to 5 drive RAID 5 4 to 5 drive RAID 6 4 drive RAID 10 1 to 6 drive single disk volume JBOD RAID O 2 drive RAID 1 3 to 6 drive RAID 5 4 to 6 drive RAID 6 4 drive or 6 drive RAID 10 1 to 8 drive single disk volume JBOD RAID O 2 drive RAID 1 3 to 8 drive RAID 5 4 to 8 drive RAID 6 4 drive 6 drive or 8
49. SSL certificates are used to provide secured connections between the NAS and web browsers providing authorization and connection encryption Encrypted connections secure data and transactions Before installing a myQNAPcloud certificate an error may occur when you try to connect to your NAS using HTTPS for example https nossl myqnapcloud com The data transmitted in the connection is not protected against security threats Unauthorized users have the potential to intercept data being sent between a NAS and web browser Purchasing and installing a myQNAPcloud SSL certificate will bring you better protection when connecting your NAS via DDNS Note A myQNAPcloud SSL certificate can only be used on NAS with QTS 4 2 or above Purchasing myQNAPcloud SSL certificates 1 Sign into the myQNAPcloud website with your myQNAPcloud account and go to SSL Certificate on the left side 2 Read and agree to the terms and conditions 3 Choose the number of certificates you want to buy only one certificate can be used on one device at a time and complete the purchase and checkout process 4 Confirm the order and return to the SSL Certificate page on the myQNAPcloud website Installing myQNAPcloud SSL certificates 1 Log into your NAS as an administrator and launch myQNAPcloud 2 Select SSL Certificate on the left panel gt click Download and install to install the certificate 3 Choose one of your purchased certificates fro
50. Space and click Create gt New Volume 2 Select a volume type based on your needs and click Next 3 Specify the volume details including the volume capacity alert threshold and volume alias tick Encryption fill out the encryption password and choose whether to save the encryption key select to create a shared folder automatically after new volume initialization and fill out the name of the shared folder for the intended volume Click Next Confirm the settings and click Finish Note that all the data on the selected drives will be DELETED Please back up the data before creating the encrypted volume Click Yes after data backup 6 Double click the newly created volume to bring up the Volume Management page 7 Click Actions gt Encryption gt Lock this Volume Click Yes An encrypted disk volume will be created on the NAS Encryption key management To manage the encryption key settings log into the NAS as an administrator and go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Double click a volume to bring up the Volume Management page and click Actions gt Encryption 76 There are three options to manage the encryption key e Change the encryption key Enter your old encryption password and the new password Please note that after the password is changed any previously exported keys will not work anymore The new encryption key needs to be downloaded if necessary s
51. and configuration refer to the Userli h section in the Privilege Settings chapter If uploaded videos do not show up in Video Station scan for them using the 360 Media Library For details on the scan please refer to the Multimedia Management chapter Right Panel T 2 Ek DK i Name o 1 Video Property 2 Tag and Description 3 Sharing 4 Email 5 Social Sharing 6 Link o Description Review and edit video properties Edit and browse video tags and descriptions Drag files to this area and share them via a link including three methods email social sharing and link Share a link via email Specify the sender recipient subject and message body of the email and click Send to send the email Make sure your email account is properly configured in QTS Desktop gt Options gt E mail Account Share a link of selected files on social networking sites Specify the subject and message body and click the social network icon to share Share a link of selected videos by directly pasting it into an email or instant message Drag and drop videos under Select Videos and under Select Link Format select the domain name LAN IP or WAN IP address note that the myQNAPcloud com domain name is only available after it is registered in myQNAPcloud Please refer to the my QNAPcloudk23 chapter for more details and HTML format click to choose a URL link HTML code vB Forum code or 361 Alt
52. based download tool that allows you to download files from the Internet through BT PT Magnet Link HTTP HTTPS FTP FTPS Xunlei FlashGet qqdl as well as Baidu Cloud downloads and subscribe to RSS feeds With the BT Search function you can easily find BT seeds to download and make your NAS as 24 7 download center Nome the burr 2015 720 me Duff 2015 RU WE me ourr 20 5 HoRIp The Duff 2015 WEB RI me over 2015 108 me ouft 2015 8RRip x te ourr 2014 1080p E vec Fight night 71 Mir E the DUFF 2015 108 El te Duff 2014 20809 El the over 2015 720 E me Duf 2015 WEB RI E the DUFF 2015 480 El me DUFF 2015 720p E Hilary Duff Q BT Search rss This chapter covers the following topics e Starting Download Stations e Familiarizing yourself with Download Stationks4 e Download Station Settings lz98 e Using Download Station 29 amp 294 Starting Download Station Depending on your NAS model Download Station may be enabled by default and can be launched from the Desktop or the Main Menu If not install and enable it in the App Center for QTS 4 1 or later versions only Launch Download Station from the Main Menu Desktop shortcut or directly log into Download Station by going to http NAS_Name_or_IP cgi bin Qdownload qdownloadindex cgi Familiarizing yourself with Download Station Menu Bar ji Name o 1 Search Bar 2
53. been powered on 2 the network cable is connected to the NAS and the orange and green indicator lights on its LAN port s are blinking and 3 The cloud key is correct 21 2 2 3 CD Installation Follow the steps in this section to complete CD installation for your NAS 1 Install the QNAP Qfinder from the product CD ROM 2 Run the QNAP Ofinder If the QNAP Qfinder is blocked by your firewall unblock the utility 3 The built in Qfinder Setup Wizard will guide you along the way to complete firmware installation Next you can use QTS account username and password to log in QTS is the operating system for the NAS 22 2 2 4 HDMI Installation Follow the steps in this section to complete the HDMI installation for your NAS 1 Connect the NAS to an HDMI display 2 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the firmware installation 3 Choose to install HD Station 304 or log into QTS with QTS account username and password QTS is the operating system for the NAS 23 2 3 Getting Utilities QNAP has prepared a number of practical and useful utilities to enhance your NAS experience After setting up the NAS choose from the following two methods to install the utilities Method 1 Downloading from the QNAP website Visit http www qnap cony and go to QTS 4 2 gt For Home For Business if you are a business user Scroll to the bottom of the screen and click Mobile Apps amp Utilities Click Lea
54. certificates you can import certificates from within the administration backend under System Settings gt Security gt Certificate amp Private Key Using Virtual Host Follow these steps to use virtual host 1 Select Enable Virtual Host and click Apply 2 Click Create a Virtual Host 286 3 Enter the host name and specify the folder under Web or Qweb where the web files will be uploaded to 4 Specify the protocol HTTP or HTTPS for connection If you select HTTPS make sure the option Enable Secure Connection SSL in Web Server has been enabled 5 Specify the port number for connection 6 Click Apply 7 Continue to enter the information for the rest of the sites you want to host on the NAS 8 Create a folder for each website sitel_mysite site2_mysite and www_mvsite2 and start transferring the website files to the corresponding folders Organize v Burn New folder 4 Bb Downloads 4 Web Sites di Joomla Jo phpBB3 d WordPress sitel_mysite site2_mysite www_mysite2 from Joomla C Users Joomla to sitel_mysite P sitel_mysite About 3 Minutes and 30 Seconds remaining WY More details Once the files transfer is complete point your web browser to the websites by http NAS_host_name or https NAS_host_name according to your settings In this example the URLs are e http sitel mysite com e http site2 mysite com e http www mysite2 com Using the above example you would s
55. connected to the network dual LAN NAS models only iv Port Trunking The NAS supports port trunking which combines two Ethemet interfaces into one to increase bandwidth and offers load balancing and fault tolerance also known as failover Load balancing is a feature which distributes workloads evenly across two Ethernet interfaces for higher redundancy Failover is the capability to maintain high availability by switching to a standby network interface slave interface when the primary network interface master interface does not correspond correctly To use port trunking on the NAS make sure at least two LAN ports of the NAS have been connected to the same switch and the settings described in sections i and ii have been configured Follow these steps to configure port trunking on the NAS 1 Click Port Trunking 115 2 Select the network interfaces for a trunking group Ethernet 1 2 Ethernet 3 4 Ethernet 5 6 or Ethernet 7 8 Choose a port trunking mode from the drop down menu The default option is Active Backup Failover Select a port trunking group to use Click Apply Click here to connect to the login page Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Network gt TCP IP Click the Edit button under Edit to edit the network settings a mn A W Note e Make sure the Ethernet interfaces are connected to the correct switch and the switch has been configured to support the port t
56. consistent and include all necessary data In case of snapshot restoration no data will be missing 99 On this page you can take manage or restore application or crash consistent snapshots on block based LUNs or check a list of servers with Snapshot Agent installed and set up remote snapshot replication jobs Note e Snapshot Replica or volumes LUNs replication between remote servers is covered in Backup Station For details please refer to the Snapshot Replicak34 chapter in Backup Station e Multiple snapshots can only be taken on block based LUNs and only one snapshot can be taken for file based LUNs if you use the LUN Backup feature e Application consistent snapshots for iSCSI LUN are only available when the Snapshot Agent is used and for VMware and VSS aware applications running on a Windows server e Snapshot only applies to these NAS models TS 269L TS 269 Pro TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 469U RP TS 469U SP TS 470 Pro TS 470 TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 670 Pro TS 670 TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 869U RP TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 1269U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1679U RP TS EC879U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC1679U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP SS EC2479U SAS RP TS EC2480U RP TS EC1680U RP TS EC1280U RP TS EC880U RP TS EC1080 Pro TS EC880 Pro TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS
57. created and if the volume of versions exceeds the new settings the earlier versions will be dropped Only the equivalent number of latest versions as of the new settings will be kept The deletion will only take effect after you click Apply or Apply All The maximum number of versions supported for Version Control is 64 Managing or Monitoring Qsync Status via Web Browser Log into the NAS via web browser and click Qsync Central Station 2 0 1 Overview This page shows the mode of use management User Customization Mode or Central Configuration Mode and the total number of online users and devices It also provides links to File Station and for installing Qsync In addition you can 216 enable or disable the Qsync service for administrators only Management settings This provides a centralized management for administrators to edit Qsync Client default settings For details on the management settings please refer to the Using Centralized Mode for Centralized Management section Users Lists the information of online users and you can manage the users of Qsync service here for administrators only Devices This table lists the status of connected devices It also provides options for you to manage each device allowing you to edit their settings block them or to remotely erase them a If users log in from their PC the name of the device will be shown as their computer name b If users log in f
58. described below Disk The physical hard disk drives and their associated storage hosts including both the NAS and its connected expansion enclosures are shown in this section Click the hard disk drive icon to bring up the Disk Health window For details on the Disk Health window please refer to the Disks 5 chapter Volume LUN All available logical volumes their capacity and type Volume LUN and Unused are listed in this section For details on volumes and LUN please refer to the Volumes 70 chapter Storage Pool This section provides a space usage overview on the storage pool created on the NAS You can check the space distribution on the pie chart for each storage pool including the size of reserved system space thick volume and free space and its subscription Subscription is the ratio between claimed space and available space in the storage pool If a user creates a thin provisioned volume with 10TB claimed space while the available space is only 1TB the Subscription value in the Overview page will be 10 1 meaning that the thin provisioned space is oversubscribed and users must note that the available space in storage pool is too low You can also click on the down arrow next to the storage pool to switch between storage pools For details on storage pools please refer to the Storage 54 Poolsl64 chapter Utilization This page is designed for users to monitor storage utilization of their NAS With volume and stora
59. drive RAID 10 Follow the steps below to perform system migration 1 Turn off the source NAS and unplug the hard drives 2 Remove the hard drives from the old trays and install them to the hard drive trays of the new NAS 34 3 Plug the hard drives to the destination NAS new model Make sure the hard drives are installed in the original order 4 Follow the instructions of the Quick Installation Guide QIG to connect the power supply and network cable s of the new NAS 5 Turn on the new NAS Login to the web administration interface as an administrator the default login ID and password of the NAS are both admin 6 If you are prompted to update the firmware of the new NAS follow the instructions to download and install the firmware 7 Click Start Migrating The NAS will restart after system migration All the data and settings will be retained Caution To avoid system damage or serious injuries the system migration procedure should be performed by an authorized server manager or IT administrator Some system settings will be removed after system migration due to a different system design Configure the following settings again on the new NAS e Windows AD e Some Apps will need to be reinstalled 35 3 QTS Basics and Desktop QTS is a user friendly NAS operating system designed to enhance every aspect of your NAS experience With basic methods such as drag and drop or point and click you can c
60. e Restore System Settings To restore all the settings click Browse to select a previously saved setting file and click Restore Restore to Factory Default e Restore Factory Defaults amp Format all Volumes Restore system settings to default and formats all disk volumes e Reset Settings Restore system settings to default without erasing user data e Reinitialize NAS Erases all data and reinitializes the NAS Caution The administrator s password and system settings will be reset to default if you press and hold the reset button on the back of the NAS for 3 seconds data and 138 139 4 11 External Device Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt External Storage to configure external storage devices USB printers and UPS systems hauled tern USS Proce Storage Information Y USBDisk1 StoreJet Total 465 76 GB NTFS C CD Used 203 93 GB E Free 261 83 GB Ready Data Sharing For details on these features refer to the following links e External Storageli4h e USB Printerh4 e UPShS 140 4 11 1 External Storage The NAS supports USB and eSATA storage devices for backup and data storage Connect the external storage device to a USB or an eSATA port of the NAS and its details will be shown on this page In this chapter the following topics are covered e Storage Information 4h e Formatha e Ejecth e Encryption Management 4 e Data Sharingh4 Storage Inform
61. folder e Group Group owner of the file or folder e Others Any other local or domain member users who are not the owner ora member of the group owner If a folder is selected you can choose Apply changes to folder s subfolder s and file s to apply the settings to all the files and subfolders within the selected folder Click OK to confirm If the Enable Advanced Folder Permissions option is enabled in Privilege Settings gt Shared Folder gt Advanced Permissions you will be able to specify the file and folder permissions by users and user groups Click to do so To select users and user groups and specify the Read and Write permissions click Add To remove permissions on the list select the users or user groups and click You can also define the file and folder owner by clicking the edit button next to the owner field To do this select a user from the list or search for a username and then click Set 254 The following options are available for folder permission settings It is recommended to configure folder permissions and subfolder permissions in Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders Only the owner can delete the contents When you apply this option to a folder the first level subfolders and files can only be deleted by their owner Only admin can create files and folders When you apply this option to a folder only administrators can create files or folders Apply changes to fi
62. folder owner The options Only the owner can delete the contents and Only admin can create files and folders will not be applied to subfolders o Apply and replace all existing permissions of this folder files and subfolders 170 Select this option to override all previously configured permissions of the selected folder and its files and subfolders except owner protection and root folder write protection settings The options Only the owner can delete the contents and Only admin can create files and folders will not be applied to subfolders o Special Permission This option is only available for root folders Select this option and choose between Read only or Read Write to allow a user to access to all the contents of a folder irrespectively of the pre configured permissions A user with special permission will be identified as admin when he she connects to the folder via Microsoft Networking If you have granted special permission with Read Write access to the user the user will have full access and is able to configure the folder permissions on Windows Note that all the files created by this user belong to admin Since admin does not have quota limit on the NAS the number and size of the files created by users with special permission will not be limited by their pre configured quota settings This option should be used for administrative and backup tasks only 7 After changing the permissions click Apply and th
63. forwarding log messages on an IP network Enable this option to save event and connection logs to a remote Syslog server When converting connection logs into a CSV file the connection type and action will be number coded Refer to the table for code meanings Connection type codes Action codes 0 UNKNOWN 0 UNKNOWN 1 SAMBA 1 DEL 2 FTP 2 READ 3 HTTP 3 WRITE 4 NFS 4 OPEN 5 AFP 5 MKDIR 6 TELNET 6 NFSMOUNT_SUCC 7 SSH 7 NFSMOUNT_FAIL 8 ISCSI 8 RENAME 9 LOGIN_FAIL 10 LOGIN_SUCC 11 LOGOUT 12 NFSUMOUNT 13 COPY 14 MOVE 15 ADD Advanced Log Search Advanced log search is provided to search for system event logs system connection logs and online users based on user preferences First specify the log type users 158 computer name date range and source IP and click Search to search for desired logs or reset to list all logs Please note that for online users only the source IP and Computer name can be specified 159 5 Privilege Settings Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Systems to configure privilege settings disk quotas and domain security on the NAS Control Panel X GB lsn a Gea 2 ae Overmew as 7 Prealege Settings I System Settings A a b 2 2 E O H 1 Users User Groups 5 J Folders Quota Dorr Security Users a gt User Groups Ga Shared Folders G Quota Phy Domain Security m tA Network Services Applications
64. from its host Click this button to update firmware for the chosen enclosure Click this button to rename the chosen enclosure Click this button and select a RAID group to check its details including capacity RAID group name RAID type and disk member Recovering Expansion Enclosures Click Recover on the top right side of the window and there are three options available 61 1 Recover Enclosure Recover volumes on an enclosure that was accidentally disconnected e g unscheduled shutdown or unplugged SAS cable from the NAS host When this occurs a broken chain symbol will be shown in the Chassis View and the status of the affected storage pool will be shown as Error and RAID group as Not active 2 Reinitialize enclosure ID This is only used to reorder ID for expansion enclosures in a numerical manner 3 Scan All Free Drives Scan drives in a free state in the NAS and attached enclosures for existing volumes or storage pools 62 4 2 2 2 Storage Space The Storage Space features Storage Pools and Volumes This page lists available storage pools and the volumes iSCSI LUNs and snapshots from remote NAS on each of these storage pools It displays these storage entities capacity and or usage to give a complete view of storage allocation Users can create or manage storage pools volumes RAID groups or take view snapshots of the volumes on this page For details on Storage Pools Volumes and RAID Grou
65. hour o Daily Specify the time when a daily backup should be executed for example 02 02 every day o Weekly Select a day of the week and the time when a weekly backup should be executed o Monthly Select a day of the month and the time when a monthly backup should be executed o Occurs once at Specify the date and time the scheduled replication job will once be executed and this replication job will be executed only once Note If a folder or its parent folder or child folder has been selected as the source or destination in a folder pair of a replication job you cannot select the folder as the source or destination of another folder pair of the same job You can also create a folder as you select the folder pair To do so enter the folder name and click the folder icon from the drop down list From QTS 4 1 RTRR can also back up the entire FTP site To do so select the root from the folder drop down list Please note that this is only the case when the source is a FTP site Two way synchronization only supports scheduled data replication The expiration time setting is not available for Replicate Now and Occurs once at in Step 7 Bandwidth Control in both RTRR and Rsync only works if both NAS servers of a replication job sender and receiver are QNAP NAS and use firmware version 3 6 or above 232 8 To configure synchronization policy select Configure policy and filter and click Next Select whether or
66. in the App Center for QTS 4 1 or later versions only and follow these steps 334 1 Import photos and videos to a shared folder on the NAS There are three ways to upload photos and videos to the NAS 1 Install Qfinder on your PC or Mac set up a network drive and upload files to your preferred shared folders For details on setting up a network drive check the Connecting to NAS Shared Folders 25 chapter 2 Click Shared Photos or Private Collection in the left panel in Manage mode and click Import on the main menu to import photos or videos from the local PC A new shared folder named with the date that files are uploaded will be created on the NAS to store your uploaded files for Shared Photos this newly created shared folder is located under the Multimedia folder for Private Collection this shared folder is located under the home folder A corresponding album will be created under Album as well and 3 Switch to the folder view browsing mode and drag amp drop photos and videos to a preferred folder Note that when using the first and third approach you can choose the NAS folder to upload photos and videos into The Photo Station supports the following file formats BMP JPG JPE PNG TGA GIF RAW am srf sr2 dcr k25 kdc Image cr2 crw nef mrw ptx pef raf 3fr erf mef mos orf rw2 dng x3f MP4 H 264 Other formats avi m2ts mpg mp4 wmv ts tp Video asf m2t mov mod m2v mpeg 3g
67. installed to enhance your entertainment and productivity needs Control Panel B Search Q Em Overview System Settings A Privilege Settings Z Network Services Applications E Station Manager gt HybridDesk Station W iTunes Server EA OLNA Media Server Multimedia Management Oi Transcode Management Wed Server LDAP Server X VPN Server VPN Client The HydridDesk Station provides a portal for users to install various TV applications such as XBMC and Chrome on the NAS attached to the TV via the HDMI port and enjoy the multimedia contents Version 3 0 3 Update all Apps install AllApps Restar Remove Settings Tips If you have a NAS with a One Touch Copy button you can quickly restart HybridDesk Station by holding this button for 6 seconds Chrome brings endless wed content to your HOTV Disable and allows you to surf the Internet from your couch Remove Clememine is a multi platform music player with a fast and easy to use interface that allows you to listen to internet radio stations and the music stored Upgrade on your Turbo NAS CodexPack is an advanced and proprietary hardware Disable transcoding technology developed and can Remove Significantly improve the performance for transcoding tasks created on your NAS to check SQL server transcoding tasks please go to Control Panel gt ysg Application Services gt Transcode Management This chapter covers th
68. mapping Enable automatic port mapping on the UPnP supported gateway Enable DHT network To allow the NAS to download the files even no trackers of the torrent can be connected enable DHT Distributed Hash Table network and specify the UDP port number for DHT Protocol encryption Enable this option for encrypted data transfer Bandwidth Limit Specify the maximum download rate of BT download tasks O Global maximum concurrent downloads Specify the maximum number of concurrent BT downloads the maximum number of concurrent downloads for x86 based NAS models is 30 and 10 for ARM based NAS models Global maximum upload rate KB s Enter the maximum upload rate for BT download 0 means unlimited Global maximum download rate KB s Enter the maximum download rate for BT download 0 means unlimited Maximum upload rate per torrent KB s Enter the maximum upload rate per torrent 0 means unlimited Global maximum number of connections The maximum number of allowed connections to the torrent Maximum number of connected peers per torrent The maximum number of allowed peers to connect to a torrent Seeding Preferences Specify the share ratio for seeding a torrent and the sharing time The share ratio is calculated by dividing the amount of uploaded data by the amount of downloaded data Proxy specify the proxy server for BT download Select the proxy type and enter the host IP and port login username and password for
69. mode below Network Slave Mode A network UPS slave communicates with network UPS master to receive the UPS status To set up your NAS with UPS as network slave mode follow these steps 1 ou BR U N Make sure the NAS is connected to the same physical network as the network UPS master Select the option Enable UPS Support Select Network UPS slave fromthe Protocol drop down menu Enter the IP address of the network UPS server Choose between whether the NAS should shut down or enter auto protection mode 152 after AC power fails Specify the time in minutes that the NAS should wait before executing the option you have selected After the NAS enters auto protection mode the NAS resumes the previous operation status when the power restores 6 Click Apply All to confirm Note To allow the UPS device to send SNMP alerts to the NAS in the event of power loss you may have to enter the NAS IP address in the UPS configuration page Behavior of the UPS Feature of the NAS There are three phases during a power outage e Phase 1 Power loss starts until the end of the waiting time e Phase 2 Fromthe end of the waiting time to the point when the UPS device runs out of its battery e Phase 3 After the UPS device runs out of its battery and until the power restores Phase 1 As soon as the power loss starts the NAS will detect the UPS device s battery If the remaining UPS battery charge is lt 1
70. necessary or use the default port number 514 Click Apply to save the settings After enabling the NAS as a Syslog server enter the NAS IP as the Syslog server IP on the Syslog clients to receive Syslog messages from them e Log Settings Specify the maximum log size 1 100 MB of Syslog messages the location NAS shared folder where the logs will be saved and the file name Once the logs have reached their maximum size the log file will be automatically archived and renamed with the archive date as MyLogFile_yyyy_mm_dd for example MyLogFile_2011_12 31 If multiple log files are archived on the same day the file will be named as MyLogFile_yyyy_mm_dd number For example MyLogFile_2011_12_ 31 1 MyLogFile_2011_12 31 2 and so on Click Apply to save the settings e Email Notification The NAS supports sending email alerts to up to 2 dedicated email addresses configured in System Settings gt Notification gt Alert 266 Notification when the severity of the received Syslog messages match the specified level To use this feature configure the SMTP server settings in System Settings gt Notification gt SMTP Server Next enable email notification and select the severity level in Applications gt Syslog Server gt Server Settings Click Apply to save the settings Severit Level y smallest number the highest Emerg 0 Alert 1 Crit 2 Err 3 Warning 4 Filter Settings Description Emergen
71. not to enable the following options o Delete extra files Delete extra files in the target folder Deletions made on the source folder will be repeated on the target folder This option is not available for real time synchronization o Detect sparse files Select this option to ignore files of null data o Check file contents Specify to examine file contents date size and name to determine if two files are identical This option is not available for real time synchronization o Compress files during transmissions Specify whether or not the files should be compressed for synchronization operations Note that more CPU resources will be used o Ignore symbolic links Select this option to ignore symbolic links in the pair folder o Extended attributes Select this option to keep the information in extended attributes o Timeout and retry settings Specify the timeout period and retry settings if a synchronization operation fails 9 Specify the file size file types to include exclude and file date time to filter data synchronization Enter a job name o File size Specify the minimum and maximum size of the files to be replicated o Last modified Specify the number of days files are last modified for replication o Include file types Specify the file types to be replicated o Exclude file types Specify the file types to be excluded for replication o File date time Specify the date and time of the files to be replicated 10 Click
72. obtained when this option is enabled Please note that an unexpected system shutdown may cause data loss This option is disabled when the Download Station or MySQL service is enabled Smart Fan Smart Fan Configuration e Enable smart fan recommended Select to use the default smart fan settings or to manually define the settings When the system default settings are selected the fan rotation speed will be automatically adjusted when the NAS temperature CPU temperature and hard drive temperature meet the criteria It is recommended to enable this option e Set fan rotation speed manually By manually setting the fan rotation speed the fan will continually rotate at this speed Note The NAS will automatically shut down to protect itself if a temperature threshold is exceeded The threshold values vary depending on NAS models 129 4 7 Power You can restart or shut down the NAS specify the behavior of the NAS after a power recovery and set the schedule for automatic system power on off restart on this page Power Recovery Power Schedule Enable Disable Note When EuP is disabled the power consumption of the server is slightly higher than 1W when the server is powered off EuP Mode Configuration EuP also Energy using Products is a European Union EU directive designed to improve the energy efficiency of electrical devices reduce the use of hazardous substances increase ease of product recycling and
73. on LAN WOL This feature is only supported by certain NAS models Power Recovery Configure the NAS to resume to the previous power on or power off status turn on or remain off when the AC power resumes after a power outage Note Only x86 based NAS models can be turned on automatically after power recovery To set it up select Turn on the server automatically in Control Panel gt System Settings gt Power gt Power Recovery Power Schedule Specify the schedule for automatic system power on off restart or sleep mode Weekdays are Monday to Friday weekends are Saturday and Sunday Up to 15 schedules can be set Enable Postpone the sleep restart shutdown schedule when replication job is in process to allow scheduled system restart shutdown to be carried out after a running replication job completes Otherwise the NAS will ignore the running replication job and execute scheduled system restart or shutdown 131 132 4 8 Notification Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Notification to configure NAS notifications SMTP Server Select an e mail account Custom SMTP server smtp gmail com Port number 465 E mail tate huang gmail com Username tate huang gmail com Password Secure connection Alert Notification When the following system events occur Warming Error E mail The NAS supports email alerts to inform the administrator of system errors and warnings
74. on the movie poster to upload it from your PC or via URL or restore it to the default poster Importing displaying and adjusting subtitles You can import display and adjust subtitles files for movies e To import and display subtitle files a Save the subtitles file in the same directory as the video file with an identical filename for example a video with the filename video avi must have subtitle files named video eng srt or video cht srt The subtitles will then be available to use when watching the video and you can switch between multiple languages b In the video player click CC on the player panel gt Import subtitles and choose the subtitles file from a computer c In the video player click CC on the player panel gt Search for subtitles and the system will search for subtitles based on the video information or by keywords Select one of the results and the system will display the subtitles e Adjust Subtitles In the video player click CC on the player panel gt Adjust subtitles to change the subtitles font size color or enable background effects Or make subtitles display earlier or later if they are not synced with the audio 366 Note Import subtitles and Search for subtitles are only supported from firmware 4 2 0 Supported subtitles file formats srt ass and ssa If your subtitles use an incompatible format we recommend using Aegisub to convert them Media Library and
75. or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is voi
76. same work 2 Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit 390 them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an ef
77. settings a Configure register_globals Select to enable or disable register_globals This setting is disabled by default If the web program prompts you to enable php register_globals enable this option For security concerns it is recommended to disable this option b Maintenance Click Restore to restore the web server configuration to default c php ini Maintenance Select the option php ini Maintenance and choose to upload edit or restore php ini 3 Secure Connection SSL Enter the port number for SSL connection 4 Upload HTML files to the shared folder Qweb Web on the NAS The file index html index htm or index php will be the home path of your web page 5 You can access the web page you upload by entering http NAS IP in the web browser When the Web Server is enabled you must enter http NAS IP 8080 in 282 your web browser to access the NAS login page WebDAV WebDAV Web based Distributed Authoring and Versioning is a set of extensions to the HTTP S protocol that allows users to edit and manage files collaboratively on remote servers After enabling this function you can map shared folders of your NAS as network drives of a remote PC over the Internet To edit the access rights go to Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders page To map a NAS shared folder as a network drive on your PC enable WebDAV and follow these steps 1 Go to Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders Click Access
78. sharing options file type source path and search criteria gt Click Create To manage smart albums right click on an album under Smart Album in the left panel and choose to download remove rename share stream play as a slideshow open or configure its settings Sharing photos videos albums or smart albums You can share photos videos albums or smart albums with your friends via email social networks or sharing links using Sharing Cart or configure sharing settings when you create an album or smart album Sharing Cart Sharing Cart allows you to conveniently collect photos and videos stored in different albums or folders before sharing them After you collect items using Sharing Cart choose one of these methods to share them e Email Complete required fields including sender email recipient emails password valid period subject and message in More settings and click Create Note To share files folders using your own email account please first set your email account in QTS Desktop gt Options gt E mail Account 342 e Social network Complete required fields including shared way social network message domain name choose to use SSL set the password and valid period and click Create e Sharing link Choose the link format and whether to create a secure link using SSL set the password and valid period and click Create Note that for album or smart album all the photos videos within
79. that album will be loaded to Sharing Cart while for a photo or video only that item is loaded For sharing with your friends on Facebook you can bind your Facebook account with Photo Station After the account is successfully bound your Facebook friends can log into Photo Station http NAS_Name or IP photo with their account to browse photos from shared albums Configuring sharing settings As you create an album you can choose to share it with other NAS users choose whether all NAS users can edit the album or only the album creator administrator can edit the album or the public show this album on the QTS login page please note that this option is only available for administrators or not to share at all leave both options unchecked and set the valid period on the album creation page Checking sharing history To check the sharing history click Shared Center on the left panel in Manage mode You can review the details of a record or re share the shared items Photo and Video Operations After right clicking on a photo or video in Manage mode a menu will show up and users can choose to perform a desired action from the list 343 Operation Rotation counter clockwise rotation icon View eye icon Information i View Rotation clockwise rotation icon View Play Open in new browser tab Open with VLC Streaming to Network Media Player Share Download Add to Album Descrip
80. the NAS disk volume uses EXT4 enable this option for higher write performance Note that an unexpected system shutdown may lead to data loss This option will be disabled if the following services are enabled Download Station MySQL service user quota and Surveillance Station It is recommended to disable this option if the NAS is set as shared storage ina virtualized or clustered environment Enable warning alert for redundant power supply on the web based interface If two power supply units PSU are installed on the NAS and connected to the power sockets both PSU will supply the power to the NAS applied to 1U and 2U models Turn on the redundant power supply mode in System Settings gt Hardware to receive warnings for the redundant power supply The NAS will sound and record error messages in System Logs if the PSU is plugged out or does not respond correctly If only one PSU is installed on the NAS DO NOT enable this option This function is disabled by default Turn on LED light If your NAS has a LED indicator ex TS 453mini you can choose to turn on its LED indicator set the LED brightness level and configure a schedule for the brightness setting Buzzer Enable alarm buzzer Enable this option to allow the alarm buzzer to beep when certain system operations startup shutdown or firmware upgrade are executed or system events error or warning occur Write Cache 128 Better write performance can be
81. the NAS varies depending on network 93 infrastructure and application performance Excessive concurrent connections may impact NAS performance Note e It is NOT recommended to connect to the same iSCSI target with two different clients iSCSI initiators at the same time as it may lead to data loss or disk damage e For ARM based NAS models the maximum volume capacity supported for online RAID capacity expansion is 8TB iSCSI Quick Configuration Wizard Follow the steps below to configure the iSCSI target service on the NAS 1 If no iSCSI targets have been created yet the Quick Configuration Wizard will automatically be launched and prompt users to create iSCSI targets and LUNs 2 Select iSCSI Target with a mapped LUN more on iSCSI target only and iSCSI LUN only in the following sections and click Next 3 Click Next 4 Enter the target name and alias 5 Only use Enable clustering access to the iSCSI target from multiple initiators for cluster aware file systems such as VMware Virtual Machine File System The Data Digest and Header Digest are optional fields expand on CRC Checksum and are the parameters for which the iSCSI initiator is verified when it attempts to connect to the iSCSI target Click Next 6 Enter the CHAP authentication settings and click Next Check Use CHAP authentication and only the initiator will be authenticated by the iSCSI target and users of the initiators are requ
82. the Turbo NAS e The Turbo NAS is hereafter referred to as the NAS e This manual provides the description of all the functions of the NAS The product you purchased may not support certain functions dedicated to specific models Legal Notices All the features functionality and other product specifications are subject to change without prior notice or obligation Information contained herein is subject to change without notice QNAP and the QNAP logo are trademarks of QNAP Systems Inc All other brands and product names referred to are trademarks of their respective holders Further the or symbols are not used in the text Disclaimer Information in this document is provided in connection with QNAP products No license express or implied by estoppels or otherwise to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document Except as provided in QNAP s terms and conditions of sale for such products QNAP Assumes no liability whatsoever and QNAP disclaims any express or implied warranty relating to sale and or use of QNAP products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose merchantability or infringement of any patent copyright or other intellectual property right QNAP products are not intended for use in medical life saving life sustaining critical control or safety systems or in nuclear facility applications In no event shall QNAP Systems Inc QNAP liability exceed th
83. the disk You can now use the iSCSI target as an external drive on your Mac 103 This section shows you how to use the Linux Open iSCSI Initiator on Ubuntu to add the iSCSI target as an extra partition Before you start using the iSCSI target service make sure you have created an iSCSI target with a LUN on the NAS and installed the correct iSCSI initiator for your OS About Linux Open iSCSI Initiator The Linux Open iSCSI Initiator is a built in package in Ubuntu 8 04 LTS and later You can connect to an iSCSI volume at a shell prompt with just a few commands More information about Ubuntu is available at http www ubuntu com and for information and download location of Open iSCSI visit http www open iscsi org Note Snapshot LUNs are not supported by the Linux Open iSCSI Initiator Using Linux Open iSCSI Initiator Install the open iscsi package The package is also known as the Linux Open iSCSI Initiator sudo apt get install open iscsi Follow these steps to connect to an iSCSI target with Linux Open iSCSI Initiator You may need to modify the iscsid conf for CHAP logon information such as node session auth username amp node session auth password vi etc iscsi iscsid conf Save and close the file then restart the open iscsi service etc init d open iscsi restart Discover the iSCSI targets on a specific host for example 10 8 12 31 with default port 3260 iscsiadm m discovery t sendtargets p 10 8 12
84. the proxy server For details on the setup of the proxy server please refer to its user manual BT Search Select the BT engines to enable for BT search on the Download Station 297 RSS Update Enable RSS download and specify the time interval to for the NAS to update the RSS feeds and check if any new contents that match the filters are available Add on You can enable and disable supported BT sites torrent search engines and indexers on this page New BT sites search engines and indexers can be added as an Add on to enrich the possibilities of Download Station File Hosting Account You can save the login information for up to 64 HTTP and FTP accounts To add login information click Add Account Enter the host name or IP username and password To allow the login information to appear for account selection when configuring HTTP or FTP download select Enabled next to the newly added account To edit the settings of an account select an entry on the list and click Edit Account To delete an account select an entry on the list and click Delete Account Using Download Station Adding download task s There are three ways to add download tasks 1 Drag and drop BT PT files from the local PC to Download Station or click button to add BT PT files or multiple URLs HTTP FTP Magnet link 2 You can search for BT files using the BT search function to add download tasks 3 In RSS on the left panel you can add RS
85. this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent o
86. to access Qayex files Manage Qax files or restore deleted files from Computers browser In this chapter the following topics are covered e Before you Start 208 e Starting Qsync Client o e Synchronizationkod e Sharingki e Remote Accesski e Synchronization Management 1A e Version Controll214 e Managing or Monitoring Qsync Status via Web Browserk18 e Using Centralized Mode for Centralized Management R Before you Start Follow the 3 steps below before Qsync deployment 1 Creating user accounts on the NAS 2 Downloading the Qsync Client utility on your computers and Qfile on your mobile devices 3 Logging into the NAS serving as a Qsync server from your computers or mobile devices referred to in this document as Qsync clients 1 Creating user accounts on the NAS 208 o Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Users gt click Create or go to Qsync Central Station 2 0 gt Users gt Create a User o Only NAS administrators can create accounts 2 Downloading Qsync Client Follow the instructions on the Overview page to download the utility log into the NAS gt click Qsync Central Station 2 0 on the NAS Desktop gt Overview page or directly download the utility from the QNAP website Support gt Download gt Utilities o For computers download the Qsync Client utility only available for Windows o For mobile devices download and install Qfile fro
87. to bring up the Storage Pool Management page Select a failed RAID group Click Manage gt Recover The chosen RAID group will be recovered 85 4 2 2 3 Cache Acceleration Based on SSD technology the Cache Acceleration feature is designed to boost access performance of the NAS On this page you can both monitor SSD performance and manage cache acceleration for your NAS This chapter covers the following topics e Feature Requirementsls e Creating SSD Volumes 8e e Removing SSD Volumes s e Expanding SSD Volumes 8 e Configuring Volumes for SSD Cachels7 e Setting Space Reclamation and SSD Trim 874 Feature Requirements SSD drives must be installed to enable this function and this feature is only available for certain NAS models with memory requirements Refer to the following link for details https www qnap com i en enterprise_apply_v2 con_show php op showone amp cid 7 Refer to the table below for memory requirements Cache Capacity RAM Requirement 512 GB from 1 GB to 4 GB 1 TB from 4 GB to 8 GB 2TB from 8 GB to 16 GB 4TB Above 16 GB For example for 1 TB of SSD capacity at least 4GB RAMs are required for the NAS On this page users can choose to create remove and expand a SSD volume and configure the SSD cache Creating SSD Volumes Follow the steps below to create a SSD volume 1 Click Create 2 Select the SSD drive s and cache algorithm to create a SSD cache volume 3 Select t
88. to download that seed create a task open the link URL or download the torrent file RSS List add edit delete or update RSS feeds Download Station Settings Click Settings to configure Download Station Global Settings Download Schedule Select continuous download or specify the download schedule When setting the download schedule select Full speed to use the global speed limit unlimited for all the download tasks Select Limited to apply the speed limit settings of the downloaded services Notification Select to send a notification by email when a download task completes SMTP settings must be configured properly in System Settings gt Notification Search Agree to enable the BT search function HTTP Connection Specify the maximum number of concurrent HTTP downloads Bandwidth Limit Specify the maximum download rate of HTTP download tasks 0 means unlimited the maximum number of concurrent HTTP and FTP downloads for x86 based NAS models is 30 and 10 for ARM based NAS models 296 FTP Connection Specify the maximum number of concurrent FTP downloads BT Bandwidth Limit Specify the maximum download rate of FTP download tasks 0 means unlimited the maximum number of concurrent HTTP and FTP downloads for x86 based NAS models is 30 and 10 for ARM based NAS models Connection Setting O O O Specify the ports for BT download The default port numbers are 6881 6889 Enable UPnP port
89. to improve environment friendliness of products When EuP is enabled the following settings will be affected so that the NAS maintains low power consumption less than 1W when the NAS is powered off e Wake on LAN Disabled e AC power resumption The NAS will remain off after the power restores from an outage e Scheduled power on off restart settings Disabled When EuP is disabled the power consumption of the NAS is slightly higher than 1W when the NAS is powered off EuP is disabled by default so that you can use the functions Wake on LAN AC power resumption and power schedule settings properly This feature is only supported by certain NAS models 130 Wake on LAN WOL Enable this option to allow users to power on the NAS remotely by Wake on LAN If the power cable is unplugged when the NAS is turned off Wake on LAN will not function even if the power supply is reconnected afterwards To wake up the NAS when it is in sleep mode or powered down press the NAS power button or use the WOL feature in Qfinder or Qmanager The wake up function on the NAS is only available after the WOL option is enabled in Control Panel gt System Settings gt General Settings gt Power gt Wake on LAN WOL e For Qfinder select a NAS and click Tools gt Remote Wake Up Wake on LAN e For Qmanager click gt next to the NAS to be selected on the login page scroll down to the bottom of the screen and click Wake
90. to the un mapped iSCSI LUN list Map Map the LUN to an iSCSI target This option is only available on the un mapped iSCSI LUN list View View the connection status of an iSCSI target Connections Note Some of the above options are not available if the iSCSI target is connected Switching iSCSI LUNs between targets Follow the steps below to switch an iSCSI LUN between targets 1 Select an iSCSI LUN to un map from its iSCSI target Click Action gt Disable Click OK RW N Click Action gt Un map to un map the LUN The LUN will appear on the un mapped iSCSI LUN list Select the un mapped iSCSI LUN Click Action gt Map to map the LUN to another target Select the target to map the LUN and click Apply The LUN will be mapped to the target o N DD UW After creating the iSCSI targets and LUN on the NAS the iSCSI initiator installed on the computer Windows PC Mac or Linux can be used to connect to the iSCSI target and LUN and the disk volumes can be used as the virtual drives on the computer Expanding iSCSI LUN capacity 97 The NAS supports capacity expansion for iSCSI LUNs To do so follow the steps below 1 Locate an iSCSI LUN on the iSCSI target list 2 Click Action gt Modify 3 Specify the capacity of the LUN Note that the LUN capacity can be increased several times up to the maximum limit but cannot be decreased 4 Click Apply to save the settings Note
91. up data to the local NAS specify the access password The client server will be prompted to enter the password to back up data to the NAS via RTRR You can specify the IP addresses or host names which are allowed to access the NAS for remote replication Up to 10 rules can be configured To allow all connections select Allow all connections To specify IP addresses or host names select Allow connections from the list only and click Add Enter an IP address or specify a range of IP addresses by entering the IP and subnet mask Select the access right Read Only or Read Write By selecting Read Write the client server is allowed to delete files on the local NAS Click Finish to exit After 225 saving the access rule click Apply and the NAS will restart to apply the settings Check backup jobs from other NAS You can check and manage backup jobs from other NAS that use the current NAS as a target destination for their backup To check backup jobs click the Incoming List tab and the details including the job name source NAS destination NAS job schedule and job status of the backup jobs will be shown in the list You can also manage backup jobs in this list To do so select backup jobs under Incoming List gt choose to clear job records open the backup folder or deny access of the backup jobs to your NAS Time Machine You can enable Time Machine support to use the NAS as a backup destination for Macs by th
92. users access the folders through your NAS Up to 10 folders can be linked to a portal folder To use this function follow these steps 1 Enable folder aggregation 2 Click Create a Portal Folder 3 Enter the portal folder name Select to hide the folder or not and enter an optional comment for the portal folder Select the option User must login before accessing the portal folder to avoid guest access and permission issues on the shared folders 4 Click the Link Configuration button under Action and enter the remote folder settings Make sure the folders are open for public access 5 Upon successful connection you can connect to the remote folders through the NAS Note Folder Aggregation is only supported in Microsoft networking service and is recommended for a Windows AD environment If there is permission control on the folders you need to join the NAS and the remote servers to the same AD domain Advanced Permissions Advanced Folder Permissions and Windows ACL provide subfolder and file level permissions control They can be enabled independently or together Protocols Permission Options How to 175 Configure Advanced Folder FTP AFP File 3 Read Read amp NAS web UI Permissions Station Samba Write Deny Windows ACL Samba 13 NTFS Windows File permissions Explorer Both FTP AFP File Please see the Windows File Station Samba application note Explorer https www qnap con yi en trade
93. wallpaper display styles and configure display settings including the gallery view source content filter or sort by moving your mouse over the button and click Display Settings Refer to the Viewing photos and videosk44 section for more details 336 9 Music Play Pause background music You can also choose the music source Now Playing list in Music Station or system default by moving your mouse over the button and clicking Music Settings 1 Slideshow Play all of the photos in an album as a slideshow You can 0 also configure slideshow settings including the speed effect and music by moving your mouse over the button and clicking Slideshow Settings Note e To stream media files to HDMI or Chromecast using the Network Media Player the Media Streaming Add On must first be installed in the App Center e Only MP4 video files can be directly streamed if your NAS does not support On the fly Transcoding You can consider transcoding them into different media formats if they are desirable For details on transcoding please refer to the Transcode Managements chapter e If your NAS supports transcoding please install the CodexPack App before using this function The NAS will try to transcode to a suitable format for your device If your NAS does not support transcoding the NAS will only output the original file format and the seek function may not work properly In this case please make sure that your device is compatib
94. when leaving QTS Users will be prompted for confirmation each time they leave the QTS Desktop such as clicking the browser back button or close the browser It is advised to check this option o Reopen windows when logging back into QTS Check this option and all the current desktop settings such as the windows opened before your logout will be kept after your next NAS login o Show the desktop switching button Check this option to hide the next desktop button No 12 and only display them when you move your mouse cursor close to the buttons o Show the link bar on the desktop Uncheck this option to hide the link bar No 13 No 14 and No 15 o Show the Dashboard button Uncheck this option to hide the Dashboard button NO 10 o Show the NAS time on the desktop Uncheck this option to not display the NAS time in the bottom right of the desktop o Keep Main Menu open after selection Keep the Main Menu pinned unpinned on the desktop o Show a list of actions when external storage devices are detected Uncheck this option and the Autoplay dialog box will not appear after you plug in an external device 41 Admin Control More Customize user specific settings change your user password restart shut down the NAS or log out your user account e Last login time The time the system was last logged in e Options Refer to No 7 above e Sleep Puts your NAS into sleep mode There are three ways to wake up the
95. will all be saved to a storage pool until that storage pool runs out of its space When that happens the system will start recycling older snapshots regardless the snapshot limitation set in Snapshot Global Settings 7A When the snapshot reserve is set to a value greater than 0 this reserved space will be dedicated entirely to snapshots The free space in a storage pool will be lower after the value is set and the snapshots will only use the space reserved When the space used for snapshots exceeds the snapshot reserve the system will start recycling older snapshots regardless the snapshot limitation set in Snapshot Global SettingsI74 To set snapshot reservation follow these steps 1 2 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Double click a storage pool to set reserved space for snapshots and to bring up the Storage Pool Management page Click Actions gt Set Snapshot Reserved enter a value for snapshot reserved space and click Apply Creating New Volumes for Storage Pools To create a new volume for a storage pool follow these steps 68 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool 3 Click Create gt New Volume Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the creation process For more details please refer to the Volumes 7 section Creating New iSCSI LUNs for Storage Pools To create a new iSCSI LUN for a storage pool follow t
96. 1 TS x53 SS x53 4 1 x TS x10 TS x12 TS x19 TS x20 TS x21 HS 210 TS x39 TS 509 TS 809 SS x39 TS x59 TS x59U TS x69 TS x69U TS x70 TS x70U TS x79 TS x79U 32 Firmware Version 3 8 x and older 4 0 2 TS x10 TS x12 TS x19 TS x20 TS x21 HS 210 TS x39 TS 3 8 x and 509 TS 809 SS x39 older TS x69 TS x69U TS TS x59 TS x59U TS 4 0 5 4 0 2 x70 TS x70U TS x79 x69 TS x69U TS x70 TS x79U ax TS x70U TS x79 TS x79U TS x31 TS 431U HS 4 0 5 251 251 TS x51 x51 4 1 1 and TS x53 SS x53 older Note The destination NAS should contain enough drive bays to house the hard drives of the source NAS Users are encouraged to only use drives that are compatible with the NAS before system migration or the data may be inaccessible For a compatibility list go to http www qnap conycompatibility SS x39 and SS 469 Pro series only support 2 5 inch hard disk drives Encrypted disk volumes cannot be migrated to a NAS that does not support file system encryption File system encryption is not supported by the TS 110 TS 119 TS 210 HS 210 TS 219 TS 219P TS x20 TS x21 TS 410 TS 419P TS 410U TS 419U TS 119P TS 219P TS 419P TS 112 TS 212 TS 412 TS 419U TS 412U TS 420U and TS 421U Multimedia Station Download Station iTunes Server and DLNA Media Server features will be removed after migrating non TS x79 models to TS x70U TS x79 models The shared folders Multimedia
97. 31 3260 Check the available iSCSI nodes to connect iscsiadm m node You can delete the nodes you do not want to connect to when the service is on with the following command iscsiadm m node op delete targetname THE_TARGET_IQN Restart open iscsi to login all the available nodes etc init d open iscsi restart 104 You should be able to see the login message as below Login session iface default target iqn 2004 04 com NAS iSCSI ForUbuntu B9281B portal 10 8 12 31 3260 OK Check the device status with dmesg dmesg tail Enter the following command to create a partition dev sdb is the device name fdisk dev sdb Format the partition mkfs ext3 dev sdb1 Mount the file system mkdir mnt iscsi mount dev sdb1i mnt iscsi You can test the I O speed using the following command hdparm tT dev sdb1 Below are some iscsiadm related commands Discover the targets on the host iscsiadm m discovery type sendtargets portal HOST_IP Login a target iscsiadm m node targetname THE_TARGET_IQN login Logout a target iscsiadm m node targetname THE_TARGET_IQN logout Delete a Target iscsiadm m node op delete targetname THE_TARGET_IQN 105 4 2 3 2 LUN Backup The NAS supports backing up iSCSI LUNs to different storage locations Windows Linux or local shared folders restoring the LUNs to the NAS or creating a LUN snapshot and mapping it to an iSCSI t
98. 459 Pro II TS 559 Pro TS 559 Pro II TS 659 Pro TS 659 Pro II TS 859 Pro TS 859U RP TS 859U RP TS 809 Pro TS 809U RP TS 879 Pro TS 1079 Pro TS 879U RP TS EC879U RP TS 1279U RP TS EC1279U RP TS 269 Pro TS 269L TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 251 TS 451 TS 651 TS 851 TS 253 Pro TS 453 Pro TS 653 Pro TS 853 Pro SS 453 Pro SS 853 Pro A group name cannot exceed 256 characters It is case insensitive and supports double byte characters such as Chinese Japanese and Korean except the following ones Lies haan 165 5 3 Shared Folders Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders to configure shared folders of your NAS Shared Folder Advanced Permissions Folder Aggregation Create Restore Default Shared Folders Folder Name Size Folders Files Hidden Volume Download 5 04 GB 19 666 No RAID 5 Disk Volume Multimedia 73 11 GB 180 18993 No RAID 5 Disk Volume Public 27 95 GB 1737 7790 No RAID 5 Disk Volume Recordings 620 13 MB 8 24 No RAID 5 Disk Volume USBDisk1 8 KB 1 0 No USB Disk 1 Usb 6 11 GB 51 642 No RAID 5 Disk Volume Vu 16 KB 3 o No RAID 5 Disk Volume VIV 4 KB 0 0 No RAID 5 Disk Volume VV 8 KB 1 0 No RAID 5 Otisk Volume viit 4 KB 0 0 No RAID 5 Disk Volume This chapter covers the following topics e Shared Foldershe e Folder Encryptionh7 e ISO Shared Foldershi74 e Folder Aggregationl75
99. 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 Taking a Snapshot After reserved space is set you can take snapshots To create a snapshot follow these steps 1 Select a LUN from the list and click Snapshot gt Take a Snapshot 2 Specify the snapshot name and duration to retain the snapshot 3 Select between Crash consistent or application consistent snapshot types 4 Click OK Managing Snapshots You can revert delete and clone a snapshot set up snapshot schedules or restore snapshot files for LUNs or volumes For more information on these functions see Managing Snapshots with Snapshot Managerl74 for volumes and LUNs 100 Snapshot Agent QNAP Snapshot Agent supports VMware vCenter and Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS Before taking snapshots from the NAS the Snapshot Agent notifies vCenter or Microsoft Server to create VMware snapshots for each virtual machine and store those VMware snapshots to iSCSI LUNs or to flush all the data into the iSCSI LUN thereby ensuring application consistent snapshots To check connected servers with Snapshot Agent installed click Snapshot gt SnapAgent On the SnapAgent page you can check the agent IP agent version OS LUN information and status Check www qnap com for details on Snapshot Agent 101 Before you start to use the iSCSI target service make sure you have created an iSCSI target with a LUN on the NAS and installed the correct iSCSI initiator for your OS
100. 5 the system will automatically turn itself off or enter auto protection mode depending on your settings after 30 seconds regardless the time you specified for either of the settings turn off the NAS or enter auto protection mode If the UPS battery charge is gt 15 the NAS will wait for the specified time you entered in the UPS page If the power resumes during this phase the NAS will remain in operation Phase 2 Depending on your setting on the UPS page e If in auto protection mode the NAS will stop all running services and unmount all volumes The NAS at this moment will become inaccessible e If the NAS is powered off it will remain off If the power resumes during this phase e If in auto protection mode the NAS will reboot and resume its previous state e If the NAS is powered off it will remain off 153 Phase 3 Depending on your setting on the UPS page e If in auto protection mode the NAS will lose its power and shut down e If the NAS is powered off it will remain off After the power resumes during this phase the NAS will react according to your settings in System Settings gt Power Recovery 154 4 12 System Status Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt System Status to check the status of your NAS ian System information Network Status System Semmce Hardware information Resource Monit Sumenary Server name Tatel21 System Information View the summar
101. 53 Pro TS 653 Pro TS 853 Pro SS 453 Pro SS 853 Pro The following information is required to create new users Username The username is case insensitive and supports multi byte characters such as Chinese Japanese Korean and Russian The maximum length is 32 characters Invalid characters are lt gt Password The password is case sensitive It is recommended to use a password of at least 6 characters 161 In this chapter the following topics are covered e Creating a Userlte2 e Creating Multiple Usershe e Importing Exporting Userslte e Home Folders t64 Creating a User To create a user on the NAS follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Users 2 Click Create gt Create a User 3 Follow the wizard instructions to complete the details Creating Multiple Users To create multiple users on the NAS follow the steps below Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Users Click Create gt Create Multiple Users Click Next Enter the name prefix for example test Enter the start number for the KR U N e username e g 0001 and the number of users to be created for example 10 The NAS will then create ten users named test0001 test0002 test0003 test0010 The password entered here is the same for all the new users 5 Select to create a private shared folder for each user or not The shared folder will be na
102. 680U RP TS EC1280U RP TS EC880U RP TS EC1080 Pro TS EC880 Pro TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 Taking a Snapshot After reserved space is set you can proceed to take snapshots To create a snapshot follow these steps iL 2 3 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Select a volume or LUN and click Snapshot gt Take a Snapshot Specify the snapshot name and duration to retain the snapshot 73 4 Click OK Managing Snapshots with Snapshot Manager The Snapshot Manager allows you to take revert delete and clone a snapshot set up snapshot schedules or restore snapshot files To launch Snapshot Manager select a volume or LUN in Storage Space and click Snapshot gt Snapshot Manager or click the camera icon of a volume or LUN In Snapshot Manager you can perform the following actions e Restore files Click a desired snapshot and select the folder s or file s that you want to restore right click and select Restore to replace the existing folder file with the one in the snapshot or Restore to to restore your data to a different location Or choose Download to download the selection to your computer e Revert a snapshot Select a snapshot and click Revert and the entire snapshot will be restored to its original path Be cautious that the volume reverted to the selected snapshot will be in the previous state when the s
103. 9U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP SS EC2479U SAS RP TS EC2480U RP TS EC1680U RP TS EC1280U RP TS EC880U RP TS EC1080 Pro TS EC880 Pro TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 Filtering Snapshots Navigate to Snapshot Vault in Storage Manager and you will see a list of available snapshots You can click the filter drop down list to filter snapshots with a set of criteria e Source Source NAS IP address e Volume LUN The volume LUN that has been replicated e Location The storage pool where the snapshot has been stored e Status the snapshot status Note If the status of a snapshot is not ready you will not be able to view or access that snapshot Displaying Snapshot Content Navigate to Snapshot Vault in Storage Manager choose the desired snapshot replication from the list and click Show Snapshots to display the content of it You can see synopsis of snapshots in the left panel or browse through folders and see files in the snapshots on the right panel 89 Click Hide snapshot content next to the search box to review advanced information regarding snapshots in an expanded window To download files in a snapshot select the files right click your mouse and click Download Removing Snapshots 1 Navigate to Snapshot Vault in Storage Manager 2 Select a snapshot replication in the list and click Remove 3 The snapshot replication is remov
104. A O a a a a 165 5 3 Shared Folders nasaret a r e a AANE AA AAEE 166 54 a i EIN T E TE E A ET TE E ETR 178 5 5 Domain SECUrty aiidas anni aana anA aa aa aAA nee aaa 179 5 5 1 Joining NAS to Active Directory Windows Server 2003 2008 2012 c1scerseereeees 180 5 5 2 Connecting NAS to an LDAP DIT CtOFy ccscceceeeteee nen eee ne nee nena ee renee nate ee nena eenennnenenies 183 5 6 Domain Controller cccccccsssseeeeeeessseeeeeeeesneeeeeeeteaaeeeeeettaageeenetttangeeesenes 187 Network ServiCeS s 55525552552u5u555u520202505uuuuuuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 195 Gil Wi Mac NP Soait raana E e E AAAA AEE AN ELANET EA 196 oA E A E E A E T A T E TTL E E TE TST 200 6 3 TEINCU SSHi stein cashacda consoled Aaaa a AR E EARALAS R 202 6 4 SNMP S ttingS onrera ieii rorat iT EAA NAAPA TEA AAE EEA NE AAAA 203 6 5 SERVICE DISCOV GUY masensi ennie a e E E a a a E a a a 205 6 6 Network Recycle BIN cece cece nee nner EEES 206 6 7 Qsync Central Station cece ene nnn AAAA AAR 208 Business Applications ssususnsunsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 219 PACANEIVIFUS Serriera ceid praata a NANA NAER TAS RAAL EEA EVERT ITAA ERREA RE IAA ETRA 220 7 2 Backup Stationers reer a A CATO OEE TTT EE A ATAO 224 7 2 1 BACKUP SEVE ipiis ii eria reiini Eaa AEEA AAAA R EKARTE TAA PAREA ARERIA AAEE E 225 7 22 REM OLE Replication e ae E IRAR OEA aE TENENTE STEEN 228 7 23 Snapshot REPUCA sii iaa ania betas EA EA AAEE ld eine
105. ADIUS Clients Up to 10 RADIUS clients are supported Click Create a Client 3 Enter the client information and click Apply 4 The clients are shown on the list 5 Create RADIUS users and their password in RADIUS Server gt RADIUS Users The users will be authenticated when trying to access the network through RADIUS clients The maximum number of RADIUS users the NAS supports is the same as the maximum number of local NAS users supported See the chapter on Usersli6 for details Click Create a User 6 Enter the username and password The username only supports letters a z and A Z and numbers 0 9 The password must be 8 32 characters in length 264 7 Specify to grant dial in access to local NAS users Enable this option to allow local NAS users to access network services via RADIUS clients using their NAS login name and password 265 7 8 Syslog Server Configure the NAS as a Syslog server create Syslog filters and view available Syslog messages on this page Server Settings Enable Syslog Server v Enable TCP TCP port Enable UDP UDP port Log Settings Maximum log size MB 50 Log file Download messages Email Notification Server Settings e Server Settings To configure the NAS as a Syslog server and allow it to receive Syslog messages from clients enable Syslog Server Select the protocols TCP and or UDP the NAS uses to receive Syslog messages Specify the port numbers if
106. APcloud Website The Shared with me feature allows you to quickly find your friend s devices and access their published NAS services Follow these steps to add a device and access its published services 1 Log into the myQNAPcloud web portal 2 Type the device name of your friend s device in the search box in top right comer 3 Click the Add to Shared With Me button the gray heart icon 4 Click Shared With Me to the left of the screen 5 Click the newly added device from the list and the service you want to access 6 Choose an access method Sharing Files and Opening Links Shared with You via myQNAPcloud Website If you share data to your friends who have registered on myQNAPcloud they will see these shared links here To share a file on the myQNAPcloud portal site follow these steps Log into the site Select a device under My Devices on the left panel Log into your device Choose the folders or files you want to share MO A WN e Click Share and fill out the required fields for the link link name domain name IP expiration and password protection gt Next gt and finish link recipient and email details gt Share To open a such link first log into the myQNAPcloud website and click Incoming to the left of the screen and you will see the links you can click to access them 332 Be notified for myQNAPcloud activities The portal will notify you of myQNAPcloud activities Exam
107. AS set as an additional domain controller will then act as a domain controller and can create and authenticate users Read Only Domain Controller To accelerate the user authentication process on specific sites it is possible to enable a Read Only domain controller Users can be authenticated by this NAS but it will not be able to create a domain user To set the NAS as a domain controller follow the steps below 1 2 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Domain Controller tab Select a domain controller mode from the drop down list 187 3 Specify a domain example mydomain mycompany local 4 Fill out the administrator password and the same password again in the Verify Password field 5 Click Apply After a domain controller is enabled only the domain users can connect to Microsoft Networking shared folders Please be sure to grant shared folder permissions to domain users and groups Note The NAS can only act as either a domain controller or LDAP server If the option Enable Domain Controller is grayed out please disable the LDAP Server in Control Panel gt Applications gt LDAP Server first Users You can create or delete domain user accounts or manage their membership here Creating a user To create a domain user follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Users tab 2 Click
108. ATE AR EREI TEER 26 2 4 2IMAC OF LINUX ae areeni aE E aAa FAEERE NON TEENA ANARE iia OARA ANEN rna TAERAA 27 2 5 Connecting to NAS by Web BrOWSer sssssssssssrrrerrrrrnrrnrtrnnnrrrrrrrrenrrnnnrnrrn 28 2 6 Migrating from Old NAS s icccciseieeteceveca a cduencisiscettaneis PARIRALA SETETE KRAAKVARS 29 3 QTS Basics and Desktop sss sss2 ssunununnunnnnuunnunnunununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 36 3 LANCrOdUCING OTS n oaee as raae din eves Pee eae at ee RA ae ee ee ox ite eA 37 3 2 Using OTS Deskto peeso soos eis fice ee a as saa eed Le AA eh R 39 4 System SettingS 5 s5 s5552s2us5552022usunuuunuununnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 46 4 1 General Settings rrari eo a E aT ai aa Cae EE aad 47 4 2 Storage Manag Chi serr ee tan a ran EAE Hae van AAE E EEEE OEA eee 50 A 2D SN DOINA E T E N EEE AAA T n REAA 54 422 Storage nn a a a a a a E nit on a hig ee eee 56 A 2 2al DISKS i hiiri T E EA A T aAA AE OEN 57 4 2 2 2 St orage Space eaa h aa ria PAAA ADNA AA AEA AEA aTa EA NAA Ea aani 63 42 2 3 C cheAcceleratio Naisiin cdies iE KERE AA A EA AEN EEEE EAA 86 4222 A SnapShot Vault a A A a a LEAO OAN AEE NA 89 E E R E S E ET TE E E S 91 42 3L ISCSLStorageis x arrir e a T A E ENA 92 4 2 3 2 LUN Backup arraian iar ideau aaan AAE AEA divieeds ANAA AAEE FEA EENAA EEA 106 42 4 Virtual DISK ivsus cise caeseteuldss a AiE aK LEER R DEREN NE pied AEAEE KERRE ERARA EERIK ET ARRETA 110 A MEWO cir E rE ENA NE AEEA EE EE TE EE E AEEA
109. Add 3 Start 4 Pause 5 Stop 6 Remove 7 Action p ia i Y Filter x Etj Description Enter a keyword in the search bar click the magnifier button to select the search engines and press enter to search for BT seeds Please note that the BT search feature is only available after you agree to the terms and conditions in Settings button on the main menu gt BT gt BT Search Add a BT seed by entering the URL or upload a torrent file from the local PC Start BT tasks Pause BT tasks Stop BT tasks Remove BT tasks or remove BT tasks and their data Start all pause all or pause all download tasks for a specified time period remove all completed tasks remove all completed tasks and delete data 295 Download After you select BT seeds from the search result click this button to download them Filter Enter a keyword in the box or click the drop down list to select the categories and filter the searched BT seeds Sort Sort tasks by dates that tasks are created or task types Settings Configure BT or RSS settings refer to the Download Station Settings section below Left Panel Tasks List all BT tasks based on their download status All Downloading Paused Completed Active and Inactive Right click on a task to start it pause set priority and remove a BT task and its data and edit downloads BT Search List all BT seeds searched using the BT Search Bar Right click a searched BT seed
110. Bitmap only available after a bitmap has been enabled and then Ok Note Bitmap support is only available for RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 and RAID 10 Recovering Failed RAID Disk Volumes This can recover failed RAID disk volumes from the Inactive status to a normal state RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 and RAID 10 will be recovered to the degraded mode RAID 0 and JBOD will be recovered to the normal state Before recovering a failed disk volume please confirm that all hard disks of that disk volume are properly seated in the NAS drive bays Once recovery is completed immediately back up your data on the disk s in case the disk volume fails again Inactive RAID disk volumes can only be recovered if the minimal number of healthy disks required for the RAID configuration is available on the NAS For example in a RAID 5 configuration with three disks in the array at least two healthy hard disk drives are required available in the NAS for volume recovery If not this RAID volume cannot be recovered Refer to the following table for the minimal number of hard disks required to recover a RAID group RAID Minimal number of hard disks required for recovery group RAID 1 1 RAID 5 Number of disks 1 RAID 6 Number of disks 2 RAID 10 Number of disks 2 1 hard drive per RAID 1 Follow these steps to recover a failed RAID group 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 84 2 3 4 5 Double click a storage pool
111. CP IP In TCP IP you can view the following options 1 LAN IP Address LAN Subnet Mask LAN Gateway LAN PRI DNS LAN SEC DNS Enter Network Settings o Network Settings DHCP o Network Settings Static IP o Network Settings BACK 7 Back to Main Menu In Network Settings Static IP you can configure the IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS of LAN 1 and LAN 2 An un kW N Physical disk In Physical disk you can view the following options 1 Disk Info 2 Back to Main Menu The disk info shows the temperature and the capacity of the hard drives Volume This section shows the hard drive configuration of the NAS The first line shows the RAID configuration and storage capacity the second line shows the member drive number of 383 the configuration If there is more than one volume press Select to view the information The following table shows the description of the LCD messages for RAID 5 configuration LCD Display Drive configuration RAID5 S RAID5 spare RAID5 D RAID 5 degraded mode RAID 5 B RAID 5 rebuilding RAID 5 S RAID 5 re synchronizing RAID 5 U RAID 5 is unmounted RAID 5 X RAID 5 non activated System This section shows the system temperature and the rotation speed of the system fan Shut down Use this option to turn off the NAS Press Select to select Yes Then press Enter to confirm Reboot Use this option to restart the NAS Press Select to select
112. Download All Report options Description Download the virus scan report The file can be opened by any text editor Delete an entry on the list Download all the virus scan logs on the list as a zip file e Specify the number of days 1 999 to retain the logs e Enable the option Archive logs after expiration and specify the shared folder to save the logs to once the retention period has been reached Click Apply All to save the changes Quarantine This page shows the quarantined files on the NAS Users can manually delete or restore 222 quarantined files or restore and add the files to the exclude list Button x Restore Selecte d Files Delete Selecte d Files Delete All Files Name Delete Restore Exclude List Restore Selected Files Delete Selected Files Delete All Files Description Delete an infected file The file cannot be recovered Restore an infected file to its original shared folder Restore an infected file and add the file into the exclude list scan filter Restore multiple files on the list Delete multiple files on the list The files cannot be recovered Delete all of the files on the list The files cannot be recovered 223 7 2 Backup Station Configure the NAS as a backup server remote replication cloud backup and external backup with the Backup Station Backup Staton ax 5 wW a Backup files to NAS or Rsync By ut
113. Edit User Specify whether the domain user must change the Propertie password at the first login account expiration date S description and email B Edit Choose which domain group s the domain user belongs to Group Members hip G Edit User Specify the profile path login script and home folder of an Profile domain user account For user profiles e Profile path Specify the shared folder where the roaming profiles are stored The path specified can be a shared folder name such as home or userlprofile or a UNC path such as nas mydomain local home e Login script Specify the logon script to execute when a domain user logs on froma PC member of the domain Copy the script to the shared folder sysvol in the subfolder your_domain scripts by connecting to the share NAS netlogon with the domain administrator and then you can directly specify the script filename e Home Specify the drive letter and a shared folder that is mapped to the drive letter when the domain user logs on to the domain with the domain username and password The path specified can be a shared folder name such as home or userlprofile or a UNC path such as nas mydomain local home Groups To enhance security control you can create domain user groups A domain user group is a collection of domain users who share the same access rights to files and folders 190 Creating domain user groups To create a domain user group follow the steps below 1
114. Forum code from the drop down menu Click Create specify the name of the collection displayed on the page seen as recipients open the link Copy and paste the URL link in the dialog window to your preferred applications Note Multiple video files can be classified at the same time To do so select the video files click Video Property on the right panel and choose their classification from the classification drop down list Using Video Station Creating and managing collections Collections can be created in two ways 1 Switch to the folder view right click on a shared folder and select Create New Collection to turn that shared folder into a collection 2 Drag amp drop videos in Video Collection on the left panel Right click on a collection and choose to play download remove rename email the link of publish the link share the link of that collection or modify the settings of that collection the email publish and share options are only available if Share with the public is enabled in Collection Settings Creating and managing smart collections To create a smart collection click next to Smart Collection specify the name of the collection the classification Home Videos Movies TV Shows and Music Videos and search criteria all files and tag Right click on a smart collection and choose to play download remove rename or reset collection settings Right click on a smart collection and
115. In addition to the web based connection CloudLink also allows you to connect to your QNAP device with QNAP Mobile Apps Qfile Qmanager and the PC utility Qsync CloudLink makes remote connectivity so easy Signage Station Signage Station provides digital signage display functionalities and allows content to be managed with access permissions Users can use iArtist Lite to design the digital Signage content and upload to the NAS and use Signage Station to display the digital signage media content on the web browser from the NAS Diagnostic Tool Beta The diagnostic tool provides a variety of system analysis functions to check the stability of a NAS Users can export system kernel records for sending to technical support staff for further investigation and system kernel log analysis tools can quickly check if abnormal actions have occurred There are also tools for checking the file system hard drives and RAM to provide a simple way to test system reliability Q center 379 Q center is a central management platform that enables you to consolidate the management of multiple QNAP NAS The Q center web interface gives you the ease of use cost efficiency convenience and flexibility to manage multiple NAS across multiple sites from any internet browser 380 12 Use the LCD Panel This feature is only provided by the NAS models with LCD panels You can use the LCD panel to perform disk configuration and view system informat
116. Mate a aw nes 112 4 4 Thunderbolt ManageMent cccccc cece cece nner nnn nn Ee 123 AS SOCUIEY circa TO E EA wel de A vee kee elt a Aaa Deed td 125 4 6 RHOWN AE edie r rar EEO IA ie thaaae ee tosh din Vaid Aiea doce ees oldie dart SE ITIS CENS 127 4 7 POWER ated anvhrievinlaibd iia dts E E E O TE E ade O E A EN TaN 130 4 8 NotiicCatiO aira rE A AAAA AA OANT AR 133 4 9 Firmware Update ycwsvincsetwioriiasks bse iaaaswis por E KAARET EYERE REINAN aaa nae TERETE 136 4 10 Backup R St OMe ted esis niia daa ad eh ae eee eee eine ee ede 138 4 11 External Devita roia oa aes va weer eae Tee eee a Paes Veet 140 4 TIGL Extemal Storage eroana inea ATEEN LE AEAEE AE EEr DATEN 141 ope be Inyo USB Prin a ia aaa a e Eana EEE EA a A ESE aA Aaa a T EA REA 144 AN PPA A AT aKa COA E ET ET E 146 4 11 2 2 MacOS T06 iiini Ave desc ulawibes lavideeitevesss TAA AA ENEAN AUA EN levee 147 4 11 2 3Mac OS 10 5 ois sus ive cday ERATE ERE EAE AAEE AREE E a EEEE 148 FANA MacOS TOA naa aa i A a e Ea EAA A EA aaa 149 4 1125 Linux Ubuntu 10 10 sia a r ED E AN i a AAE NIREA 150 FALLS UPS eiia ai a ea aa i a aaa e ai iA 151 4 12 Syst m Status ec ccccccrennciect ces annad annA a aa anA aada niaaa 155 4 13 SyStem LOGS e ra aAA REE TEA AAEE AE AAA e ered AA waned 157 Privilege SettingS ssssssusssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 160 SrL US CTS anane Aa AAA ENA NEEE E AA EAEE AANE 161 5 2 US r GOUDSE ees a A a die eine
117. Mode Create Copy Paste Upload Share More Action Description Hide Show the left panel Search files by their name file type music video or photo or with advanced search Switch between different browsing modes from left to right Thumbnail browsing mode list browsing mode detail browsing mode Create a folder shared folder or share space with a user see the below Sharing NAS space 258 section Copy paste folders or and files Upload files or folders to the selected shared folder Share the folder file via email publish the folder file or share the link of the folder file on social networks and to existing NAS users or create a shared link see the below Sharing files 254 section e Bookmark the selected shared folder and it will appear under Favorites on the left panel e Perform file or folder operations including open download rename copy move delete cut create desktop shortcut compress transcode files folders these options are only available when files and or folders are selected e Check folder properties e Review transcode information background tasks file compression file upload and moving files within the NAS or storage information 245 9 Remote Connection e Create remote connections e Check connection records and the current connection status see the below Remote Connectionks section 10 Network Media Player Stream videos to compatible dev
118. NS server of your Active Directory Click Next 4 Select a domain controller from the drop down menu The domain controller is responsible for time synchronization between the NAS and the domain server and user authentication Enter the domain administrator name and password Click Join 5 Upon successful login to the domain server the NAS has joined to the domain Click Finish to exit the wizard 6 Go to Privilege Settings gt Users or User Groups to load the domain users or user groups to the NAS Windows 2003 The AD server name and AD domain name can be checked in System Properties in Windows As an example for Windows 2003 servers if you see nodel qnap test com as the Full computer name on the system properties dialog window the AD server name is node and NOT nodel qnap test com and the domain name remains the same as qnap test com Windows Server 2008 Check the AD server name and domain name in Control Panel gt System in Windows In the system dialog window the AD server name will appear as the computer name and the domain name can be found in the domain field Note e After joining the NAS to the Active Directory the local NAS users who have access rights to the AD server should use NASname username to login AD users should use their own usernames to login to the AD server For TS x09 series NAS if the AD domain is based on Windows 2008 Server the NAS firmware must be at least vers
119. O 2 lt N Name Descriptions c 1 Lyrics Add lyrics to a song and browse them here 2 Information Edit and browse music details here 3 Sharing Drag music files to the area under Songs to share them via a link including three methods email social sharing and link 4 Email Share the link via email Specify the subject and message body of the message and click Send to send the email Make sure your email account is properly configured Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Notification gt SMTP Server for email configuration 5 Social Share a link with selected songs on social networks Specify Sharing the subject and message body and click the social networking site to share with 6 Link Share a link by directly pasting it into an email or instant message Under the Link Code select the domain name LAN IP or WAN IP address for the link Note that the myQNPcloud com domain name is only available after it is registered in myQNAPcloud Please refer to the myQNAPcloud chapter for more details from the drop down menu Click Save and copy and paste the URL link in the dialog window to your preferred applications 321 Using Music Station Import music files Please refer to the Starting Music Station section Creating and managing playlists To create a playlist drag amp drop music files in Playlist on the left panel give that playlist a name and click OK Right click on a playlist and choo
120. Privacy Settings Videos in Video Station are listed and displayed according to shared folder privileges and media folders settings in the Media Libraryb13 For shared folder privileges only users with an appropriate permission to a shared folder can view its contents in the Video Station For example if a user does not have read write or read only permissions to a certain shared folder that user cannot see the videos in the shared folder Note For x86 based NAS models all shared folders except recording and web are media folders by default For ARM based NAS models only multimedia and homes are media folders by default However users can always add more media folders In addition to shared folder privileges you can also store private videos in your home shared folder to hide them from other NAS users except the administrator The contents of the home folder can be found under Private Collection Anyone attempting to access this folder in Video Station will be prompted for a password Videos stored in the shared folders are only visible after they are detected and scanned by the Media Library To set the Media Library to scan for videos manually or by schedule go to Control Panel gt Multimedia Management gt Media Library For more details on media folder settings please refer to the chapter on Multimedia Management Note As the media folders in the Media Library are shared by Photo Stati
121. Property page configure the following settings e Network Speed Select the network transfer rate according to the network environment of the NAS Select auto negotiation and the NAS will automatically adjust the transfer rate e Obtain the IP address settings automatically via DHCP If the network supports DHCP select this option and the NAS will automatically obtain the IP address and network settings e Use static IP address To use a static IP address for network connections enter the IP address subnet mask and default gateway e Jumbo Frame Jumbo Frames refers to Ethernet frames that are larger than 1500 bytes It is designed to enhance Ethernet networking throughput and reduce the CPU utilization of large file transfers by enabling more efficient larger payloads per packet Maximum Transmission Unit MTU refers to the size in bytes of the largest packet that a given layer of a communications protocol can transmit The NAS uses standard Ethernet frames 1500 bytes by default If network appliances support Jumbo Frames select the appropriate MTU value for the network environment The NAS supports 4074 7418 and 9000 bytes for MTU Note e Jumbo Frames is only valid in Gigabit networks All of the connected network appliances must enable Jumbo Frames and use the same MTU value Jumbo Frames are only supported by certain NAS models Refer to the software specification page on the QNAP website for further details Advanced
122. QNAP Turbo NAS Software User Manual Version 4 2 This manual is applicable to the following Turbo NAS models TS 131 TS 231 TS 231 4 TS 251 HS 251 TS 253 Pro TS 251C TS 269L TS 269 Pro TS 431 TS 431U TS 431 4 TS 451 TS 451S TS 451U TS 453S Pro TS 453 Pro TS 463U TS 463U RP TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 469U RP TS 469U SP TS 470 TS 470U RP TS 470U SP TS 470 Pro TVS 463 TVS 471 TVS 471U TVS 471U RP TS 453U TS 453U RP TS 453mini TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 563 TS 651 TS 653 Pro TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 670 Pro TS 670 TVS 663 TVS 671 TS 851 TS 853 Pro TS 853S Pro TS 853U TS 853U RP TS 863U TS 863U RP TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 869U RP TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TVS EC880 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 863 TVS 863 TS EC880U RP TS EC880 Pro TS EC879U RP TS 1079 Pro TVS EC1080 TVS EC1080 TS EC1080 Pro TS 1253U TS 1253U RP TS 1263U TS 1263U RP TS 1269U RP TS 1270U RP TVS 1271U RP TS 1279U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1280U RP TVS EC1280U SAS RP TVS EC1580U SAS RP TS 1679U RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC1679U SAS RP TS EC1680U RP TVS EC1680U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP SS EC2479U SAS RP TS EC2480U RP TVS EC2480U SAS RP 2015 QNAP Systems Inc All Rights Reserved Table of Contents T NOUICC reprann eA a aa sbeeuctiaceeeeccaabaseecesudntacsescenaalseeuss 5 1 1 Legal Notice and Disclaimer ssssssrsussrrrnsrrrsrrrrnnrnnrnnrnnnnnnrnrrr
123. Qsync folder and select Previous Versions Restoring the previous versions In the version history page select the version you want to restore and click Restore e Click Download to download the version to the local computer e Click Delete All to delete all of the listed versions e Click Refresh to update the status of the version history Restoring versions of a deleted file Version control retains versions in a separate location so even you delete the file you can still restore the previous versions of the file even if the file has been deleted from the recycle bin To restore the version of a deleted file click on any folder file in the Qsync folder and then click More Action gt Show Deleted Files in the menu bar To view the version history right click on a file folder in Qsync folder and select Previous Versions Or you can access it from the menu bar More Action gt Previous Versions Or just click the Show Right Panel gt version to show the version list Restoring previous versions In the version history page select the version you want to restore and click Restore e Click Download to download the version to the local computer e Click Delete All to delete all of the listed versions e Click Refresh to update the status of the version history Note If you click Delete All then click Refresh and the associated files will be removed from the list To exit the view of t
124. S feeds Download Station will load all feeds from RSS for you to download 4 Designate a location on the NAS for the in progress files and completed downloads Note e The maximum number of concurrent downloads for x86 based NAS models is 60 30 BT PT and 30 HTTP FTP and 20 for ARM based NAS models 10 BT PT and 10 HTTP FTP Dragging amp dropping BT files from PC to Download Station is only supported by Chrome and Firefox Adding HTTP FTP Magnet download tasks 298 To add an HTTP FTP or Magnet download task click Start on the Menu Bar Enter the URL of the download task one entry per line Then select the download type HTTP FTP or Magnet Link Designate a location on the NAS for the in progress files and completed downloads If a username and password is required to access the file select Use credentials and select a pre configured account Settings gt Account List or enter a username and password Then click OK The NAS will download the files automatically Note You can enter up to 30 entries at one time Managing downloads in a BT seed You can right click on a task and select Edit Downloads to only select the files within a BT seed that you want to download Limiting the download upload speed To limit the bandwidth usage of the Download Station configure the settings in Settings gt HTTP FTP or BT gt Bandwidth Limit Scheduling downloads To set download schedules go to Sett
125. SERNAME for FTP AFP and File Station In an Active Directory environment the default login formats for the domain users are o Windows shares domain username o FTP domain username o File Station domain userame o AFP domain username When you enable this option users can use the same login name format domain username to connect to the NAS via AFP FTP and File Station e Automatically register in DNS When this option is enabled and the NAS is joined to an Active Directory the NAS will automatically register itself in the domain DNS server This will create a DNS host entry for the NAS in the DNS server If the NAS IP changes the NAS will automatically update the IP in the DNS server e Enable trusted domains Select this option to load users from trusted Active Directory domains and specify their NAS access permissions in Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders Domain trusts are only set up in Active Directory not on the NAS Apple Networking To connect to the NAS from Mac OS X enable Apple Filing Protocol If the AppleTalk network uses extended networks and is assigned with multiple zones assign a zone name to the NAS Enter an asterisk to use default settings This setting is disabled by default To allow access to the NAS from Mac OS X 10 7 Lion enable DHX2 authentication support Click Apply to save the settings You can use the Finder to connect to a shared folder from Mac Go to Go gt Connect to Server
126. Shuffle Shuffle on off 6 Repeat No repeat repeat once or repeat all 7 Streaming Stream videos to compatible devices in different rooms Mode Network over your home network To set USB Passthrough first Media Player select an USB audio device under NAS Audio Output after USB Audio you click this button it will turn into a speaker icon Click Passthrough the icon again to enable Audio Passthrough and set the sample rate 8 Volume Adjust the volume 319 Note To stream media files to HDMI or Chromecast using the Network Media Player the Media Streaming Add On must first be installed in the App Center Left Panel e Songs Artist Album and Genre All authorized music files are listed here for users by the following categories all songs artist album genre and folder Click the upload button next to Songs to upload songs from your PC or change an album cover refer to the Changing coversl23 section for details All imported contents are saved in the Multimedia shared folder named with date e Now Playing Songs in the Now Playing list can be reordered by drag amp drop and songs can be removed from the list e Private Collection Personal music files in the home folder are listed here These music files belong to the user that is currently logged in e Qsync List music files synchronized from the Qsync service e Playlist Playlists can be created managed and deleted here Up to 200 playlists can be created
127. Smart Phone and Watching them on TV The first part is done by Qfile on your phone 1 Use Qfile to browse your NAS 2 Choose the multimedia shared folder 3 Select the upload function 4 Take a picture and upload it to the NAS The second part is performed by the HybridDesk Station on your TV 304 Turn on your TV and choose Kodi Choose Pictures Select the Multimedia folder o N DO WM Double click the picture you just uploaded Viewing Photos on your USB Device or Camera Steps 1 Connect a USB device or camera to the NAS 2 Choose Pictures 3 Choose USBDisk 4 Select the photo you want to view Importing Media Contents to your NAS Use one of the several types of network protocols Samba AFP FTP and NFS to save the media content files in the Multimedia or Qmultimedia shared folder or copy them from an external USB or eSATA device To browse media contents of different folders than the default Multimedia shared folder perform the following steps 1 Choose Files under Videos 2 Choose Add Videos 3 Click Browse 4 Choose Root filesystem 5 Choose share 6 For example if you want to add the Download shared folder choose Download Otherwise just choose the shared folder you would like to add as a video source 7 Click OK to add this source 8 You will see the Download shared folder in the list Chrome 305 Select the Chrome applicati
128. Space 2 Double click a storage pool to be expanded to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Expand Capacity 4 Select at least one hard disk drive and click Change After the description displays Please remove this drive remove the hard disk drive from the NAS or expansion enclosure 5 After the description displays You can replace this drive plug in the new hard disk drive to the drive slot Repeat the same process for all hard drives to be replaced Click Expand Capacity to continue 6 Click Yes 7 The chosen RAID group will be expanded Note Available RAID management operations are detailed in the chapter on RAID Groups 79 Setting a Threshold The system will generate a warning message in system logs when the storage pool used size hits the threshold To set a threshold value for a storage pool follow these steps 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to set a threshold to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Click Actions gt Set Threshold 4 Enter a value for alert threshold and click Apply Setting Snapshot Reservation 67 You can set snapshot reservation space to ensure enough space for saving snapshots Snapshot reservation is set as a percentage of total storage pool space and there are two scenarios When the snapshot reserve is set to 0 new snapshots taken
129. Station iTunes Server B EA DOLNA Media Server amp Multimedia Management For setup details refer to the following links Antivirus 20 Backup Station 224 File Station244 iSCSI Service 9 LDAP Serverks SQL Servere NTP Service ke RADIUS Serverkeh Syslog Server 263 IFIP Server 263 Virtualization 7A VPN Client 27A VPN Serverk7 Web Serverks2 219 7 1 Antivirus Configure antivirus features on this page Antivirus Enable antivirus Virus definitions Last virus scan Last infected file found Status Update Check and update automatically Frequency in days Online update Update now Manual update cvd Overview e Antivirus Use the antivirus to scan the NAS manually or on recurring schedules It will delete quarantine or report files infected by viruses malware Trojans and other malicious threats To use this feature select Enable antivirus and click Apply e Update Select Check and update automatically and specify the intervals in days to automatically update the antivirus definitions Click Update Now to check for new antivirus definitions and to update if necessary Users can also download updated definitions from http www clamav net and manually update the antivirus definitions The NAS must be connected to the Internet to use this feature e Quarantine View the quarantine information of the disk volumes on the NAS For more details go to Applications gt Antivirus
130. TS 809 Pro TS 809U RP do not support eSATA port 1This feature is only supported by certain NAS models Visit http www qnap com for more details Alarm Buzzer The alarm buzzer can be disabled in Control Panel gt System Settings gt Hardware gt Buzzer Beep sound No of Times Short beep 1 0 5 sec Short beep 3 0 5 sec Short beep 3 every 5 0 5 sec min long beep 1 5 sec Long beep 2 1 5 sec Description 1 The NAS is starting up 2 The NAS is being shut down software shutdown 3 The user presses the reset button to reset the NAS 4 The system firmware has been updated The NAS data cannot be copied to the external storage device from the front USB port The system fan is out of function TS 119 does not support smart fan 1 The disk volume is going to be full 2 The disk volume has reached its full capacity 3 The hard disk drives on the NAS are in degraded mode 4 The user starts hard drive rebuilding 17 1 The NAS is turned off by force shutdown hardware shutdown 2 The NAS has been turned on and is ready 18 2 2 Software Installation After installing the NAS hardware proceed to software installation There are three approaches for software installation 1 Smart Installation Guidel2c 2 Cloud Installationl2 3 4 HDMI Installation CD Installation 21 Online installation and cloud installation are available for all new NAS model
131. To receive alerts by email configure the SMTP server Select an email account specify the type of email account you would like to use for email alerts SMTP Server Enter the SMTP server name for example smtp gmail com Port Number Enter the port number for the SMTP server The default port number is 25 E mail Enter the email address of the alert recipient Username and Password Enter the email account s login information Secure connection Choose SSL or TLS to ensure a secure connection between the NAS and SMTP server or None It is recommended to use this if the SMTP server supports it Alert Notification Select the type of instant alerts the NAS will send when system events warnings errors occur A maximum of two email addresses can be specified to receive alerts fromthe NAS SMS 133 Configure the SMSC server settings to send SMS messages to specified phone numbers from the NAS Follow these steps to set up a SMSC server 1 Choose an SMS service provider The default SMS service provider is Clickatell You can add your own SMS service provider by selecting Add SMS Provider from the drop down menu When Add SMS service provider is selected enter the name of the SMS provider and the URL template text 2 Specify to enable SSL connection to the SMS service provider and fill out the server details including the login name login password and server API_ID 3 Enable the alert notification by ticking the checkbox W
132. _teach con_show php op showone amp cid 6 for more details Advanced Folder Permissions Use Advanced Folder Permissions to directly configure subfolder permissions on the NAS There is no depth limitation for subfolder permission but it is highly recommended to only change permissions on the first or second subfolder level When Advanced Folder Permissions is enabled click Folder Permissions under the Shared Folders tab to configure subfolder permission settings See Shared Folders gt Folder Permission of this section for details Windows ACL Use Windows ACL to configure the subfolder and file level permissions from Windows File Explorer All Windows Permissions are supported For detailed Windows ACL behavior please refer to standard NTFS permissions http www ntfs com ntfs permissions htm e To assign subfolder and file permissions to a user or a user group full control share level permissions must be granted to the user or user group e When Windows ACL is enabled when Advanced Folder Permissions is disabled subfolder and file permissions will only have effect when accessing the NAS from Windows File Explorer Users connecting to the NAS via FTP AFP or File Station will only have share level permissions e When Windows ACL and Advanced Folder Permissions are both enabled users cannot configure Advanced Folder Permissions from the NAS Permissions Read only Read Write and Deny of Advanced Folder Permi
133. a Second NAS to LDAP Domain You can join multiple NAS to the same LDAP domain and allow the LDAP users to connect to these NAS using the same login credentials To join another NAS to the LDAP domain login to the NAS and go to Privilege Settings gt Domain Security select LDAP authentication and set LDAP server of a remote NAS as the server type Enter the DNS name or IP address of the remote NAS the name of the previously created LDAP domain and enter the LDAP server password Click Apply Backing up Restoring LDAP Database To back up the LDAP database on the NAS select Back up Database and specify the backup frequency destination folder on the NAS and other options To restore an LDAP database browse to select the exp file and click Import 260 7 5 SQL Server You can enable an SQL Server to be a website database SQL server MariaDB 5 5 44 You can enable SQL server as the website database f Enable SQL server Enable this option to allow remote connection of SQL server s Enable TCP IP networking Port number 3306 Note You can install the phpMyAdmin package to manage your SQL server To install the phpMyAdmin please click here Database Maintenance You can reset the database password or re initialize the database Reset Root Password Re Initialize Database Note For legacy ARM models TS x21 TS x20 TS x19 TS x12 and TS x10 MySQL will still be used as the default SQL server If you are using a
134. a a 314 8 6 Multimedia Management rsrsrireirrresrdarirres enaar ene ene I AITANA 315 8 7 M si amp Stationin anioe aaa aAA Doce a KE a EA EAA A aa A aa cde 317 8 8 MYQNAPClOUd SErViCeveieccecssscceedicceecessiesrs es aR ie ka ARRANA a 325 8 9 Photo STIO ee Aana Ora o E ATENE EONA AAAA EAA AAO NEVA EE ARAN 334 8 10 StatloniMaNaG Or canviaran i ea ea e Ea ae a aa E Ea a eu 351 8 11 Transcode Management ssssssssrrruesnrrnernrrrrnrrnennrnnnnnrrunnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 353 DAAN AEO SCOT N vested AEEA EE ATA EAEE SPEA EAERI PESATA ENAA 356 9 Mobile AppS s s sss ssssunununnunsnununnunsununnnnnnnnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 368 10 Computer UtilitieS s s s ss s1s51551515555555 5 55555555555555u5uuuunuunnnnnnn 373 11 NAS Add ONS susiroerspssdi nger ER urur pO ENNS RASNA PRENE ES AN EEANN ESNA EED EEEREN En AANEEN ENE nEn 375 12 Use the LCD Panell ccccceeccnnecceeeeennneeeeeeeeenaseeeeeeeaaeeneeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeeeeaaes 381 13 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE scccssccccceeeeunneceeeeeenaeceeeeeeagaeeeeeeeeaaaeueeeeeeaages 387 Notice Legal Notice and Disclaimer 6 Regulatory Noticels Document Annotation 10 Safety Information and Precautions 17 1 1 Legal Notice and Disclaimer Thank you for choosing QNAP products This user manual provides detailed instructions of using the Turbo NAS network attached storage Please read carefully and start to enjoy the powerful functions of
135. a multi drive enclosure Remove device allows you to disconnect external storage devices without the risk of losing any data when the device is removed First choose a device to eject click Eject and then disconnect the disk partition or remove the device Encryption Management If an external storage device is encrypted by the NAS the button Encryption Management will appear Click this button to manage the encryption password key or to lock unlock the device Locking the device 1 To lock an encrypted external storage device click Encryption Management 2 Select Lock this device and click Next 3 Click Next to lock the device Unlocking the device 1 To unlock an encrypted external storage device click Encryption Management 2 Select Unlock this device Click Next 3 Enter the encryption password or upload the key file Select Save encryption key to save the password in a hidden location on a hard drive of the NAS The NAS will automatically unlock the encrypted external storage device every time the device is 142 connected Managing the encryption key 1 To change the encryption password or download an encryption key file click Encryption Management 2 Select Manage encryption key Click Next 3 Select to change the encryption password or download the encryption key file to the local PC Data Sharing Select one of the following settings for an external storage device conn
136. ain name of the NTP server for example time nist gov time windows com Then enter the time interval for synchronization This option can be used only when the NAS is connected to the Internet Note First time synchronization may take several minutes to complete Daylight Saving Time If your region uses daylight saving time DST enable Adjust system clock automatically for daylight saving time and click Apply The latest DST schedule of the time zone specified in the Time section will be shown The system time will be adjusted 48 automatically according to the DST Note that if your region does not adopt DST the options on this page will not be available To manually enter the DST table select the option Enable customized daylight saving time table Click Add Daylight Saving Time Data enter the daylight saving time schedule and click Apply to save the settings Codepage Select the language the NAS uses to display files and directories Note All of the files and directories on the NAS use Unicode encoding If your FTP clients or PC OS does not support Unicode select the language which is the same as the OS language in order to properly view files and directories on the NAS Password Strength Specify the password rules After applying the setting the NAS will automatically check the validity of the password Login Screen Set the login screen style Settings available on this page include e Lo
137. aking available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Comp
138. an directly communicate with SCVMM 2012 and server management tasks can be facilitated for administrators For detail on QNAP SMI S Provider check here 273 7 11 VPN Client The NAS provides the VPN client service which can connect to a VPN server via PPTP or OpenVPN The NAS also supports saving multiple VPN settings to easily switch between different connections You can connect the NAS to VPN servers via PPTP or OpenVPN Add Profile Name Server Address Connection IP t Received Status Topics covered in this chapter e Before you Start R7 e Connect a VPN Server via PPTPR7 e Connect a VPN Server via OpenVPNI278 Before you start Before starting the VPN client service please ensure that your NAS has been set up as follows e The Internet connection is normal e Your QTS version is at least 4 1 2 e If you have an active VPN server service you must disable it The client and server services cannot run at the same time 274 Connect a VPN server via PPTP The Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a commonly used method for implementing VPN and is supported by most clients including Windows Mac OS X Linux and mobile devices 1 Go to Control Panel gt VPN Client 2 Click Add gt PPTP to connect a VPN server 3 Enter the connection configuration settings including the profile name server address that you want to connect to and the username and password of the VPN server 4 C
139. and all the data will be lost if the unit suffers a second disk failure A failed disk should be immediately replaced Users can choose to install a new disk after turning off the server or hot swap the new disk while the server is running The status of the disk volume will change to rebuilding after installing a new disk Your disk volume will return to a normal status once the volume rebuilding process is complete Note To install a new disk when the server is running first ensure the disk volume is in degraded mode Or wait to hear two long beeps after the disk crashes and then insert the new disk in place of the failed disk 80 RAID 6 RAID 10 JBOD RAID 6 is ideal for critical data protection needs To create a RAID 6 group a minimum of 4 hard disks are required The total capacity of a RAID 6 group is equal to the size of the disk with the smallest Capacity in the array times the number of hard disks 2 It is recommended though not required to use identical hard drives to establish the most efficient hard drive capacity RAID 6 can survive 2 disk failures and the system can still operate properly Note To install a new disk when the server is running first ensure the disk volume is in degraded mode Or wait to hear two long beeps after the disk crash and then insert the new disk in place of the failed disk RAID 10 is a combination of RAID 1 mirroring and RAID O striping without parity RAID 10 is a s
140. and data will be retained and applied to the new NAS However system settings of the source NAS cannot be imported to the destination NAS via System Administration gt Backup Restore Settings Configure the NAS again if the settings were lost Topics covered in this chapter 1 NAS models that support system Migration 29 2 NAS models that DO NOT support system migration 32 3 Disk Volumes Supported for System Migration 33 4 Migrating your NASRA NAS Models that Support System Migration Before migrating to the destination NAS make sure both the source and destination NAS models are powered off NAS models that support system migration are listed below Source NAS Destination NAS Firmwa re Firmwa Firmwa Upgrad Model re Model re e Version Version Require d TS x10 TS x12 TS x19 3 8 TS x20 TS x21 HS 210 TS x10 TS n 3 8 x U X x12 TS x19 i i TS x39 TS 509 TS 809 and 4 AvA o TS x20 TS SS x39 TS x59 older an x21 HS 210 TS x59U TS x69 TS x69U 4 0 2 later TS x70 TS x70U TS x79 TS x79U 29 TS x31 TS 431U HS 251 251 TS x51 x51 TS x53 SS x53 ae 4 1 x TVS x63 TS 563 TS x63U ang TS x69 TS x70 TVS x71 ie TS x79 TS x80 TVS x80 TS x80U TS x10 TS x12 TS x19 Yes TS x20 TS x21 HS 210 3 8 x TS x39 TS 509 TS 809 and SS x39 TS x59 TS x59U older TS x69 TS x69U TS x70 4 0 2 3 8 TS x70U TS x79 TS x79U TS x39 TS 4 0 x 4 0 5 gt 03 T3809 TS x31 TS 431U HS
141. ant to disable 2 step verification go to Options gt 2 step Verification and click Stop Administrators can disable 2 step verification for other NAS account users if they are locked out by going to Control Panel gt Users gt Edit Account Profile If an administrator cannot use a mobile device to sign in to QTS and no other administrators are available to disable 2 step verification for the locked out administrator the NAS must be restored to factory settings by physically pressing the RESET button on the NAS Tip e All of the Dashboard widgets can be dragged onto the desktop for monitoring specific details e The Dashboard will be presented differently on different screen resolutions 44 4 System Settings Go to Control Panel gt System Settings to set up your NAS Control Panel o a A Oveniew g General Settings F s R LA I Gen tings e Network bens bee security dware System Settings Storage Manager Xe Network I Thuncerdor Manageme A Rs T 5 am Security we ad ywer Notification Firmware 9 External Device System Status jA Hardware a Power Bi Notification El T Firmware Uodat amp Firmware Update Backup Restore E External Device E System Status System Logs AL Privilege Settings T Network Sennces For details on the settings refer to the following links e General Settings 47 e Storage Manager 50 e Networkl123 e Thunderbolt Ma
142. anywhere Connect Vmobile to a NAS with Surveillance Station installed and you can monitor IP cameras and play recordings Monitor several servers channels from all of your network cameras of by simply connecting to any available NAS on the network Download Available on the E App Store i P Google play Vcam Vcam can turn your mobile device into a network camera allowing you to record any moment around you to your NAS Vcam provides a great way to deploy a home surveillance system without purchasing expensive IP cameras Download C App Store 372 10 Computer Utilities QNAP constantly develops new ways for users to improve their NAS experience and provides the following utilities to improve productivity e Qfinderb73 e myQNAPcloud connectb73 e Qsync 2 0657 e NetBakb7 e Qgeth7 e vSphere Client plug inb7A e Qsnapkb7 Qfinder Qfinder is a utility available for Windows Mac and Linux to quickly find and access a NAS on LAN Install Qfinder on your computer open it double click your NAS and the login page is ready for you Download myQNAPcloud connect myQNAPcloud Connect helps you to quickly and securely access published services of your NAS on the Internet myQNAPcloud Connect is designed for Windows users By installing myQNAPcloud Connect you will be able to connect to the NAS and easily manage files by drag amp drop within the Windows File Explorer Download Qsync 2 0 Qsy
143. arately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms 394 a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b wa Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that w modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d w Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e w Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks
144. arget In this chapter these topics are covered e Backing up iSCSI LUNs 108 e Restoring iSCSI LUNSho e Creating iSCSI LUN Snapshotsho e Managing LUN Backup Restore Snapshot by Command Lineho Note e This function or its content is only applicable on some models To check for applicable models please refer to the product comparison table on the QNAP website LUN Snapshot only applies to these NAS models TS 269L TS 269 Pro TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 469U RP TS 469U SP TS 470 Pro TS 470 TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 670 Pro TS 670 TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 869U RP TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 1269U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1679U RP TS EC879U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC1679U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP SS EC2479U SAS RP TS EC2480U RP TS EC1680U RP TS EC1280U RP TS EC880U RP TS EC1080 Pro TS EC880 Pro TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 Backing up iSCSI LUNs The entire LUN can be backed up as an image file and saved to a different location The storage location can be a Windows share SMB CIFS a Linux share NFS or a local folder on the NAS Before backing up an iSCSI LUN make sure at least one iSCSI LUN has been created on the NAS To create iSCSI targets and LUN go to Storage Manager gt LUN Backup 1 Click Create a job 2 Se
145. ased UPS Choose between whether the NAS should shut down or enter auto protection mode after the AC power fails Specify the time in minutes that the NAS should wait before executing the option you have selected After the NAS enters auto protection mode the NAS resumes the previous operation status when the power restores Click Apply All to confirm Network Master Mode A network UPS master is responsible for communicating with network UPS slaves on the same physical network regarding critical power status To set your NAS with UPS as network master mode plug in the USB cable on the UPS to the NAS and follow these steps 1 Make sure the NAS the UPS master is connected to the same physical network as the network UPS slaves 2 Select the option Enable UPS Support 3 Click Enable network UPS Support This option only appears when your NAS is connected to the UPS by a USB cable Choose between whether the NAS should shut down or enter auto protection mode after the AC power fails Specify the time in minutes that the NAS should wait before executing the option you have selected After the NAS enters auto protection mode the NAS resumes the previous operation status when the power restores Enter the IP address of other network UPS slaves to be notified in the event of power failure Click Apply All to confirm and continue the setup for the NAS systems which operate in network slave
146. ateway address for the NAS Contact your ISP for the prefix and the prefix length information o Enable Router Advertisement Daemon radvd To configure the NAS as an IPv6 host and distribute IPv6 addresses to the local clients which support IPv6 enable this option and enter the prefix and prefix length IPv6 DNS server Enter the preferred DNS server in the upper field and the alternate DNS server in the lower field Contact the ISP or network administrator for the information If IPv6 auto configuration is selected leave the fields as Service Binding NAS services run on all available network interfaces by default You can bind services to one or more specific network interfaces wired or wireless Available network interfaces on the NAS will be shown Select at least one network interface that each service should be bound to Then click Apply Users will only be able to connect to services via the specified network interfaces If the settings cannot be applied click Refresh to list the current network interfaces on the NAS and configure service binding again 121 Proxy Enter the proxy server settings to allow the NAS to access the Internet through a proxy server to update the firmware get new virus definitions and to download Apps DDNS Service To allow remote access to the NAS using a domain name instead of a dynamic IP address enable the DDNS service The NAS supports the DDNS providers http www d
147. ation Dashboard Desktop Area Next Desktop Last Desktop myQNAPclo ud QNAP Utility Feedback Network Recycle Bin o Frameless Mode In this mode applications will be opened without their frames e Feedback File a feature request and bug report e About Check the NAS model firmware version HDDs already installed and available empty bays Check important NAS statistics including system and HDD health resources storage usage online users scheduled tasks etc Click the header within each widget to open its respective page Remove or arrange all applications on the desktop or drag one application icon over the top of another to put them in the same folder Switch between desktops Go to the myQNAPcloud website Check and download the latest and available NAS utilities File a feature request and bug report All of the deleted items can be found in here Right click on it to open the Network Recycle Bin empty it or permanently delete or configure it refer to the Network Recycle Binko chapter for details 2 step Verification enhances the security of user accounts Once enabled you will need to enter a one time security code 6 digits in addition to your password whenever you sign in to the NAS 2 step verification requires a mobile device with an authenticator app which supports the Time based One Time password TOTP protocol Supported apps include Google Authenticator And
148. ation Select a storage device and click Storage Information to check its details The number of USB and eSATA interfaces supported varies by model It may take a few seconds for the NAS to detect external USB eSATA devices Format External storage devices can be formatted as EXT3 EXT4 FAT32 NTFS or HFS Mac only Click Format and select the option from the drop down menu Note Starting with QTS 4 1 labeling is supported for external USB devices To edit a USB drive s label format it as EX3 or EX4 and click Storage Information to edit its label The label will become the shared folder name of this USB device in File Station in File Station an USB external device will appear as a shared folder This feature is only supported by x69 x70 and x79 NAS models The NAS supports encrypting external drives To encrypt an external storage device click Encryption Select the encryption method AES 128 192 or 256 bit and enter the password 8 16 characters Select Save encryption key to save the password in a hidden location on a hard drive in the NAS The NAS will automatically unlock the encrypted external storage device when the device is connected Click Format to proceed Click OK and all the data will be cleared The device will be Ready after disk initialization 141 Eject Eject offers two different options Disconnect disk partition allows you to remove a single disk partition or a disk drive in
149. ation and SSD Trim 87 Space Reclamation allows you to reclaim space from deleted files to increase free space for storage pools while SSD Trim enables the SSD to handle garbage collection overheads and improves future Write performance Click Global Settings the setting icon next to on the top right side of the screen to enable the function and its schedule You will see two settings for Space Reclamation and SSD Trim e Auto reclaim and SSD trim schedule the thin provisioning space reclamation will be started based on the schedule you set in order to reclaim space and increase free space for storage pools e Schedule Set the Space and Reclamation and SSD Trim schedule 88 4 2 2 4 Snapshot Vault Snapshot Vault stores snapshots created remotely from remote NAS via Snapshot Replica in Backup Station It also lets you manage and restore remote snapshots Note e If this is the first time you use this feature please configure Snapshot Replicaks in Backup Station on the source NAS first e Snapshot Vault is only applicable for these NAS models TS 269L TS 269 Pro TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 469U RP TS 469U SP TS 470 Pro TS 470 TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 670 Pro TS 670 TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 869U RP TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 1269U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1679U RP TS EC879U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC167
150. ation is an online file management center With the File Station you can access the NAS across the Internet manage files using a web browser quickly find files play media files set file and folder permissions and easily share your files and folders on the NAS File Station 0O G es E Tate121 4 B Vome gt Download gt nome gt homes gt Maindoc gt Mame Rom gt Multimedia gt Public gt Recordings gt We gt amp USBDiskI Xe Favorites 2015 Preto async Recycie Bin lt lt Share Link Share with me amp Recycle Bin TESA A Sampie Music sample010 jp9 sample009 jpg I sample006 jpg lt E lt 2 Sample Music sampie008 jpg sample00S jpg ai Display item 1 12 Total 12 Show 50 uw Properbes Selected Items Samples x 226 Permission Biwie Folder Topics covered in this chapter e Starting File Stationbah e Familiarizing yourself with File Station bad e Using File Station 24 e Remote Connectionl2s amp Starting File Station Launch File Station from the Main Menu Desktop shortcut or directly log into File Station by going to http NAS_Name_or_IP cgi bin filemanager html Familiarizing yourself with File Station Menu Bar Q F lt r o 90000 Q Gy 244 TTS gwiw 2728 No Name Left Panel Search Bar Browsing
151. backup automatically every time the device is connected and detected by the NAS 7 Choose to automatically eject the external drive after the job is finished 8 To configure the backup policy and filter settings select Configure policy and filter and click Next Select whether or not to enable the following options o Delete extra files Deletes extra files in the target folder Deletions made on the source folder will be repeated on the target folder This option is not available for real time data backup o Detect sparse files Select this option to ignore files with null data o Overwrite the file if the source file is newer or the file size is different o Check file contents Examine the file contents date size and name to determine if two files are identical This option is not available for real time data backup o Ignore symbolic links Select this option to ignore symbolic links in the pair folder 9 Create filters for the backup job o File size Specify the minimum and maximum sizes of the files to be copied o File date time Specify the date and time of the files to be copied 240 o Include file types Specify the file types to be copied o Exclude file types Specify the file types to be excluded from the data copy 10 Enter a name for the backup job A job name supports up to 63 characters and cannot start or end with a space 11 Confirm the settings and click Next 12 Click Finish to exit the wizard
152. ble 135 4 9 Firmware Update Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Firmware Update to update the firmware version of the NAS Model Current firmware version 4 2 0 Date 2015 07 22 System up time 2 Day s 2 Hour s 59 Minute s Check for Update Status Last checked 2015 08 03 15 19 18 Monday Automatically check if a newer version is available when logging into the NAS web administration interface You can also check QNAP Download Center for any firmware or utility updates Apply Live Update Select Automatically check if a newer version is available when logging into the NAS web administration interface to allow the NAS to automatically check if a new firmware version is available If a new firmware is found you will be notified after logging in the NAS as an administrator Click Check for Update to check if any firmware update is available Note that the NAS must be connected to the Internet for these features to work Firmware Update Before updating the system firmware make sure the product model and firmware version are correct Follow these steps to update the firmware 1 Download the firmware release notes from the QNAP website http www qnap com Read the release notes carefully to make sure it is necessary to update the firmware 2 Download the NAS firmware and unzip the IMG file to the computer 3 Before updating the system firmware back up all the NAS data to avoid any 136 poten
153. brary Media Library Server started a System Event Logs The NAS can store 10 000 recent event logs including warnings errors and information If the NAS does not function correctly refer to the event logs for troubleshooting Tip Right click on a record to delete it To clear every log click Clear All System Connection Logs The NAS can record HTTP FTP Telnet SSH AFP SAMBA and iSCSI connections Click Options to select the connection type to be logged File transfer performance may be slightly impacted when this feature is enabled Tip Right click on a record and select to delete the record or to block the IP and select how long the IP should be blocked To clear every log click Clear All Start Logging Enable this option to archive connection logs When the number of logs reaches the upper limit the NAS will automatically generate a CSV file and save it to a specified folder File level access logs are available on this page The NAS will record logs when users access create delete move or rename any files folders via the connection 157 type specified in Options To disable this feature click Stop logging Online Users The information of online users connected to the NAS by networking services is shown here Tip Right click on a record to disconnect the IP connection and block the IP Syslog Client Management Syslog is a standard for
154. but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the sam
155. cally register its name and IP address with the WINS service Do not enable this option if you are unsure about the settings e Local Domain Master A Domain Master Browser is responsible for collecting and recording resources and services available for each PC on the network or a workgroup of Windows When you find the waiting time for loading network resources to be too long it may be caused by a failure of an existing master browser or a missing master browser on the network If there is no master browser on your network select the option Domain Master to configure the NAS as the master browser Do not enable this option if you are unsure about the settings e Allow only NTLMv2 authentication NTLMv2 stands for NT LAN Manager version 2 When this option is enabled login to the shared folders by Microsoft Networking will only be allowed using NTLMv2 authentication If the option is disabled NTLM NT LAN Manager will be used by default and NTLMv2 can be negotiated by the client The default setting is disabled e Name resolution priority You can select to use DNS server or WINS server to resolve client host names from IP addresses When you set up your NAS to use a WINS server or to be a WINS server you can choose to use DNS or WINS first for name resolution When WINS is enabled the default setting is Try WINS then DNS Otherwise DNS will be used for name resolution by default 197 e Login style DOMAIN USERNAME instead of DOMAIN U
156. choose to play download remove rename email the link of publish the link share the link of that collection or modify the settings of that collection The email publish and share options are only available if Share with the public is enabled in Collection Settings Sharing collections As you create a collection you can choose to share it with other NAS users choose whether all NAS users can edit the collection or only the creator administrator or the public or not to share at all leave both options unchecked and set the valid period on the collection creation page If a collection is set to be shared with the public you 362 can right click on the collection and select Email to email it Publish to publish it on social networks or Sharing Links to generate and paste the collection link on your blog forum or instant messengers You can still edit the collection content later and the updated content will be presented when viewers click the same link You can also share a number of videos as you do with collections To do so click Sharing on the right panel drag videos from different collections and drop under Select Videos on the right panel and use the Email Social Sharing or Link button to share the videos Then your friends can log into Video Station with the link provided to them to watch videos from shared collections To check the sharing history of a selected collection click on the collecti
157. com with OpenVPN server IP Put ca crt and openvpn ovpn into the configuration folder under the OpenVPN configuration subdirectory Run OpenVPN VPN Client Management Select the VPN users and specify their privileges Add VPN users Click Add VPN Users and follow the wizard to select the system users and set their privileges Delete VPN users Click Delete to remove the VPN users The users will not be able to connect to the VPN service after being deleted Connection List 280 This list shows the connection status of the VPN clients You can right click a client on the list and select to disconnect the client 281 7 13 Web Server Go to Control Panel gt Applications gt Web Server to configure the web server and virtual host Web Server After enabling this function you can upload the webpage files to Web network share to publish your website f Enable Web Server Port number 80 Enable secure connection HTTPS Port number 8081 Enable WebDAV After enabling this service click the following link to enter to Web Server http tatehome mygnapcloud com 80 https tatehome mygnapcloud com 8081 Analy Web Server The NAS can host web sites including those that use Joomla PHP and MySQL SQLite to establish an interactive website To use the Web Server follow these steps 1 Enable the service and enter the port number The default number is 80 2 Configure other
158. connect to the iSCSI target Then click Next Enter a name for the virtual disk If the target is mapped with multiple LUNs select a LUN from the list Make sure that only this NAS can connect to the LUN The NAS supports mounting EXT3 EXT4 FAT32 NTFS HFS file systems If the file system of the LUN is Unknown select Format virtual disk now and choose the file system You can format the virtual disk as EXT3 EXT4 FAT 32 NTFS or HFS By selecting Format virtual disk now the data on the LUN will be cleared Then click Next Click Finish 5 The storage capacity of the NAS is expanded by the virtual disk Users can go to 110 Privilege Settings gt Share Folders to create new shared folders on the virtual disk Refer to the table below for actions the Action button available to manage virtual disks Action Description iai Click this button to edit a virtual disk name or the authentication i information of an iSCSI target Connect Click this button to connect to an iSCSI target Disconnec Click this button to disconnect an iSCSI target t z i Click this button to format a virtual disk as EXT3 EXT 4 FAT 32 orma NTFS or HFS file system Delete Click this button to delete a virtual disk or an iSCSI target External Device You can use an external device as a virtual disk Check the External Deviceh4 chapter for details 4 3 Network Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt
159. ct this option to temporarily disable the selected printer for print sharing All of the data in the printer spool will be cleared 144 e Bonjour printer support Select this option to broadcast printing service to Mac users via Bonjour When naming your printer the name can only contain a z A z 0 9 dot comma and dash Maximum Printer Jobs and Blacklist e Maximum printer jobs per printer Specify the maximum number of printer jobs for a printer A printer supports up to 1 000 printer jobs The oldest printer job will be overwritten by the newest one if the printer has reached the maximum number of printer jobs e Enter IP addresses or domain names to allow or deny printing access To allow or deny particular IP addresses or domain names from using the NAS printing service select Allow printing or Deny printing and enter the IP addresses or domain names An asterisk denotes all connections To allow all users to use the printer select No limit Click Apply to save the settings Note This feature only works for printing service via IPP and Bonjour but not Samba 145 4 11 2 1 Windows 7 Follow these steps to set up your printer connection 1 Go to Devices and Printers 2 Click Add a printer 3 4 While Windows is searching for available network printers click The printer that I In the Add printer wizard click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer want isn t
160. cy the system is unusable Alert emails will be sent when Syslog messages of levels 0 4 are received Alert immediate action required Alert emails will be sent when Syslog messages of levels 1 4 are received Critical critical conditions Alert emails will be sent when Syslog messages of levels 2 4 are received Error error conditions Alert emails will be sent when Syslog messages of levels 3 4 are received Warning warning conditions Alert emails will be sent when Syslog messages of level 4 are received This feature should only be operated by administrators who are familiar with Syslog filters Follow these steps to create Syslog filters for the NAS to receive Syslog messages that match the criteria 1 Click Add a Filter 2 Define the filter settings and click Add To edit the filters or to manually add filters click Manual Edit and modify the contents in the dialog Click Apply to save the filter 3 The filters will be shown on the list The NAS will only receive Syslog messages that 267 match the filters which are in use Button Name gt Enable u Disable 2 Edit Delete Delete Syslog Viewer Description Enable a filter Disable a filter Edit filter settings Delete filters Use the Syslog viewer to view the available Syslog messages on the NAS Select to view the latest logs or the logs in a particular archived file Log files can be accessed on the directory conf
161. d and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 395 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likew
162. d and scanned by the Media Library To set the Media Library to scan for music files manually or by schedule go to Control Panel gt Multimedia Management gt Media Library For more details on media folder settings please refer to the chapter on Multimedia Management 324 8 8 myQNAPcloud Service myQNAPcloud provides host name registration mapping of a dynamic NAS IP toa domain name and auto port mapping for UPnP routers on the local network Use the myQNAPcloud wizard to register a unique host name for the NAS configure automatic port forwarding on the UPnP router and publish NAS services for remote access over the Internet RAPo e Auto Rowter Configuration My DONS Goud Portal Coven A005 Contrat SSL Certificate To use the myQNAPcloud service make sure the NAS has been connected to an UPnP router and the Internet and click the myQNAPcloud shortcut from the NAS Desktop or Main Menu This chapter includes two parts The first part deals with the myQNAPcloud App you use on the NAS and covers the following setup e myQNAPcloud Wizardls28 e Auto Router Configurationls2a e My DDNS f2A e Cloud Portal 32 e CloudLinkb28 e Access Controlls2a 325 e SSL Certificate 52 The second part of the chapter focuses on the following topic e myQNAPcloud Portalk3d a portal for remote accessing and managing multiple NAS across the Internet myQNAPcloud Wizard It is recommended to use th
163. dia Folder Media folders are shared folders on the NAS that are scanned for multimedia files Multimedia and Home are the default media folders on the NAS from QTS 4 1 all default shared folders on the NAS are identified as media folders for the purpose of multimedia application services To add media folders click Add select media types and folders from the list and click Add To change scanned file types for the media folders first uncheck the media file types and click Apply To remove media folders first select media folders from the list and then click Delete and Apply 316 8 7 Music Station Music Station 4 0 helps you create a personal music center on the cloud This web based application is designed for users to play music files on the NAS or a media server listen to thousands of Internet radio stations and share your music with your friends and families Your music collection stored on the NAS is automatically organized into categories for easy access Musc Staton X o Sa DjAlbum gt Unknown Album o 0 0 52 GB 2 i J Songs Artist ee Genre Now Playing Come Back to Me Merry Chnstmas Mr a Peniata Calactina S UTADA HIKARU FE m UTADA HIKARU Sm UTADA MIKARU async oes Playlist 0 amp My Favorites N 4 Subject Recently Added I have shared my favorite music wit Frequently Play pn pclapcshicganaee pe biden ns knki das Ponape I have shared my favorite m
164. disk S M A R T information More details about S M A R T information will be provided in the next table Click this button to scan the disk for bad blocks If bad blocks are found the number of bad blocks will be displayed in the Status field Check the bad block sectors by clicking on the bad blocks message so long as the disk is not busy You can also use this function if a drive is in an error state In this case if no bad blocks found after a complete scan the error state of drive will be changed back to normal Click this button to locate drives using LED lights for easy identification of physical hard drives Click this button to set the chosen hard disk drive as an enclosure Spare drive in RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 In case a spare drive is shared by multiple RAID groups that spare drive will be used to replace the first failed drive across all RAID groups Please note that the capacity of the enclosure spare drive must be equal to or larger than that of the member drive in a RAID group and this option is only available for an empty disks Note that an enclosure Spare can only be used within an enclosure Click this button to cancel the chosen hard disk drive as an enclosure spare drive Click this button to create a new volume For details please refer to the chapter on Volumes 70 58 under Action RAID Group Click this button and select a RAID group and check its details including capac
165. domain controller needs to be backed up In an AD environment where more than one domain controller presents there are some restrictions and limitations associated with the restore procedures Please check the restore function carefully Backing up domain controllers To back up the domain controller status follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Backup Restore tab 2 Check Back up Database and set the backup frequency starting time destination folder and backup options choose to overwrite existing backup file or create a new file 3 Click Apply Restoring domain controllers Please note that the current settings including users groups and domain controller settings will be overwritten and all changes made since the last backup will be lost So please be specially careful when you restore domain controllers To restore the domain controller in a single domain controller environment follow the steps below 1 Go to Control Panel Privilege Settings gt Domain Controller gt Backup Restore tab gt scroll down to the Restore ADDC Database section 2 Click Browse and select the backup file 3 Click Import If the domain controller you try to restore is in an environment with more than one domain controllers do not restore from the backup as this will corrupt the domain controller database Simply add the NAS back as a domain controller and it
166. drive s will be erased Click OK if you are certain about this 8 The new volume will be created Note The hot spare disk feature is only available for RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 and RAID 10 For other RAID types the hot spare disk field will be grayed out Follow these steps to create a new thick or thin volume 1 Select Thick Multiple Volume or Thin Multiple Volume Select to create a new storage pool or from an existing storage pool and click Next 2 Configure the mode for the volume from static single thick multiple and thin multiple according to your needs 70 3 Configure the volume capacity alert threshold volume alias Bytes per inode encryption and shared folder settings and click Next 4 Click Finish 5 A new volume will be created Note e Static Single Volume This mode offers the best performance but does not support thin provisioning space reclamation and snapshots For this option the RAID group itself is a volume e Thick Multiple Volumes This method can create multiple volumes on the same storage pool and instantly allocate physical storage space for the volume It has better performance than thin volumes while also offering flexibility e Thin Multiple Volumes This method can over allocate the volume capacity for each volume regardless of the physical storage limit and the physical disk space is only used when files are written into the volume After files are deleted it is possib
167. duce the time required for remote replication 8 Click Apply If you selected Execute backup immediately the replication task will start at once Otherwise it will be performed according to your schedule Note that the job is recursive Do not turn off the local NAS and the remote server when remote replication is running Note For step 5 the order of selecting the source and destination folders can be changed The above is just an example Ico Name Description n gt Start Start a replication job immediately m Stop Stop a running replication job View View Rsync logs replication results 2 Edit Edit a replication job B Disable Disable replication schedule Enable Enable replication schedule To configure the timeout and retry settings of the replications jobs click Options e Timeout second Specify a timeout value for each replication job This is the maximum number of seconds to wait until a replication job is cancelled if no data has been received e Number of retries Specify the number of times the NAS should try to execute a replication job if it fails 229 e Retry intervals second Specify the number of seconds to wait in between each retry For example if you entered 600 seconds for timeout 3 retries and 60 seconds for retry intervals a replication job will timeout in 600 seconds if no data is received The NAS will wait for 60 seconds and try to execute the job a second time
168. e foldertest Name pe home 2015 07 08 10 Folder homes a created_by_nfstest 2015 01 28 04 Folder Mulimedia i created_by_root 2015 05 26 11 Folder Public foWertest 1970 01 01 08 File Recordings tesimove You must configure your myQNAPcloud account using the myQNAPcloud App before logging into the myQNAPcloud portal Managing and Configuring your myQNAPcloud Account After launching myQNAPcloud or logging into your account on the myQNAPcloud website click on your nickname next to the notification icon in the top right corner gt User Profile On this page you can e Update your profile e Change your myQNAPcloud login password e Add or edit your contact list e Check application logs e Monitor myQNAPcloud activities Accessing NAS Servers via myQNAPcloud Website After you log into the myQNAPcloud web portal you will see a list of NAS servers under My Devices on the left of the screen Click on any of the NAS and there will be a list of available actions to perform and you will be able to e Perform basic file management tasks as in File Station e Manage share links e Configure access controls check the above Access Controlb28 section for more details e View and access published and private services for private services check the above Cloud Portalls24 section for more details e Review and refresh device details or unregister the device 331 Using published Services from other NAS Servers via myQN
169. e administration interface of the NAS by SSL and there will not be any alert or error message The NAS only supports X 509 certificates and private keys e Download Certificate Download the secure certificate which is currently in use e Download Private Key Download the private key which is currently in use e Restore Default Certificate amp Private Key Restores the secure certificate and private key to system default The secure certificate and private key in use will be overwritten 126 4 6 Hardware Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Hardware to configure the NAS hardware functions Enable configuration reset switch Enables hard disk standby mode The status LED will turn off if there is no access within Time 30 minutes M Q Enables the light signal alert when the free storage size is less than the value Only support simple volume Size 3072 MB Enable write cache EXT4 delay allocation s Turn on LED light LED brightness Apply this setting during a specific time 08 i24 00 Ra 23 pyi 59 iw General e Enable configuration reset switch When this is enabled you can press the reset button for 3 seconds to reset the administrator password and the system settings to default NAS data will be retained or 10 seconds for advanced system reset o Basic system reset You will hear a beep after pressing and holding the reset button The following settings will be reset to d
170. e For HD videos click the HD icon on top of the player window to switch video quality e You can also control the playback and volume with your computer keyboard o Left Rewind o Right Forward o Up Increase volume o Down Decrease volume o Space Play Pause e To stream media files to HDMI or Chromecast using the Network Media Player 365 the Media Streaming Add On must first be installed in the App Center e Only MP4 video files can be directly streamed if your NAS does not support On the fly Transcoding You can consider transcoding them into different media formats if they are desirable Downloading and searching movie information online Video Station supports downloading online information movie poster year rating director etc for movies To enable this feature follow these steps 1 Classify a video as movie right click on a video gt Information gt change the Classification to Movies under the Video Property tab 2 Switch to the Movies category on the left panel 3 Right click on a movie gt Movie information to open the movie information page for that movie 4 If the video information downloaded from the Internet is incorrect click the Edit icon in the top right corner of the Movie Information page and enter the movie keyword to search again Please note that this feature only supports English keywords 5 If the movie poster is incorrect you can change it by clicking the Edit icon
171. e NAS 1 Press the power button until you hear a beep 2 Use the Wake on e LAN WOL feature with QNAP Qfinder or Qmanager Note that to use the e WOL must first be enabled in Control Panel gt Power gt Wake on LAN e WOL For details refer to hereli3h 3 Press the power button on a RM IROO2 or MCE remote control o Note This feature is only available on certain models e Restart Restart your NAS e Shutdown Shut down your NAS o Note To power off a NAS you can also Press and hold the power button on your NAS for 1 5 seconds Run Qfinder and click Tools gt Shut down Server e Logout Log yourself out e Help Display a list of online references including the Quick Start Guide QTS Help and Tutorials e Language Choose your preferred language for the UI e Desktop Preference Choose the application icon display style and select your preferred application opening mode on the desktop Application icons can be switched between small and detailed thumbnails Applications can be opened in Tab Mode Window Mode or Frameless Mode Only Tab Mode is available if you log into the NAS using a mobile device o Tab Mode In this mode the window will be opened to fit the entire NAS Desktop and only one application window can be displayed at a time o Window mode In this mode the application window can be resized and reshaped to a desirable style 42 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 step Verific
172. e Time Machine feature on OS X To use this function follow these steps Configure the settings on the NAS 1 Enable Time Machine support 2 Enter the Time Machine password The password is empty by default 3 Select a volume on the NAS as the backup destination 4 Enter the storage capacity that Time Machine backup is allowed to use The maximum value is 4095GB 0 means unlimited 5 Click Apply to save the settings All the Time Machine users share the same shared folder for this function Configure the backup settings on Mac 1 Open Time Machine on your Mac and click Select Backup Disk 2 Select the TMBackup on your NAS from the list and click Use for Backup 3 Enter the username and password to login to the NAS and click Connect o Registered username TimeMachine o Password The password you have configured on the NAS It is empty by default 4 Upon successful connection the Time Machine is switched ON The available space for backup is shown and the backup will start in 120 seconds The first backup may take more time according to the data size on the Mac To recover data to the Mac OS please see a tutorial on http www apple com Managing Backup 226 You can manage existing backups on this page Volume drop down menu on top right side of the screen Display Time Machine backup tasks stored in the volume Name The name of the Time Machine backup the sparse bundle disk image which was created by T
173. e Volume Management page 3 Click Actions gt Create New Shared Folder 4 Specify the folder name and description of the new shared folder and select the disk volume for the shared folder 5 Click Edit to the right of Configure access privileges for users in Step 4 and specify user privileges 6 Click Edit to the right of Advanced settings in Step 4 and configure the guest access right hidden folder Oplocks recycle bin and path Click Create 7 A new shared folder will be created Snapshot Users can take a snapshot manage snapshots revert delete and clone a snapshot set up snapshot schedules or restore snapshot files for LUNs or volumes or replicate volumes LUNs between different remote servers using snapshot technology Note Snapshot Replica or volumes LUNs replication between remote servers is covered in Backup Station For details please refer to the Snapshot Replical34 chapter in Backup Station Snapshot only applies to these NAS models TS 269L TS 269 Pro TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 469U RP TS 469U SP TS 470 Pro TS 470 TS 569 Pro TS 569L TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 670 Pro TS 670 TS 869 Pro TS 869L TS 869U RP TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 1269U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1679U RP TS EC879U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC1679U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP SS EC2479U SAS RP TS EC2480U RP TS EC1
174. e control for HD Station Use Qremote to control HD Station from your mobile devices Download Available on the b 0 App Store p gt Google play Qmusic Qmusic helps you enjoy the music collection on your NAS via your mobile devices at anytime anywhere Create and send links to share your favorite music with friends and family using social networks instant messengers or by email Download Available on the Da n E App Store a Google play Qvideo helps you enjoy the videos on your NAS via your mobile devices at anytime anywhere and also to share your videos with friends and family Download 370 Qphoto helps you enjoy your personal photo collection on your mobile devices at any time from anywhere without limits Relive and share your special moments on the go Download D ere Direct download ong oud 7 Qget allows you to manage all of the download tasks on your NAS using your mobile devices at anytime anywhere Use Qget to add and monitor your download tasks in Download Station The Qget built in browser helps you to add tasks from direct download links or from magnet links Qget can also search across multiple Bit Torrent sites and add the torrent to your download queue Download gt Google play Vmobile 371 Vmobile is a mobile video surveillance application provided by QNAP that enables you to connect to and manage your video surveillance system from your mobile device at anytime from
175. e covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your ob
176. e following topics e Setting up HybridDesk Station s04 e Using HybridDesk StationboA e Importing Media Contents to your NAS 303 e Configuring HybridDesk Station s08 e Remote Controlbo Setting up HybridDesk Station Create your lovely media environment by following these steps 1 Setting up the environment of the HybridDesk Station Connect the NAS to the HDMI TV with a HDMI cable o Remote controller There are 4 different ways to control the HybridDesk Station QNAP remote controller MCE remote controller USB keyboard or mouse 302 Qremote QNAP remote app designed exclusively for the HybridDesk Station Note If you want to use Chrome you must use the Qremote mouse function or use a USB mouse that is connected to the NAS 2 Installing the HybridDesk Station o Go to Applications gt HybridDesk Station and click the Get Started Now button The system will automatically install the HybridDesk Station 3 Choosing the applications to install o HybridDesk Station The HybridDesk Station portal which allows you to use the following applications on the TV screen o XBMC An application for you to operate and enjoy your multimedia data on the TV screen o Chrome With the help of Chrome the NAS brings endless web content to your HDTV Just sit back relax and surf the Internet on your couch o YouTube Browse and click to enjoy millions of YouTube videos on your TV o My NAS Enter the local NAS administrati
177. e freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights 387 Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restr
178. e of IP addresses allocated by the NAS to the DHCP clients and the lease time The lease time refers to the time that an IP address is leased to the clients During that time the IP will be reserved to the assigned client When the lease time expires the IP can be assigned to another client e WINS Server optional WINS Windows Internet Naming Service resolves Windows network computer names NetBIOS names to IP addresses allowing Windows computers on a network to easily find and communicate with each other Enter the IP address of the WINS server on the network if available e DNS Suffix optional The DNS suffix is used for resolution of unqualified incomplete host names e TFTP Server amp Boot File optional The NAS supports PXE booting of network 114 devices Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the boot file including directory on the TFTP server and file name For remote booting of devices enter the public IP address of the TFTP server ii DNS Server A DNS Domain Name Service server translates between a domain name such as google com and an IP address 74 125 31 105 Configure the NAS to obtain a DNS server address automatically or to specify the IP address of a DNS server e Primary DNS Server Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server e Secondary DNS Server Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server iii Default Gateway Select the gateway settings to use if both LAN ports have been
179. e pool expansion 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to be expanded to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Click Expand Pool select Create and add a new RAID group and click Next 4 Select the enclosure unit hard disk drive s RAID type and hot spare disk and click Next 5 Please note that if the type of the newly created RAID group is different from that of the existing RAID group s the performance of the entire storage pool may be affected To continue click OK 6 Click Expand 7 Please note that all data on the selected hard drive s will be erased Click OK if you are certain about this 8 The chosen storage pool will be expanded Note e RAID 0 JBOD or Single RAID Group cannot be added to a storage pool if that storage pool already contains RAID 1 5 6 or 10 66 e To expand storage space with an expansion unit please create a separate static volume or storage pool on the expansion unit A storage pool cannot be expanded using a USB based expansion unit Expanding storage pools by replacing hard disk drives in a RAID array With this function RAID group capacity can be expanded by replacing hard disk drives in an array one by one This option is supported for the following RAID types RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 and RAID 10 Follow these steps to expand a RAID group 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage
180. e price paid for the product from direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from the use of the product its accompanying software or its documentation QNAP makes no warranty or representation expressed implied or statutory with respect to its products or the contents or use of this documentation and all accompanying software and specifically disclaims its quality performance merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose QNAP reserves the right to revise or update its products software or documentation without obligation to notify any individual or entity Back up the system periodically to avoid any potential data loss QNAP disclaims any responsibility of all sorts of data loss or recovery Should you return any components of the NAS package for refund or maintenance make sure they are carefully packed for shipping Any form of damages due to improper packaging will not be compensated QNAP QNAP logo QTS myQNAPcloud and VioStor are trademarks or registered trademarks of QNAP Systems Inc or its subsidiaries Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others 1 2 Regulatory Notice FCC Notice QNAP NAS comply with different FCC compliance classes Please refer the Appendix for details Once the class of the device is determined refer to the following corresponding statement FCC Class A Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation
181. e wizard the first time you use myQNAPcloud Follow these steps 1 Click Get Started to use the wizard 2 Click Start 3 Fill out your myQNAPcloud ID QID and password Click Next or click Create myQNAPcloud account to sign up a myQNAPcloud account if you don t already have an account 4 Enter a name to register your NAS and click Next 5 Select to enable the myQNAPcloud services Auto Router Configuration DDNS Publish Services and CloudLink and set the level of access control Click Next 6 The wizard will configure your router automatically 7 Review the summary page and click Finish to complete the wizard Auto Router Configuration In Auto Router Configuration you can enable disable UPnP port forwarding When enabled your NAS is accessible from the Internet via the UPnP router Note If there is more than one router on the network only the one which is set as the default gateway of the NAS will be detected If no UPnP router is found on the local network click Rescan and Diagnostics to check the diagnostic logs If the UPnP router is incompatible with the NAS click the tooltip icon and then click UPnP Router Compatibility Feedback http www qnap com go compatibility_router html to contact technical support Select the NAS services to be allowed for remote access and click Apply to Router The NAS will automatically configure the port forwarding on the UPnP router You will t
182. ecently Added on the left panel 3 Switch to the folder view browsing mode and drag amp drop music files to a preferred folder Note that with the first and third method you can choose what NAS folder that you want to upload music files to 2 Launch Music Station from the Main Menu Desktop shortcut or directly log into Music Station by going to http NAS_Name_or_IP musicstation Familiarizing yourself with Music Station Menu Bar FEE 2 ma EB Siem a o mom 2 5 a pr Panel Show Hide the left panel 2 Search Bar Search songs by artist album title or all songs 3 Browsing Switch between different browsing modes from left to Mode right thumbnail browsing mode detail browsing mode album list browsing mode cover flow browsing mode folder browsing mode to browse music files 4 Multi Select Select multiple items at the same time 318 5 Resizing Bar Drag to adjust the size of the thumbnails 6 Refresh Refresh the current page 7 Settings Set user privileges on file access NAS audio output Internet radio or editing song information 8 Music Alarm Set music alarms 9 Help Show Help Quick Start and About 1 Right Panel Show Hide the left panel 0 0 45 6 32 METAL GEAR SOLID Main Theme METAL GEAR SOLID 3 Version Name Description o 1 Seek Bar Control the playback progress 2 Previous Item Play the previous item 3 Play Pause Play Pause 4 Next Item Play the next item 5
183. ected to a 1 bay NAS e Data sharing Use the external drive for storage expansion of the NAS e Q RAID 1 Configure the external drive and a local hard drive on the NAS as Q RAID 1 Q RAID 1 enables one way data synchronization from the NAS to the external storage device but does not offer any RAID redundancy Note that the external drive will be formatted when Q RAID 1 is executed After Q RAID 1 has been executed once the NAS data will be automatically copied to the external storage device whenever it is connected to the NAS 143 4 11 2 USB Printer The NAS supports network printing sharing service over local networks and the Internet in Windows Mac and Linux Ubuntu environments Up to 3 USB printers are supported To share a USB printer connect the printer to a USB port on the NAS The printer will be automatically detected and its information displayed Printer Info Click on a connected USB printer and then Printer Info to review its details Printer Log Click on a connected USB printer and then Printer Log to view its print job history You can pause or cancel ongoing pending jobs resume paused jobs or delete completed or pending jobs To clear the history click Clear Clean Up Spool Space Click Clean Up Spool Space to clean up the data saved in the printer spool Settings Click Settings to configure basic settings of the printer e Stop printer sharing and clear print spool Sele
184. ecurity key 2 Type in the security key 3 Click Finish after the NAS has added the Wi Fi network 4 To edit IP address settings click Edit You can choose to automatically obtain the IP address by DHCP or to set a fixed IP address If the Wi Fi connection is the only connection between the NAS and the router AP you must select WLAN1 as the default gateway in Network gt TCP IP page Otherwise the NAS will be unable to connect to the Internet or communicate with another network IPv6 The NAS supports IPv6 connectivity with stateless address configurations and RADVD Router Advertisement Daemon for IPv6 RFC 2461 to allow the hosts on the same subnet to automatically acquire IPv6 addresses fromthe NAS NAS services which 120 support IPv 6 include CIFS SMB AFP NFS FTP iSCSI Web Server QTS Desktop RTRR SSH Qsync for Windows Netbak Replicator To use this function select the option Enable IPv6 and click Apply The NAS will restart After the system restarts go to the IPv6 page The settings of the IPv6 interface will be shown Click the Edit button to edit the settings IPv6 Auto Configuration If an IPv6 enabled router is available on the network select this option to allow the NAS to automatically acquire the IPv6 address and configurations Use static IP address To use a Static IP address enter the IP address e g 2001 bc95 1234 5678 prefix length e g 64 and the g
185. ed Cloning Snapshots Navigate to Snapshot Vault in Storage Manager Select a snapshot on the left panel and click Clone Enter a name for the volume to mount the snapshot Choose the folders files to clone Select OK and the task will start immediately An no KRWN Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space and you will see the new volume that has been cloned from Snapshot Vault 7 You can now also use File Station to manage the files in the new volume 90 4 2 3 iSCSI Manage the iSCSI storage create advanced ACLs and back up LUNs with the iSCSI management features RegietemcRiAS VE an 2004 04 Com grap tAire act repintemenenn MAIS et gn 2004 04 com grag IHEP Ope Kem Mest DID O margen age 2006 4 com qap tr 470 pro oco margaret BAI 20180001 ne 2006 04 com ena to 20ere mee 20150801 BENE For details on the features please refer to the following links e iSCSI StoragelsA e LUN Backupho 91 4 2 3 1 iSCSI Storage The NAS supports a built in iSCSI Internet Small Computer System Interface service for server clustering and virtualized environments Users can enable or disable the iSCSI service change the port of the iSCSI portal enable disable the iSNS service and list and manage all iSCSI targets and LUNs on this page The NAS supports multiple iSCSI targets and multiple LUNs per target iSCSI LUNs can be mapped or unmapped to a specific target In this chap
186. ed For example ou people dc mydomain dc local o Groups Base DN The organization unit OU where groups are stored For example ou group dc mydomain dc local 183 4 Click Apply to save the settings Upon successful configuration the NAS will be able to connect to the LDAP server 5 Configure LDAP authentication options o If Microsoft Networking has been enabled Network Services gt Win Mac NFS gt Microsoft Networking when applying the LDAP settings specify the users who can access the NAS via Microsoft Networking Samba a Local users only Only local NAS users can access the NAS via Microsoft Networking LDAP users only Only LDAP users can access the NAS via Microsoft Networking o If Microsoft Networking is enabled after the NAS has already been connected to the LDAP server select the authentication type for Microsoft Networking Standalone Server Only local NAS users can access the NAS via Microsoft Networking LDAP Domain Authentication Only LDAP users can access the NAS via Microsoft Networking 6 When the NAS is connected to an LDAP server the administrator can o Go to Privilege Settings gt Users and select Domain Users from the drop down menu The LDAP users list will be shown o Go to Privilege Settings gt User Groups and select Domain Groups from the drop down menu The LDAP groups will be shown o Specify the folder permissions of LDAP domain users or groups in Privilege Setting
187. ed Folders gt Shared Folders tab Select a root folder for example Dept and click Folder Permissions The shared folder name and its first level subfolders are shown on the left The users with configured access rights are shown in the panel with special permission below Double click the first level subfolders to view the second level subfolders Select the root folder Dept Click Add to specify read only read write or deny access for the users and user groups 3 Click Add when you have finished the settings 4 Specify other permissions settings below the folder permissions panel o Guest Access Right Specify to grant full or read only access or deny guest access o Owner Specify the owner of the folder By default the folder owner is the creator 5 To change the folder owner click the Folder Property button next to the owner field 169 Edit Shared Folder Permission Select permission type Users and groups permission MM Edit the user and group permissions for access from Windows Mac FTP and File Station Shares 3C Download I Multimedia J Music A admin Read Write v B Public Recordings B Usb A vol2 BE Web B E Works CG bbb B homes Permissions Preview Read Only Read Write Deny Access Special Permission Guest Access Right Deny access v Add Remove Owner Z admin Only the owner can delete the contents Only admin can create files and folders s Apply changes to
188. ed with destination MAC address Alternate transmit policies may be selected via the xmit_hash_policy option Balance XOR mode provides load balancing and fault tolerance Broadcast sends traffic on both network Supports static interfaces This mode provides fault tolerance trunking Make sure static trunking is enabled on the switch Dynamic Link Aggregation uses a complex Supports 802 3ad algorithm to aggregate adapters by speed and LACP duplex settings It utilizes all slaves in the active aggregator according to the 802 3ad specification Dynamic Link Aggregation mode provides load balancing and fault tolerance but requires a switch that supports IEEE 802 3ad with LACP mode properly configured Balance tlb uses channel bonding that does General switches not require any special switch The outgoing traffic is distributed according to the current load on each Ethernet interface computed relative to the speed Incoming traffic is received by the current Ethernet interface If the receiving Ethernet interface fails the other slave takes over the MAC address of the failed receiving slave Balance tlb mode provides load balancing and fault tolerance Balance alb Adaptive Load Balancing Wi Fi Balance alb is similar to balance tlb but also General switches attempts to redistribute incoming receive load balancing for IPV4 traffic This setup does not require any special switch support or configurati
189. ee below e Download the encryption key file Enter the encryption password to download the encryption key file With this option the encryption key can be saved as a file The file is also encrypted and can be used to unlock a volume without knowing the real password see Locking and unlocking disk volumes manually below Please save the encryption key file in a secure place e Save the encryption key Save the encryption key on the NAS to automatically unlock and mount the encrypted disk volume after the NAS restarts Note that saving the encryption key alone is not completely safe as if the NAS is stolen the volume will be automatically unlocked after it restarts Locking and unlocking disk volumes manually To lock a volume log into the NAS as an administrator Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Double click a volume to be locked to bring up the Volume Management page and click Actions gt Encryption gt Lock this Volume Click Yes To unlock a volume log into the NAS as an administrator Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Select a volume to be unlocked and click Manage gt Unlock this volume Choose either to enter the encryption password or use the encryption key file exported previously Click Apply If the encryption password or the key file is correct the volume will be unlocked and become available Verifying encrypted disk volumes To verify that a dis
190. ee the Joomla phpBB3 and WordPress sites respectively 287 8 Other Applications Various applications are provided by QNAP to enhance your user experiences For details on these applications refer to the following links e App Centerks3 e DLNA Media Serverbs2 e Download Station 204 e HybridDesk Stationbo2 e iTunes Server s14 e Multimedia Managementh18 e Music Stationb1 e myQNAPcloud Serviceb2A e Photo Stationks e Station Managerlss e Transcode Managemenths e Video Stationbsd 288 8 1 App Center The App Center is a platform for the distribution of NAS apps Users can search for install remove and update apps developed by QNAP and third party developers to expand services and add new features to the NAS 209 Center x a usy E 2 My Apps Pubic Apps Upsace EJ My Licenses gt CC QTS Essentials Recoenmended Beta Lab Download Station Beta 7 Digital TV Station Beta Notes Station Beta Mad TOOTS S Starting App Center The App Center can be launched from the App Center shortcut on the Main Menu or the NAS Desktop Familiarizing yourself with App Center Menu Bar Seah Q Update All Refresh Install Manually Name Description o 1 Search Bar Search for Apps that are available to install on the NAS 2 Update All Update all of the Apps that are currently installed on the NAS 3 Refresh Refresh the current page 4 Install Browse to upload and man
191. efault System administration password admin TCP IP configuration Obtain IP address settings automatically via DHCP TCP IP configuration Disables Jumbo Frames TCP IP configuration If port trunking is enabled the port trunking mode will be reset to Active Backup Failover System port 8080 system service port Security level Low Allows all connections LCD panel password blank this feature is only for NAS models with LCD panels VLAN will be disabled Service binding All NAS services will be run on all available network 127 interfaces o Advanced system reset You will hear two beeps after continuously pressing the reset button The NAS will reset all system settings to default similar to the system reset in Administration gt Restore to Factory Default except all the NAS data will be reserved Settings such as users user groups and shared folders will be cleared To retrieve old data after an advanced system reset create the same shared folders on the NAS and the data will be accessible again Enable hard disk standby mode This option allows the NAS drives to enter standby mode if there is no disk access within the specified period Enable light signal alert when the free size of SATA disk is less than the value The status LED will flash red and green if this option is enabled and the free space of the SATA hard drive is less than the set value Enable write cache EXT4 only If
192. efore cleaning Wipe the NAS with a dry towel Do not use chemicals or aerosols to clean the NAS 5 Do not place any objects on the NAS during normal system operations and to avoid overheating 6 Use the flat head screws in the product package to lock the hard disk drives in the NAS when installing the hard drives for proper operation 7 Do not place the NAS near any liquid 8 Do not place the NAS on any uneven surface to avoid falling off and damage 9 Make sure the voltage is correct in your location when using the NAS If unsure contact your distributor or the local power company 10 Do not place any object on the power cord 11 Never attempt to repair the NAS Improper disassembly of the product may expose you to electric shock or other risks For repair related enquiries please contact your distributor 12 Rackmount NAS models should only be installed in server rooms and maintained by authorized server managers or IT administrators The server room should be sufficiently locked and only certified staff allowed to enter Warning e There is the danger of explosion if a battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions To avoid serious injuries do NOT touch the fan inside the system 11 2 Getting Started New NAS users are advised to follow the below steps to complete their NAS instal
193. ehind a firewall enable passive mode Enter the username and password with read write access to the server Click Next o Remote replication to NAS with RTRR service Enter the IP address of the RTRR service enabled server Specify the connection port and select whether or not to enable secure connection The default port number for remote replication via RTRR is 8899 Enter the password for RTRR connection Click Next o Remote replication to Windows Share CIFS SMB Enter the IP address of the Windows server Specify the destination folder username and password and click Next 5 Select the folder pair for data synchronization 231 6 Each sync job supports up to 5 folder pairs Select more folder pairs and click Add Click Next Choose between real time and scheduled synchronization Real time synchronization copies files that are new changed and renamed from the source folder to the target folder as soon as the changes are made after the first time backup Scheduled synchronization copies files from the source folder to the target folder according to the pre configured schedule The options are o Replicate Now Replicate data immediately o Periodically Enter the time interval in hours and minutes that the backup should be executed The minimum time interval is 5 minutes o Hourly Specify the minute when an hourly backup should be executed for example enter 01 to execute backup on the first minute of every
194. en YES to confirm Note You can create up to 230 permission entries for each folder when Advanced Folder Permission is enabled If you have specified deny access for a user on the root folder the user will not be allowed to access the folder and subfolders even if you select read write access to the subfolders If you have specified read only access for a user on the root folder the user will have read only access to all the subfolders even if you select read write access to the subfolders To specify read only permission on the root folder and read write permission on the subfolders you must set read write permission on the root folder and use the option Only admin can create files and folders to be explained later If an unidentified account ID such as 500 is shown for a subfolder on the permission assignment page after you click the Access Permissions button next to a shared folder in Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders gt Shared Folder it is likely that the permission of that subfolder has been granted to a user account that no longer exists In this case please select this unidentified account ID and click Remove to delete it 171 Microsoft Networking Host Access Control NAS folders can be accessed via Samba Windows by default You can specify authorized IP addresses and hosts by following these steps 1 Click Folder Permissions 2 Select Microsoft Networking host access from
195. ent file is not a video e Episode number Select this option to specify particular episodes or a series of episodes For example to download episodes 1 26 of season 1 of a TV program enter 1x1 26 To only download episode 1 of season 1 enter 1x1 e Select the time interval for automatic update of RSS feeds The NAS will update the RSS feeds and check if any new contents that match the filters are available e Click Apply to save the filter or Cancel to cancel or exit e To delete a filter select the filter from the list and click Delete Shortening BT seeding time Go to Settings gt BT gt Bandwidth Limit gt Seeding Preferences Change the Share Ratio to a smaller percentage or modify Share Time to shorten BT seeding time Sharing by multiple users Administrators can grant Download Station access to NAS users enabling friends and family members to enjoy the convenience brought by Download Station Follow these steps to grant access to NAS users 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Users 2 Click the Edit Application Privilege button under Action for the user 3 Grant permission for Download Station gt Apply Tip on slow BT download rates or download errors 1 The torrent file has expired the peers have stopped sharing this file or there is error in the file 300 301 8 4 HybridDesk Station HybridDesk Station is a platform where numerous home and office apps can be
196. eps to mount an ISO file on the NAS using the web interface 1 Log into the NAS as an administrator Go to Share Folders gt Create Click Create an ISO Share 2 Select an ISO image file on the NAS Click Next 3 The image file will be mounted as a shared folder of the NAS Enter the folder name 4 Specify the access rights of NAS users or user groups to the shared folder You can also select Deny Access or Read only for the guest access right Click Next 5 Confirm the settings and click Next 6 Click Finish 7 After mounting the image file you can specify access rights for users over different network protocols such as SMB AFP NFS and WebDAV by clicking the Access Permission icon in the Action column The NAS supports mounting ISO image files using File Station Refer to the File Station 244 174 chapter for more details Note ARM based NAS models do not support using Cyrillic characters for the name of a subfolder in an ISO shared folder the name will be incorrectly displayed if a subfolder is created with a Cyrillic name Please name the subfolder with a different language before an ISO file is created For Mac OSX mounting a folder that contains the character in the folder name through WebDAV is not supported Please rename the folder before mounting it if necessary Folder Aggregation You can aggregate the shared folders on Microsoft network as a portal folder on the NAS and let NAS
197. er the following topics are covered e Microsoft Networkingli98 e Apple Networkinglsa e NFS Servicelisd Microsoft Networking To allow access to the NAS on Microsoft Windows Network enable file service for Microsoft networking Also specify how users will be authenticated Standalone Server Use local users for authentication The NAS will use local user account information created in Privilege Settings gt Users to authenticate users who access the NAS e Server Description optional Describe the NAS so that users can easily identify it on a Microsoft Network 196 e Workgroup Specify the workgroup to which the NAS belongs A workgroup name supports up to 15 characters but cannot contain lt gt AD Domain Member Use Microsoft Active Directory AD to authenticate users To use this option enable Active Directory authentication in Privilege Settings gt Domain Security and join the NAS to an Active Directory LDAP Domain Authentication Use an LDAP directory to authenticate the users To use this option enable LDAP authentication and specify the settings in Privilege Settings gt Domain Security When this option is enabled you need to select either the local NAS users or the LDAP users that can access the NAS via Microsoft Networking Advanced Options e WINS server If you have a WINS server on your network and want to use this server enter the WINS server IP The NAS will automati
198. ers at anytime Virtualization Station allows users to open the data on the NAS directly through VMs reducing bandwidth utilization and greatly enhancing data security as all of the actions are carried out within the NAS and no data is transmitted externally Running application services on VMs is also efficient and secure by leveraging the high performance I O and the comprehensive data protection of the NAS Notes Station Beta Notes Station enables you to create digital notebooks on the private cloud provided by the NAS You can also easily leverage the files photos music and videos stored on the NAS to enrich your notes With Notes Station digital memos are safely kept for instant access Notes Station provides a straightforward interface for note taking You can easily insert all kinds of files stored on the NAS as part of your notes or as attachment to enhance the content The Media Library of QTS 4 1 provides multimedia file preview to help quickly find the correct files to insert Qsirch Beta With Qsirch you can enhance your productivity with a powerful full content search NAS allows you to store huge amounts of data files and information But it can be very easy for important files to get lost as increasing amounts of data is stored on it making productivity suffer as users spend time searching for files instead of working Qsirch can help users locate files in the shortest possible time Qsirch has advanced file extractio
199. f install on demand applications from the App Center e Development Center for third party partners to build apps for the NAS 38 3 2 Using QTS Desktop After you finish the basic setup and login to the NAS the desktop will appear Each main desktop feature is introduced in the following sections Topics covered in this chapter e QTS Desktop 3s4 e 2 step Verification 43 QTS Desktop 1 Show Minimizes restores all open windows Desktop 2 Main Menu Show the Main Menu It includes three parts 1 System features and settings SYSTEMS Key system features designed to manage or optimize your NAS 2 QNAP applications APPLICATIONS Applications developed by QNAP to enhance your NAS experience and 39 3 Search 4 Background Task 5 External Device 6 Notification and Alert 7 Options 3 Third party applications QNAP approved applications designed and submitted by independent developers Please note that the default Internet browser instead of a window on the NAS Desktop will be launched once you click a third party application Click the icon from the menu to launch the selected application Enter a feature specific keyword in the search bar to search for the desired function and its corresponding online help Click the result in the search bar to launch the function or open its online QTS help Review and control including pausing or postponing all tasks running in the background such as HDD SMART
200. f the IP address of your NAS is 192 168 0 1 and you want to link the shared folder public under the mnt pub directory use this command mount t nfs 192 168 0 1 public mnt pub Note You must login as the root user to use the above command Login as the user ID you define you can use the mounted directory to connect to your shared files 199 6 2 FTP Go to Control Panel gt Network Services gt FTP to Configure the FTP server ni Renieteed __ Advanced General Enable FTP Service Protocol type FTP Standard FTP with SSL TLS Explicit Port number Unicode support Enable anonymous Note If your FTP client does not support Unicode please select No for Unicode Support and select a supported filename encoding from Filename Encoding under General Settings gt Language so that the folders and files on FTP can be properly shown Connection Maximum number of all FTP connections FTP Service When you enable the FTP service you can specify the port number and the maximum number of users that are allowed to connect to the NAS by FTP at the same time To use the FTP service of the NAS enable this function Open an IE browser and enter ftp NAS IP Enter the username and the password to login the FTP service e Protocol Type Select to use standard FTP connection or SSL TLS encrypted FTP Select the correct protocol type in your client FTP software to ensure successful connection e Port number
201. fective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms
202. fferent media formats if they are desirable 251 Playing media files To play media files with File Station double click on a multimedia file photo music and video files and the Media Viewer a built in media player on the NAS will open to play the file Use the following buttons to control the Media Viewer 722 james _bond_spectre_trailer3 mp4 Rie e ORREK i XXY N Name Description 1 Download Download the item 2 Slideshow Play all chosen photos as a slideshow You can adjust the speed and effect of the slideshow for photos only 3 Network Media Player Stream videos to compatible devices in different rooms over your home network 4 More Action Rotate the photo set the photo as the QTS the wallpaper or delete the photo video 5 Full Screen Switch to full screen mode 6 Previous Item Next Item Play the previous next item 7 Play Pause videos Play Pause the video 8 Play Pause photos Play Pause photos as slideshow 252 9 Seek Bar _ Control the playback progress 1 Show Hide Preview Bar Hide show the preview bar 1 Last Item Next Item 1 Preview Bar bar Preview the items in queue 2 1 Subtitle Manage subtitles of the video i 1 Resolution Change resolution and transcoding 4 _ settings 1 Volume Adjust the volume 5 Finding your files folders quickly File Station supports smart searching for files sub folders and
203. figuration examples They are not mandatory and need to be adapted to match the LDAP server configuration 1 Linux OpenLDAP Server o Base DN dc qnap dc com o Root DN cn admin dc qnap dc com o Users Base DN ou people dc qnap dc com o Groups Base DN ou group dc qnap dc com 2 Mac Open Directory Server o Base DN dc macserver dc qnap dc com 185 o Root DN uid root cn users dc macserver dc qnap dc com o Users Base DN cn users dc macserver dc qnap dc com o Groups Base DN cn groups dc macserver dc qnap dc com 186 5 6 Domain Controller The Turbo NAS can now act as a domain controller for Windows IT administrators can easily configure the Turbo NAS as the centerpiece of domain directory services for their organization to store user account information manage user authentication and enforce security for a Windows domain Enable Domain Controller Domain Controller x Domain tatedomain local Administrator Password Verify Password Note This function is only applicable to some models Domain Controller Three domain controller modes are available for the Turbo NAS Domain Controller Only a domain controller can create a domain and the first NAS that creates the domain must be a domain controller In this mode the NAS can create and authenticate users Additional Domain Controller In case more than one domain controller is needed you can choose this mode to add additional domain controllers The N
204. files and subfolders Apply and replace all existing permissions of this folder files and subfolders Apply Close 6 Select a user from the list or search a username Then click Set o Only the owner can delete the contents When you apply this option to a folder e g Dept only the folder owner can delete the first level subfolders and files Users who are not the owner but possess read write permission to the folder cannot delete the folders Admin HR Production Sales and test in this example This option does not apply to the subfolders of the selected folder even if the options Apply changes to files and subfolders and Apply and replace all existing permissions of this folder files and subfolders are selected o Only admin can create files and folders This option is only available for root folders Select this option to allow admin to create first level subfolders and files in the selected folder only For example in the folder Dept only admin can create files and subfolders Admin HR Production and so on Other users with read write access to Dept can only create files and folders in the second and lower level subfolders such as AdminO1 AdminO2 HR1 and HR2 o Apply changes to files and subfolders Apply permissions settings except owner protection and root folder write protection settings to all the files and subfolders within the selected folder These settings include new users deleted users modified permissions and
205. folder SQLiteManager to NAS IP Web or NASIP Qweb 3 Open a web browser and go to http NAS IP SQLiteManager o The symbol refers to the version number of SQLiteManager 285 7 13 1 Virtual Host A virtual host is a web server technique that provides the capability to host more than one domain website on one physical host and offers a cost effective solution for personal and small businesses with such need You can host up to 32 websites on the NAS with this feature Before you Start In this tutorial we will use the information provided in the below table as a reference guide Host name WAN LAN IP Document root Demo web and port application site1l mysite com WAN IP Qweb Joomla 111 222 333 444 sitel_mysite LAN IP site2 mysite com Qweb WordPress 10 8 12 45 NAS i 3 site2_mysite Port 80 NAS www mysite2 Qweb phpBB3 com www_mysite2 Before starting make sure you have checked the following items e Web Server Enable Web Server in Applications gt Web Server e DNS records The host name must point to the NAS WAN IP You can normally configure this from your DNS service providers e Port forwarding If the web server listens on port 80 you need to configure port forwarding on your router to allow inbound traffic from port 80 to the LAN IP 10 8 12 45 of your NAS e SSL certificate import If you are going to enable SSL connection for the website and intend to use your own trusted SSL
206. folders on the NAS You can search for files or folders using all or part of the file folder name by file type or by file extension There are two additional approaches you can quickly find your files 1 advanced search and 2 smart file filter 253 Play the last next item on the preview e For the advanced search first click on the magnifier in the search bar and then Advanced Search Specify the search conditions including name size date files are modified location type and owner group and click Search The files that match these conditions in the current folder will be listed e For the smart file filter click on Smart File Filter in the Main Menu Specify the filtering conditions including name size date files are modified type and owner group and click Ok Files that match the conditions will be listed for the folder This is the case even if you switch to a different folder Note To search across all folders on the NAS click the drop down list in Location and select Setting file folder level permission You can set file or folder level permissions on the NAS using File Station Right click on a file folder and select Properties If Advanced Folder Permissions is disabled in Privilege Settings gt Shared Folder gt Advanced Permissions the following settings will be shown Define the Read Write and Execute access rights for Owner Group and Others e Owner Owner of file or
207. follow these steps 1 Go to Storage Manager gt LUN Backup Click Create a job 2 Select Create a LUN Snapshot and click Next 3 Select an iSCSI LUN on the NAS Only one snapshot can be created for each iSCSI LUN Click Next 4 Enter a name for the LUN snapshot or use the one generated by the NAS Select an iSCSI target where the LUN snapshot is mapped to Click Next The LUN snapshot must be mapped to another iSCSI target different from the original one 5 Specify the snapshot schedule and the snapshot duration and click Next The snapshot will be automatically removed when the snapshot duration is reached 6 The settings will be shown Enter a name for the job or use the one generated by the NAS Click Next 7 Click Finish to exit 8 The snapshot will be created immediately The status and duration will be shown on the list 9 Go to Storage Manager gt iSCSI Storage and the snapshot LUN will be shown in the iSCSI Target List Use iSCSI initiator software to connect to the iSCSI target and access the point in time data on the snapshot LUN Note The source LUN and snapshot LUN cannot be mounted on the same NAS or certain operating systems such as Windows 7 and Windows 2008 R2 In this case mount the LUN snapshot to a different NAS or server Managing LUN Backup Restore Snapshot by Command Line QNAP NAS users can execute or stop the iSCSI LUN backup restore or snapshot jobs on the NAS by co
208. ge pool usage information presented on this page users can manage their storage system more effectively and spot potential issues based on trends over a period of time from the last hour to the last year Select to view the storage usage rate of a particular volume or storage pool and specify the period Click Clear Record to reset the utilization graph 55 4 2 2 Storage Manage volumes storage pools hard disk drives snapshots encrypt and decrypt file systems and configure cache acceleration with Storage Manager Total Storage Poot 2 Volume LUN 2 m Cache Acceteration Snapshot Vault iscsi LUM Backup VIRTUAL DISK e Remote Disk External Device For details on the features refer to the following links Disks 57 Storage Spacel s Cache Acceleration se Snapshot Vaultls9 56 4 2 2 1 Disks This page is designed for users to monitor and manage hard disk drives installed on the NAS and its connected expansion enclosures and users can quickly isolate and identify hard drives for relevant maintenance tasks Managing NAS Hosts Click a NAS under NAS Host in the system component panel to check its general information Refer to the following table for actions available to manage a NAS host Action Description Click this button to check details of an enclosure including the Enclosure model serial number firmware version BUS type BIOS version CPU Info temperatu
209. gin screen template Select the preferred login screen style If you choose the classic login screen style you can click Preview at the bottom before applying your settings e Show firmware version Show the firmware version on the login page e Show the link bar Show hide shortcut links QNAP utilities myQNAPcloud portal site and Feedback on the login screen e Photo Wall This part of the settings is only for the Photo Wall style login screen Enter a personal message and choose to randomly select 100 photos stored on the NAS or display 100 photos that were recently shared Click Change Picture to set a picture for your profile photo on the photo wall Or user your profile picture Click Preview to preview the photo wall login screen or Apply to apply the settings To change the pictures shown on the photo wall check the Creating and managing albumb4 section After you finish the above settings click Preview to preview the chosen template or Apply to apply the chosen login screen 49 4 2 Storage Manager Based on QNAP s Flexible Volume Architecture the Storage Manager provides a secure flexible and comprehensive approach to manage data on your NAS and offers a number of great features such as storage pools multiple RAID groups thin provisioned volumes space reclamation and online capacity expansion These features can effectively protect your storage system and your valuable data System tnclowure 1 O
210. gned to convert the contents of an entire folder and within the folder the resolution of each subfolder can be specified independently Click Add to add a new folder and select the video quality resolution and the folder to add it to the task list 355 8 12 Video Station Video Station 2 3 is a video management tool used to organize videos on the NAS and to share them with friends and family across the Internet With Video Station you can classify videos into home videos movies TV shows or music videos for personal collections Smart collections can be set to automatically sort videos that match certain criteria and help you neatly manage your videos Video Station ia m j BB e o o fe Shared Videos ire K3 a 5 elected 1 Total 10 re avi Collection m Date taken 2013 11 30 10 Item s 2013 2013 11 30 16 0 x Smart Collection Recently Imported Ty Trash can Title j_41999 Classification Home Videos Type video x ms wmv Dimensions 320x240 File size 1 44 MB Modified date 2013 11 30 05 54 Date imported 2013 11 30 13 32 Date taken 2013 11 30 05 54 Duration 0 15 Save This chapter covers the following topics e Starting Video Stationl5e e Familiarizing yourself with Video Stations e Using Video StationbeA e Media Library and Privacy Settingske Starting Video Station Install and enable Video Station from the App Center for QTS 4 1 o
211. gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Add Hard Drive 4 Select hard disk drive s from the list to add to the chosen RAID group and click Apply 5 Please note that all data on the selected hard drive s will be erased Click Yes if you are certain about this 82 6 The chosen hard disk drive s are added to the selected RAID group Migrating RAID Configuration With this function a RAID configuration can be migrated to a different RAID configuration This option is supported for the following drive configurations Migrating single drives to RAID 1 Migrating RAID 1 to RAID 5 Migrating RAID 5 to RAID 6 Follow these steps to migrate a RAID configuration 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Double click a storage pool to bring up the Storage Pool Management page Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Migrate Select the hard disk drive s from the list and click Apply Please note that all data on the selected hard disk drive s will be erased Click ou BR U N Yes if you are certain about this 6 The chosen RAID configuration is migrated to the new one Configuring Spare Drives With this function a spare drive can be added to or removed froma RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration Unlike a global spare drive the drive in this case will be dedicated to t
212. hard disks The test result will be shown 59 Settings Configure the following settings on this page 1 Enable Temperature Alarm enable this option to set the temperature alarm When the hard disk temperature exceeds the specified threshold level the system will record an error message and 2 Rapid and complete test schedules schedule a rapid or complete test here The result of the latest test can be viewed on the Summary page Click APPLY to Selected HDD to apply the settings configured on this page only to the selected hard disk drive or APPLY to All HDDs to all hard disk drives Disk Health Global Settings You can enable the following Disk Health settings in the Global Setting dialog window the setting icon next to 2 on top right side of the screen e Activate Predictive SMART Migration With Predictive SMART Migration a warning message will pop up when an S M A R T error is detected on a hard disk drive indicating that the RAID group that the hard drive disk belongs to is likely to fail very soon The migration sequence will be initiated for that RAID group to ensure the availability of that RAID group The data from the disk with errors will be migrated to a healthy spare drive The migration process is much faster than the standard rebuilding process e Disk S M A R T polling time minutes This value is the interval the hard drive disks are scanned for S M A R T errors and the default is 10 minutes e TLER ERC t
213. he RAID group Follow these steps to configure a spare drive 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Double click a storage pool to bring up the Storage Pool Management page Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Configure Spare Drive Select the hard disk drive s to be configured as spare drive and click Apply Please note that all data on the selected hard disk drive s will be erased Click ou BR U N Yes if you are certain about this 6 The chosen disk drives are added as Spare drive Enabling Disabling Bitmap This function can reduce the rebuild time after a crash or the time length required to remove re add a hard disk This feature does not improve disk read write performance and may even cause slight performance degradation However if an array has a bitmap a hard disk can be removed and re added and only changes in blocks need to be made since the removal as recorded in the bitmap can be re synced To enable a bitmap follow these steps 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 83 2 Double click a storage pool to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Enable Bitmap and then OK To disable a bitmap 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Disable
214. he cache type Read Only or Read Write 4 Click Create 86 5 Please note that all data on the selected hard drive s will be erased Click OK if you are certain about this 6 An SSD cache volume will be created Note If SSD Cache is enabled with the Read Write type the SSD MUST NOT be removed while it is being used as this will cause data loss Removing SSD Volumes Follow the steps below to remove a SSD volume 1 Click Remove 2 Please note that all data on the selected hard drive s will be erased Click Yes if you are certain about this 3 The SSD volume will be removed This operation can take a prolonged period if the SSD Cache is in Read Write mode as all the data in the cache must be flushed to the hard drive first Expanding SSD Volumes Follow the steps below to expand a SSD volume 1 Click Add SSD Drive 2 Select the SSD drive s from the list and click Expand 3 Please note that all data on the selected hard drive s will be erased Click Yes if you are certain about this 4 The SSD volume will be expanded Configuring Volumes for SSD Cache Follow the steps below to configure volumes for a SSD cache 1 Click Cache Setting 2 Select or deselect a volume to enable disable the SSD cache choose whether or not to record large block sequential I O operations in the cache space and click Finish 3 The settings will be applied to the chosen volume Setting Space Reclam
215. he deleted file list right click on any file folder and select Hide Deleted Files Or access it from menu bar More Action gt Hide Deleted Files 215 Managing and setting version control To access the management and settings of version control click the Qsync button on the desktop of the NAS then click Version Control in the right side menu The target folder Enable version control is the main switch of the version control Disabling this option will not delete versions that have already been created Enable version for my Qsync folder allows each user to apply the function to their files Target folder for version control You can apply the version control to the files under specific Qsync folders to save space To assign specific folders select Assign specific subfolder under the Qsync folder then click Add to add folders You can add up to 5 folders Click Delete to remove all versions under the selected folders and subfolders This will not take effect until you click Apply or Apply All Advanced Maximum Number of Versions You can choose how many versions you want to retain This is a control only for administrators The more versions you keep the more storage space will be taken up To know how much space has been used for version control click Check in the Disk Used for Version Control section Note e If you reduce the maximum number of versions it will impact the versions that have been
216. he process of converting video files into an universal format MP4 that is compatible with the broadest range of media players such as mobile devices and Smart TVs Converted files with a range of resolutions can be used across different network environments for a better viewing experience After transcoding tasks are created they can be managed here The transcoding service is enabled by default On the fly Transcoding Task Background Transcoding Task Auto Transcoding Folder Transcode function provides video conversion for you to play videos smoothly from different devices You can convert a video through File Station Photo Station or Video Station Hardware accelerated transcoding None Current Status Transcoding Manually added first Unfinished File name i Duration Resolution Transcode Re_ Start Time Finish Time Time Used Statu Captain America 54 1920x816 360p 2015 08 03 the Expandables 2 1280x720 1080p On the fly Transcoding Task On the fly transcoding will simultaneously convert and stream a video while you watch it This will consume more CPU resources If your NAS has hardware transcoding acceleration it is recommended to install the CodexPack to increase transcoding speeds and reduce CPU load You are able to view and manage who is using on the fly transcoding services Manage transcoding tasks using the following buttons Button Name Description Refresh Refresh Refresh the list Manage each
217. he upload folder function of the File Station toolbar only folders that contain at least one file can be uploaded You can use drag amp drop to circumvent this limitation For Chrome multiple files and folders can be dragged amp dropped into File Station to upload them directly ARM based NAS models do not support using Cyrillic characters for the name of a subfolder in an ISO shared folder the name will be incorrectly displayed if a subfolder is created with a Cyrillic name Please name the subfolder with a different language before an ISO file is created For Mac OSX mounting a folder that contains the character in the folder name through WebDAV is not supported Please rename the folder before mounting it if necessary You can preview Microsoft Office files using File Station To do so or Mac OSX mounting a folder that contains the character in the folder name through WebDAV is not supported Please rename the folder before mounting it if necessary For View in Office Online and View in Google Docs please set your browser to allow pop ups and you will need a myQNAPcloud account Supported file formats doc docx xls xlsx ppt and pptx To stream media files to HDMI or Chromecast using the Network Media Player the Media Streaming Add On must first be installed in the App Center Only MP4 video files can be directly streamed if your NAS does not support On the fly Transcoding You can consider transcoding them into di
218. hen a system error event occurs send a SMS notification to the following phone number Up to two phone numbers can be specified to receive instant system alerts from the NAS Note The URL template text must follow the standard of the SMS service provider to receive the SMS alert propeny Push Service The push service lets you receive notification messages on your mobile devices if a warning or error event occurs allowing you to quickly receive first hand information from your NAS and instantly react to keep your data safe You must have Qmanager installed on your mobile devices to receive notifications Note You must have firmware QTS 4 2 0 with Qmanager iOS 1 8 0 Qmanager Android 2 1 0 or above Follow these steps to set up the push service 1 Log into myQNAPcloud using your QID 2 Choose the notification types that you want to receive warnings or errors 3 Install Qmanager on your mobile device Qmanager iOS 1 8 0 Android 2 1 0 or above 4 Log into the NAS using Qmanager and confirm to receive push notifications you can also disable this service in Qmanager gt click gt next to a NAS connection gt server settings page gt change push service properties 5 The NAS will send alert notifications to paired mobile devices when a warning or error event occurs 134 The paired devices will be listed in the Manage Paired Devices table You can disable or delete a paired device from the ta
219. hen be able to access NAS services from the Internet 326 e If more than two NAS are connected to one UPnP router please specify a different port for each NAS If the router does not support UPnP users must manually configure port forwarding on the router Please refer to these links e Application notes http www qnap com go notes html e FAQ http www qnap com faq e UPnP router compatibility list http www qnap con UPnP_Router_Compatibility_List My DDNS By enabling the myQNAPcloud DDNS service you can connect to the network services on your NAS by using your specified internet address To change your myQNAPcloud DDNS domain name click the here link on the page Your recent DDNS information will be shown here and you can click the Update button to refresh the result Cloud Portal With the Cloud Portal web based NAS services including File Station Web Server Photo Station Music Station Secure File Station Secure Web Server Secure Photo Station and Secure Music Station can be published to http www myqnapcloud com By enabling the NAS services here they will be opened for remote access even if they are not published Enable the myQNAPcloud DDNS service and the NAS will automatically notify the myQNAPcloud server if the WAN IP address of the NAS has changed To use the myQNAPcloud service make sure the NAS has been connected to a UPnP router and the Internet Note e The myQNAPcloud name of each QNAP NAS i
220. hese steps 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool 3 Click Create gt New iSCSI LUN Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the creation process For more details please refer to the iSCSI Storagel92 section 69 A volume is formatted by the file system to store share folders and files Users can manage monitor create or delete a logical volume on this page The following topics are covered in this chapter e Creating New Volumes 70 e Removing Volumes 71 e Expanding Volumes e Available Volume operations 7A e Configuring Alert Threshold 72 e Creating New Shared Folders 7 e SnapshotI72 e Encryption 75 Creating New Volumes 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Click Create gt New Volume to launch the volume creation wizard 3 Configure the mode for the volume from static single thick multiple and thin multiple according to your needs learn more about Thick or Thin Volumes in the following section and click Next 4 Select the enclosure unit hard disk drive s RAID type and hot spare disk for the volume to be created and click Next 5 Set the alert threshold and volume alias You can also click File system option to specify bytes per inode enable volume encryption and share folder creation And click Next 6 Confirm your settings and click Finish 7 Please note that all data on the selected hard
221. hoose any of the following authentication mechanisms from the Authentication menu to protect VPN client s password during authentication o MS CHAPv2 The password will be encrypted using Microsoft CHAP version 2 o MS CHAP The password will be encrypted using Microsoft CHAP version 1 o PAP The password will not be encrypted o CHAP The password will be encrypted using CHAP 5 If you choose MS CHAP or MS CHAPv2 go to the Encryption menu and select an option o None The VPN connection will not be encrypted o Medium AES 40 128 bit The VPN connection will be encrypted using a 40 bit or 128 bit key o High AES 256 bit The VPN connection will be encrypted using a 256 bit key the highest possible level 6 Tick the following checkboxes depending on your configurations o Use the default gateway on remote network This will allow all packets to be transferred via the VPN server o Allow other network devices to connect to the VPN through the NAS This will allow network devices on the same LAN as the NAS to connect to the same VPN o Reconnect when the VPN connection is lost This will automatically reconnect to the VPN server when the connection is lost 7 Select Connect to start Note If you check Use the default gateway on remote network the default gateway on your NAS will change to the VPN server s default gateway If you check Allow other network devices to connect to the VPN through the NAS the
222. humbnail size or zoom out to reduce the thumbnail size Switch between a white and black background color Play selected items as a slideshow and click the down arrow to choose the slideshow speed effect and background music Import videos or photos Download the selected photo or video You can also select the resolution of the photo to download if it is a video then the resolution chosen is for its thumbnail 339 1 Share Choose to share the selected items via email on social 7 networks or via link This will bring up Sharing Cart For details on Sharing Cart refer to the Sharing photos videos albums or smart albums 343 section in this chapter Multi Select Select multiple items at the same time Left Panel e Shared Photos List all photos and videos chronologically by their thumbnails except photos and videos in the home and Qsync folders and all photos and videos are only visible to authorized users e Folder Show the folders photo and video files contained in a folder on the NAS except photos and videos in the home and Qsync folders and all photos and videos are only visible to authorized users e Private Collection List all photos and videos located in the home folder and those multimedia files can be only viewed by yourself e Qsync List photos and videos synchronized from the Qsync service e Album List all virtual albums Note that all entries listed under an album are only
223. ices in different rooms over your home network 11 Smart File Filter Filter files based on conditions set by users and the conditions will apply to all folders 12 Refresh Refresh the current page 13 Settings Refresh the current page e Set to show hide files and folders on the local PC e Set to show hide hidden files 14 Help Review the online help and check the About information 15 Right Panel Show Hide the right panel Tip If you are using Google Chrome you can drag amp drop files from your PC to File Station However some computers may not be able to upload files that are larger than 1GB using this method due to their low performance When this happens please consider uploading using File Station 246 Left Panel Volume Every shared folder and folder on the NAS is listed here Depending on your NAS model the default shared folders are different and can include Download homes Multimedia Public Recordings USB and Web You can click next to a volume to create a shared folder on the volume Local folders Folders on your local PC are listed here The Java JRE must be installed to use this feature Favorites Bookmarked folders are listed here Qsync Folders or files synchronized from the Qsync service are listed here Share Link Links of files shared from the NAS are listed here Share with me Files and folders that have been shared to you from other NAS users a
224. ict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations 388 To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification m
225. ide on instant messengers or store for later use Complete required files domain name IP and link name choose to include SSL https in the URL and optionally set an expiration time and password in More settings To NAS users Choose to share with new or existing NAS users 255 o For new NAS users fill out account details username and password choose to allocate the quote choose whether to send an email notification and fill out message subject and content set domain name IP link name and password for the link decide whether to include SSL https in the URL and optionally set an expiration time and password in More settings Click Preview to preview the message or Share Now o For existing users select existing user account s choose whether to send a notification email to the user and fill out message subject and content set domain name IP link name and password for the link decide whether to include SSL https in the URL and optionally set an expiration time and password in More settings Click Preview to preview the message or Share Now For folders there will be an option Allow file upload to this folder in the dialog window for all four sharing options This feature is only for administrators and can allow link recipients to upload files to the folder pointed to by the link For the To NAS users option if you choose to share with new NAS users the system will create new user acc
226. iginal for videos you can choose to download the video file please choose Original or video thumbnail please choose small medium or large Share the photo or video image on social networks via email or link Play the photos videos in this album as a slideshow in full screen mode Check the Playing photos and videos as slideshowl34 section for more details Stream videos to compatible devices in different rooms over your home network Display file details property and description of the photo video 346 Miscellaneous Settings Full Screen Return to Photo Station Last Item Next Item Play Pause Seek Bar Hide Show Preview Bar Rewind Forward Preview Bar CC available when the item opened is a video Resolution available when the item opened is a video Volume available when the item opened is a video Set the currently displayed photo video image as QTS wallpaper View the photo or play the video in the full screen mode Close the photo video viewer and return to Photo Station Play the last next item Play the photo video as slideshow Control the playback progress Hide show the Preview Bar Rewind Forward the Preview Bar Preview the photos and choose which photos or videos to preview next Display and adjust subtitles e Switch the resolution for the played video Only available if your NAS model supports On the fly transcoding
227. igurations o Enable compressed VPN link This will compress data before transferring via VPN o Use the default gateway on remote network This will allow all packets to be transferred via the VPN server o Allow other network devices to connect to the VPN through the NAS This will allow network devices on the same LAN as the NAS to connect to the same VPN o Reconnect when the VPN connection is lost This will automatically reconnect to the VPN server when the connection is lost Click Connect to start o If you check Use the default gateway on remote network the default gateway on your NAS will change to the VPN server s default gateway o If you check Allow other network devices to connect to the VPN through the NAS please refer to the above tutorial for more details 276 7 12 VPN Server The NAS supports Virtual Private Network VPN service for users to access the NAS and resources on a private network from the Internet Set your NAS as a VPN server on this page sa VPN Server Settings VPN Client Management Connection List General Settings Select a network interface to connect to the desired network which the NAS belongs to You can forward the VPN ports on the router by Auto Router Configuration and also replace the WAN IP by myQNAPcloud name for connection Network interface Ethernet 1 v myQNAPcloud name tatehome myqnapcloud com PPTP Settings The PPTP server allows users to access the LAN remotely
228. igured in Syslog Server gt Server Settings gt Log Settings 268 7 9 TFTP Server Configure the NAS as a TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol server for configuration management of network devices and remote network booting of computers for system imaging or recovery TFTP is a file transfer protocol with the functionality of a very basic form of FTP TFTP does not provide user authentication and cannot be connected to using a standard FTP client Enable TFTP Server UDP port 69 You need to specify a root directory for the TFTP server Root directory MainDoc Enable TFTP logging The log file s will be saved in the selected folder If the size of a log file exceeds 1MB the file will be archived automatically Save log files in Mame_Rom Access right Read only Allow TFTP access from Anywhere Certain IP range only Follow these steps to use this feature 1 Select Enable TFTP Server 2 The default UDP port for file transfer is 69 and you should only change it if necessary 3 Specify a folder on the NAS as the root directory of the TFTP Server 4 Enable TFTP Logging Enable this option and specify the directory to save the TFTP log file opentftpd log It is recommended to view the log file using Microsoft Excel or WordPad on Windows OS or by TextEdit on Mac OS 5 Assign read only or full access to the clients 6 Restrict the TFTP client access by specifying the IP address range or select Anywhe
229. ile Station e LDAP authentication Connect the NAS to an LDAP directory The LDAP users can be authenticated by the NAS After connecting the NAS to an LDAP directory either the local NAS users or the LDAP users can be authenticated to access the NAS via Samba Microsoft Networking Both the local NAS users and LDAP users can access the NAS via the following protocols services o AFP o FTP o File Station 179 5 5 1 Joining NAS to Active Directory Windows Server 2003 2008 2012 Active Directory is a directory used in Windows environments to centrally store share and manage a network s information and resources It is a hierarchical data centre which centrally holds information for users user groups and the computers for secure access management The NAS supports Active Directory AD By joining the NAS to the Active Directory all the user accounts of the AD server will be automatically imported to the NAS AD users can use their same login details to access the NAS If you are using Active Directory with Windows Server 2008 R2 you must update the NAS firmware to at least 3 2 0 to join the NAS to the AD Joining the NAS to Active Directory Manually Follow the steps below to join the QNAP NAS to the Windows Active Directory 1 Login to the NAS as an administrator Go to System Settings gt General Settings gt Time Set the date and time of the NAS which must be consistent with the time of the AD server The maximum time d
230. ill allow the NTP server to periodically send broadcast packets with the IP address 255 255 255 255 Clients compatible with this mode can use this to synchronize their time e Multicast This will allow the NTP server to periodically send multicast packets Clients compatible with this mode can use this to synchronize their time Specify the multicast IP address after this option is enabled e Manycast This will allow the NTP server to listen for manycast requests from NTP clients and reply to the client requests received Specify the manycast address after this option is enabled Note For multicast and manycast modes the NTP clients will only receive this kind of packets after they are configured for the modes Please refer to their user manuals for setup details 263 7 7 RADIUS Server The NAS can be configured as a RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service server to provide centralized authentication authorization accounting management for computers to connect and use a network service Enable RADIUS Server Grant dial in access to System user accounts Note RADIUS server only supports PAP EAP TLS PAP and EAP TTLS PAP authentication schemes for system user accounts To use this feature follow these steps 1 Enable RADIUS Server on the NAS in RADIUS Server gt Server Settings Click Apply 2 Add RADIUS clients such as Wi Fi access points and VPN on the NAS in RADIUS Server gt R
231. ily and friends Learn more about the exciting features that a QNAP NAS offers you e Intuitive GUI with Multi Windows Multi Tasking Multi Application Multi Device access support e Cross platform data storage backup and sharing center e Revolutionary music photo and home video center e Personal cloud storage e Free and large capacity for Dropbox style data sync e Hundreds of install on demand applications from the App Center e Energy efficient amp eco friendly NAS for Business Efficiently optimize business IT infrastructure IT efficiency coupled with low total cost of ownership TCO is an essential factor for business competitiveness QNAP NAS features advanced capabilities for keeping businesses running at maximum efficiency including business critical applications seamless file sharing easy integration into existing networks flexible virtualized IT environments and more Learn more about the compelling features that a QNAP NAS offers your business e Large data storage backup and file sharing center e Supports both scale up and scale out solutions for growing data needs e Advanced storage management with dynamic thin provisioning SSD caching and JBOD expansion functions e Trustworthy data security and data encryption e Reliable IP SAN storage iSCSI as primary and secondary storage for virtualization environments e Private cloud storage e Free and large capacity for Dropbox style data sync e Hundreds o
232. ime Machine Size Size of this Time Machine backup Date Modified Last modified date of this Time Machine backup Delete Delete the selected Time Machine backup 227 7 2 2 Remote Replication This chapter covers the following topics NAS to NAS and Rsync 228 RTRR 230 Downloading Replication Job Logs 234 NAS to NAS and Rsync The NAS data can be backed up to a remote NAS or Rsync server using Rsync remote replication If the backup destination is a NAS go to Main Menu gt Backup Station gt Rsync Server and enable the remote NAS as an Rsync backup server 1 2 To create a replication job click Create a Replication Job Specify the server type NAS or Rsync server of the remote server Enter a job name Click Next Enter the IP address port number username and password to login to the remote server The default port number is 873 The login username must have read write access to the remote server and a sufficient quota limit on the server Click Test to verify the connection then click Apply Specify the local folder by clicking the Source folder box After expanding and locating the folder double click on it to set it as the directory where the data will be replicated from Specify the destination folder Destination folder box Locate the folder in the folder tree and double click on it to set it as the directory where the data will be replicated to And click Add to add th
233. imer seconds This option allows system administrators to configure the hard disk drive R W response time If you are not sure about the interval to set for the timer please leave it as is Managing Expansion Enclosures Note The function or its content is only applicable to some models including the TS 470 Pro 1S 470 TS 670 Pro TS 670 TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1679U RP TS EC879U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC1679U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP and SS EC2479U SAS RP TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 60 First click an expansion enclosure REXP in the system component panel to check its general information Refer to the following table for actions available to manage an expansion enclosure Enclosure Info Click this button to check on details of the chosen enclosure including the enclosure model serial number firmware version BUS type CPU temperature system temperature power status system fan speed and power fan speed Locate under Action Safely Detach under Action Update firmware under Action Rename enclosure under Action RAID Group Click this button and the chassis LEDs of the selected expansion enclosure will blink for easy identification Click this button to safely remove the enclosure
234. in to administrators files can only be recovered by administrators from the Network Recycle Bin enable or disable write only access on FTP connection folder encryption and synchronization a Folder Edit folder permissions and subfolder permissions Permissions H Refresh Refresh the shared folder details Folder Permissions Configure folder and subfolder permissions on the NAS To edit basic folder permissions locate a folder name in Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders and click Folder Permissions The folder name will be shown on the left and the users with configured access rights are shown in the panel You can also specify guest access rights on the bottom of the panel Click Add to select more users and user groups and specify their access rights to the folder Click Add to confirm Click Remove to remove any 168 configured permissions You can select multiple items by holding the Ctrl key and left clicking the mouse Click Apply to save the settings Subfolder Permissions The NAS supports subfolder permissions for secure management of the folders and subfolders You can specify read read write and deny access of individual user to each folder and subfolder To configure subfolder permissions follow the steps below 1 Go to Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders gt Advanced Permissions tab Select Enable Advanced Folder Permissions and click Apply 2 Go to Privilege Settings gt Shar
235. ing Duss function you Can Dackup the data on the local server to remote NAS ang also allow Backup from remote server to the local server For details on the features please refer to the following links e Backup Server 225 e Remote Replication k2 e Snapshot Replicak3s e Cloud Backupl238 e External Backupks 224 7 2 1 Backup Server Rsync Server Enable Rsync server to configure the NAS as a backup server for data backup froma remote Rsync server or NAS server The default port number for remote replication via Rsync is 873 Specify the maximum download rate for bandwidth control 0 means unlimited e Enable backup from a remote server to the local host Select this option to allow data backup from a remote server NAS to the local server NAS e Allow remote Rsync server to back up data to the NAS Select this option to allow data backup from an Rsync server to the local server NAS Enter the username and password to authenticate the Rsync server which attempts to back up data to the NAS Note You can only create up to 64 rsync jobs on the NAS RTRR Server To allow real time or schedule data replication from a remote server to a local NAS select Enable Real time Remote Replication Server You can specify the port number for remote replication The default port number is 8899 Specify the maximum upload and download rate for bandwidth control 0 means unlimited To only allow authenticated access to back
236. ing Surveillance Station Check Enable Surveillance Station under Settings and click the below links to directly login to the application Surveillance Station offers two free recording channel To add extra recording channels please purchase a license from the QNAP License Store http license qnap com or contact an authorized reseller in your region for details Note e The number of recording channels supported varies by NAS model Please refer to the QNAP License Store http license qnap com for more details before purchasing or activating a license on the NAS e The maximum number of recording channels supported is for reference only The actual recording performance may vary depending on the IP cameras video content network bandwidth recording settings and other applications running on the NAS Please contact an authorized reseller or camera vendors for more information e Fora step by step tutorial on adding extra channels please refer to https www gqnap con7i en trade_teach con_show php o0p showone amp cid 49 e Windows users are advised to use IE 10 Chrome or Firefox for live view and playback e Mac users are recommended to use the QNAP Surveillance Client for Mac for live view and playback operations QNAP Surveillance Client for Mac can be downloaded from http www qnap com download To check on license details switch to the License Management page 352 8 11 Transcode Management Transcoding is t
237. ings gt Global gt Download Schedule After enabling the download schedule select Full speed Turn off or Limited and then click the preferred time slots Sending a notification after a download task is complete Go to Settings gt Global gt Notification and enable Email Subscribing to and managing RSS feeds You can subscribe to RSS feeds using the Download Station and download the torrent files in the feeds 1 Click next to RSS on the left panel to add an RSS feed 2 Enter the URL and the label 3 To download a torrent file from an RSS feed select the file and click the down arrow button or right click the feed and select Download 4 The NAS will automatically download the file You can view the download status in the Downloading list 299 To manage the RSS subscriptions right click on an RSS feed label You can open the RSS Download Manager add update edit or delete an RSS feed Downloading torrent files using RSS Download Manager You can use the RSS Download Manager to create and manage filters to download particular torrent files for BT Download e To add a filter first launch the RSS Download Manager select a label and click Add e Enter the filter name and specify keywords to include and exclude e Select the RSS feed to apply the filter settings e You may also specify the quality of the video torrent files leave it as All if you do not need this function or the torr
238. ion When the NAS has started up you will be able to view the NAS name and IP address For first time installation the LCD panel shows the number of hard drives detected and the IP address You may select to configure the hard drives Number of Default disk hard drives configuratio Available disk configuration options detected n 1 Single Single 2 RAID 1 Single gt JBOD gt RAID 0 gt RAID 1 3 RAID 5 Single gt JBOD gt RAID 0 gt RAID 5 4 or above RAID 5 Single gt JBOD gt RAID 0 gt RAID 5 gt RAID 6 Press Select to choose the option and press Enter to confirm For example when you turn on the NAS with 5 hard drives installed the LCD panel shows You can press Select to browse more options for example RAID 6 Press Enter and the following message shows Press Select to select Yes to confirm 381 When you execute RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 configuration the system will initialize the hard drives create the RAID device format the RAID device and mount it as a volume on the NAS The progress will be shown on the LCD panel When it reaches 100 you can connect to the RAID volume for example create folders and upload files to the folders on the NAS In the meantime to make sure the stripes and blocks in all the RAID component devices are ready the NAS will execute RAID synchronization and the progress will be shown on Storage Manager gt Volume Management page The synchronizat
239. ion 2 1 2 Windows 7 If you are using a Windows 7 PC that is not a member of an Active Directory while your NAS is an AD domain member and its firmware version is earlier than v3 2 0 change your PC settings as shown below to allow your PC to connect to the NAS 1 Go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools 181 2 Click Local Security Policy 3 Go to Local Policies gt Security Options Select Network security LAN Manager authentication level 4 In Local Security Setting select Send LM amp NTLMv2 use NTLMv2 session security if negotiated from the list Then click OK Verifying the settings To verify that the NAS has successfully joined the Active Directory go to Privilege Settings gt Users and User Groups A list of users and user groups will be shown on the Domain Users and Domain Groups lists respectively If you have created new users or user groups in the domain you can click the reload button to add users and user group lists from the Active Directory to the NAS The user permission settings will be synchronized in real time with the domain controller 182 5 5 2 Connecting NAS to an LDAP Directory LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a directory that can store the information of every user and group in a centralized server Administrators can use LDAP to manage users in the LDAP directory and allow them to connect to multiple NAS with the same login details This feat
240. ion rate is around 30 60 MB s varies depending on the hard drive models system resource usage etc Note If a member drive of the RAID configuration was lost during the synchronization the RAID device will enter degraded mode The volume data is still accessible If you add a member drive to the device it will start to rebuild You can check the status on the Volume Management page To encrypt the disk volume select Yes when the LCD panel shows lt Encrypt Volume gt The default encryption password is admin To change the password login the NAS with an administrator account and change the settings in Storage Manager gt Encrypted File System When the configuration is finished the NAS name and IP address will be shown If the NAS fails to create the disk volume the following message will be shown This feature is not supported by TS 110 TS 119 TS 210 TS 219 TS 219P TS 410 TS 419P TS 410U TS 419U TS 119P TS 219P TS 419P TS 112 TS 212 TS 412 TS 419U TS 412U Data encryption functions may not be available in accordance to the legislative restrictions of some countries Viewing System Information on LCD Panel When the LCD panel shows the NAS name and IP address you can press Enter to go to 382 the Main Menu The Main Menu consists of the following items 1 TCP IP Physical disk Volume System Shut down Reboot Password Back oo N DUN KR UN T
241. ions may be available for your printer Click Continue 6 The new network printer is now available for printing 147 4 11 2 3 Mac OS 10 5 If you are using Mac OS X 10 5 follow these steps to configure the NAS printer function 1 Go to Network Services gt Win Mac MFS gt Microsoft Networking Enter a workgroup name for the NAS You will need this information later Go to Print amp Fax on your Mac Click to add a printer Select the NAS workgroup and find the printer name Enter the username and password to login the printer server on the NAS Select the printer driver N OO wo HR WN After installing the printer driver correctly you can start using the printer 148 4 11 2 4 Mac OS 10 4 If you are using Mac OS 10 4 follow these steps to configure the NAS printer function 1 On the toolbar click Go Utilities 2 Click Printer Setup Utility 3 Click Add 4 Hold the alt key and click More Printers 5 In the pop up window select Advanced and Windows Printer with SAMBA enter the printer name and the printer URI the format is smb NAS IP printer name The printer name is found on the Device Configuration gt USB Printer page select Generic for Printer Model and click Add 6 The printer appears on the printer list and is ready to use 149 4 11 2 5 Linux Ubuntu 10 10 If you are using Linux Ubuntu 10 10 follow these steps to configure the NAS prin
242. ired to enter the username and password specified here to access the target Check Mutual CHAP for two way authentication between the iSCSI target and the initiator The target authenticates the initiator using the first set of username and password The initiator authenticates the target using the Mutual CHAP settings For username and password limitation on both fields refer to the following o Use CHAP authentication Username limitation The only valid characters are 0 9 a z A Z and the maximum length is 256 characters Password limitation The only valid characters are 0 9 a z A Z and the maximum length 12 16 characters o Mutual CHAP 94 8 9 Username limitation The only valid characters are 0 9 a z A Z colon dot and dash and the maximum length 12 16 characters Password limitation The only valid characters are 0 9 a z A Z colon dot and dash and the maximum length 12 16 characters Choose the LUN type and LUN allocation method enter the name of the LUN and specify the LUN location disk volume on the NAS the capacity and alert threshold for the LUN Click Next Confirm the settings and click Next Click Finish 10 The target and LUN will both show up on the list Creating iSCSI targets Follow the steps below to create an iSCSI target 1 2 3 6 7 8 Click Create Select iSCSI Target only and click Next Only use Enable clustering acces
243. is available and allows preserving a certain amount of versions and also a smart version recycling to be able to retain backups longer time Gmail Backup Beta Gmail backup provides Gmail backup and recovery functionality allowing users to create individual backup or domain account backup tasks Gmail can be backed up by schedule and the content previewed through a web management interface Backed up mail can be restored to the original mail account or other accounts just configure the restore account enter the account and password and the user can restore mail to the specified account Container Station Beta Container Station integrates both LXC and Docker virtualization technologies This enables the use of multiple isolated Linux systems on the NAS We have also engineered one click download install and deployment of thin applications from the built in Docker Hub Registry to make virtualization easier than ever Virtualization Station Beta 376 Virtualization Station turns the NAS into an appliance server and allows you to install virtual machines VMs on the NAS with Windows Linux UNIX and Android operating systems It can increase the functionality of the NAS and be eco friendly by using VMs instead of physical servers With an easy to use interface you can centrally manage all of the VMs created on the NAS with minimal effort You can also access virtual machines remotely on PCs and mobile devices by using web brows
244. is pair of replication folders Click Backup frequency to configure the backup frequency Select to immediately replicate the data or to specify a backup schedule Specify the following options for remote replication jobs by clicking Options and click Apply o Enable encryption Select this option to execute encrypted remote replication Note that you must enable Allow SSH connection in Network Services gt Telnet SSH and specify the same port number for SSH and encrypted remote replication o Activate file compression Allows file compression during the data transfer process This option is recommended for low bandwidth environments or remote replication over WAN 228 o Perform incremental replication When this option is enabled after the first time replication the NAS will only back up files that have been changed since the last backup The files of the same name size and modified time will not be copied again Enabling this option is recommended for replication jobs that will be executed multiple times in order to shorten the backup time o Delete extra files on remote destination Select this option to synchronize the source data with the destination data one way synchronization Extra files on the destination will be deleted Source data will remain unchanged o Handle sparse files efficiently A sparse file is a type of computer file that contains large blocks of zero byte data Turning on this option may re
245. is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Modifications Any modifications made to this device that are not approved by QNAP Systems Inc may void the authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment FCC Class B Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant
246. ise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous 396 paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under
247. isparity tolerated is 5 minutes 2 Go to System Settings gt Network gt TCP IP Set the IP of the primary DNS server as the IP of the Active Directory server that contains the DNS service It must be the IP of the DNS server that is used for your Active Directory If you use an external DNS server you will not be able to join the domain 3 Go to Privilege Settings gt Domain Security Enable Active Directory authentication domain member and enter the AD domain information Note Enter a fully qualified AD domain name for example qnap test com The AD user entered here must have administrator access rights to the AD domain WINS Support If you are using a WINS server on the network and the workstation is configured to use that WINS server for name resolution you must set up the WINS server IP on the NAS use the specified WINS server Joining the NAS to Active Directory AD by Quick Configuration Wizard To join the NAS to an AD domain by the Quick Configuration Wizard follow these steps 1 Go to Privilege Settings gt Domain Security Select Active Directory authentication domain member and click Quick Configuration Wizard 2 Read the wizard introduction Click Next 180 3 Enter the domain name of the domain name service DNS The NetBIOS name will be automatically generated when you enter the domain name Specify the DNS server IP for domain resolution The IP must be the same as the D
248. ity RAID group name RAID type and disk member View Mode Switch to list view using the list view icon on top left of the page located In the list view you can show or filter for disks Set the filter from above the the drop down list to only show hard disks based on the device system enclosure or NAS they belong to model type HDD or SSD BUS component type capacity used type data free error spare cache or panel none and status Click Refresh to refresh the list You can also perform sequential read and IOPS read tests under Performance test schedule weekly sequential read tests and check the test results to gauge the performance of the tested disks HDD S M A R T Information Switch to the icon view or tree view and click the Disk Health button to bring up the Disk Health window First select the NAS Host or an expansion enclosure and one of its disks to check for S M A R T information Refer to the below table for descriptions of each field Field Description Summary This page provides an overview on hard disk S M A R T details and the result of the latest test Hard Disk This page shows hard disk details including disk model model Informatio number serial number disk capacity firmware version ATA version n and ATA standard SMART This page shows the results of the latest S M A R T test Informatio n Test Click on this tab to choose a rapid or complete S M A R T testing method for the
249. ize Copy a subfolder and paste it to another shared folder Share selected files folders via email social network by shared links or to other NAS users Refer to the Sharing filesl25 section for more details Open Office files stored on the NAS using Office Online The document will be first uploaded to Office Online and opened in a new browser tab You must first install and sign in to the myQNAPcloud App to use this function Open Office files stored on the NAS using Google Docs The document will be first uploaded to Office Online and opened in a new browser tab You must first install and sign in to the myQNAPcloud App to use this function 249 Open with Chrome Extension Streaming to Network Media Player Play Open Open with VLC Download Rename Move Delete Cut Paste Add to Transcode Beta Cancel Delete Transcoding Transcode Information Extract Preview and edit Microsoft Office files offline with a Chrome browser extension Chrome only and requires the Office Editing for Docs Sheets amp Slides Chrome extension to be installed Stream multimedia files videos music and photos to compatible devices in different rooms over your home network Launch the Media Viewer and play the selected item Open the file with a corresponding application on your PC If no such applications are available the file will be downloaded instead If the chosen file is a video file i
250. k volume is encrypted log into the NAS as an administrator Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space The encrypted disk volume will be shown on this page with a lock icon under Status The lock will be shown as opened if the encrypted volume is unlocked A disk volume without the lock icon under Status is not encrypted Behaviors of encrypted volumes upon system reboot An example is provided to illustrate the behavior of encrypted volumes upon system reboot In this example there are two encrypted disk volumes on the NAS e DataVoli is created with the option Save Encryption Key disabled 77 e DataVol2 is created with the option Save Encryption Key enabled Note For details on enabling or disabling the Save Encryption Key option please refer to the section on Encryption Key Management above After restarting the NAS check the volume status DataVoli is locked but DataVol2 is unlocked and mounted Since the encryption key is not saved on DataVoli the encryption password needs to be manually entered to unlock DataVoli Please remember that by saving the key on the NAS data will only be protected in case of stolen hard disk drives However there is still a risk of data breach if the entire NAS is stolen as the data is accessible after the NAS is restarted If the encryption key is not saved on the NAS the NAS will be protected against data breach even if the entire NAS were stolen The disadvantage is
251. l be overwritten e Handle sparse files efficiently A sparse file is a type of computer file that contains large blocks of zero byte data Turn on this option may reduce the time required for backup e Source and destination folders Specify the folder pairs for backup and click Add Maximum 9 folder pairs can be added e Options Click Options to set up notification of the backup jobs by email SMS or instant messaging IM e Unmount the front USB drive manually When enabled users can press the Copy button for about 8 10 seconds until the USB LED light turns off and remove the front USB drive from the NAS 242 e Enable the alarm buzzer o One short beep Backup has started o Two short beeps The front USB drive is being unmounted Data copy using front USB port The NAS supports instant data copy backup from USB devices to the NAS or vice versa using the one touch copy button To use this function follow these steps 1 Make sure a hard drive is installed and formatted on the NAS 2 Configure the behavior of the Copy button in Backup Station gt USB One Touch Copy 3 Connect the USB device to the front USB port of the NAS 4 Press the Copy button once The data will be copied according to your settings As an external storage drive When an external device is connected to the front USB port it will be identified as an external storage drive connected to the port 243 7 3 File Station File St
252. lation For users who already own a QNAP NAS and would like to move the data to a new QNAP NAS refer to Migrating from Old NASI29 for detailed instructions For New NAS Users Hardware Installation 1 gt Software Installation 19 Getting Utilities Connecting to the Shared Folders 25 Connecting to the NAS by Web Browser 28 a KR U N Be For Existing NAS Users e Migrating from Old NASPA 12 2 1 Hardware Installation After unpacking the NAS first follow these instructions to install your hardware 1 Install the hard drives Before doing so ensure the hard drives HDDs that you use are compatible with the NAS Go to the Hard Disk Drive Compatibility Listl14 section for more details 2 Connect the QNAP NAS to the same network as your PC and power it on During your installation process pay attention to LEDs and alarm buzzers to make sure that the NAS functions properly Go to the Checking System Statusl 15 section for more details Note The steps above are also illustrated in the Quick Installation Guide QIG that can be found in the product package or QNAP website http start qnap com 13 2 1 1 Hard Disk Drive Compatibility List This product works with 2 5 inch and 3 5 inch SATA hard disk drives and or solid state drives SSD from major hard drive brands For a full list of compatible drives check the compatibility list on the QNAP website http www qnap com compatibility 2 1 2
253. lder and select RECOVER e To permanently delete a file in the recycle bin right click on the file in the Recycle folder and select Del from recycle e To empty the recycle bin for an individual shared folder right click inside the recycle bin and select Empty Recycle Bin Restricting Access to Network Recycle Bin The Network Recycle Bin can be restricted to administrators usage by going to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders Click Property under Action for the shared folder to be configured and check Restrict the access of Recycle Bin to administrators only for now 206 207 6 7 Qsync Central Station Qsync Central Station 2 0 is a cloud based file synchronization service on the NAS Simply add files to your local Qsync folder and they will be available on your NAS and all its connected devices Quyne Central Stadon 20 5 Ni c Central Station 2 0 as oe 4 m n afiles oi lt a i Event tons a nidi Total Side Al Devicek 13 Teas Fok User Customization Mode Used sine 6 43 68 Onise Users EI shares Folders All Users 9 Online Devices 1 EJ Shared File inks A Version Centro gj Getting start with Qsync clients a Access files on mobile devices Manage Qsync files from browser ON F os Computer g a a 7 Favorites 4 d 7 F lt lt Share v Mo 1 o T Recycle bia To txt synchronizing files install Qaync Centon your Install Qile APP
254. le to reclaim the space with Space Reclaim and increase free space for storage pools With thin provisioning the volume space is fully utilized e A thick volume is usually more efficient for high frequency read write activities Because the space has been allocated for the volume the predicament of insufficient physical space can be avoided but the use of space is relatively inefficient Removing Volumes 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a volume to be removed to bring up the Volume Management page 3 Click Remove Click Apply and the selected volume is removed Expanding Volumes Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space Double click a volume to be expanded to bring up the Volume Management page Click Expand Volume KR U N e Enter the desired capacity or click Set to Max to allocate the maximum available space for the volume and click Apply Set to Max is only available for thick provisioned volumes 5 The capacity of the volume will be expanded 71 Available Volume Operations After you go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space click Actions and choose to configure the threshold and cache settings check the file system of a volume rename volume alias reclaim volume space create a new share folder format a volume or manage snapshots Note e All the data on a disk will be erased if it is formatted Plea
255. le to some models To check for applicable models please refer to the product comparison table on the QNAP 98 To use this feature click Add a Policy Enter the policy name and the initiator IQN assign the access right for each LUN created on the NAS and click Apply For descriptions on each field refer to the table below Field Description Read only The connected initiator can only read the data from the LUN Read Write The connected initiator has read and write access rights to the LUN Deny The LUN is invisible to the connected initiator Access If no LUN masking policy is specified for a connected iSCSI initiator the default policy will be applied The system default policy allows read and write access from all the connected iSCSI initiators Click the default policy and Edit to edit the default policy To delete a policy select a policy and click Delete Note Make sure at least one LUN has been created on the NAS before editing the default LUN policy Hint How do I find the initiator IQN Start the Microsoft iSCSI initiator and click General You can then find the IQN of the initiator Snapshot QNAP Snapshot can be used with iSCSI LUNs and volumes in a QNAP NAS to achieve full protection With the QNAP Snapshot Agent the NAS provides application consistent snapshots by capturing all data in memory and all transactions in process before performing the snapshot The application will then be
256. le with the file format used by the video e Some video formats may experience issues when streaming via DLNA Apple TV or Chromecast If any of these issues arise during video playback you can consider transcoding your videos into universally compatible media formats For more details on transcoding please refer to the Transcode Management bs5 chapter e Some media players do not support pausing during playback If this happens playback will continue even if you use the pause feature Manage Mode Menu Bar Name Gallery Manage Advanced Search Bar Network Media Player Refresh Background Task Settings Description Switch between Gallery mode or Manage mode Search for photos and videos by title date taken file size resolution camera brand color label rating description or tag Locate compatible devices in different rooms over your home network Refresh the current page Show pause or cancel Photo Station tasks such as uploading photos or videos to your NAS or Picasa Flickr Weibo or YouTube that are currently running in the background Configure Photo Station settings launch the Quick Start or show the Photo Station online help There are four settings e Content Filter Select shared folders as the content source of the Photo Station To add new shared folders as the content source go to Multimedia Management 313 e Social Network Binding bind with social networks for you
257. lect Back up an iSCSI LUN and click Next 3 Select the source LUN for backup If an online LUN is selected the NAS will 106 automatically create a point in time snapshot for the LUN 4 Specify the destination where the LUN will be backed up to The NAS supports LUN backup to a Linux share NFS a Windows share CIFS SMB and a local folder on the NAS Click Test to test the connection to the specified path Then click Next 5 Enter a name of the backup LUN image or use the one generated by the NAS Select the subfolder where the image file will be stored Select to use compression or not and click Next Use Compression When this option is enabled more CPU resources of the NAS will be used but the size of the backup LUN can be reduced The backup time may vary depending on the size of the iSCSI LUN 6 Specify the backup schedule choose the backup period Now Hourly Daily Weekly or Monthly and click Next 7 The settings will be shown Enter a name for the job or use the one generated by the NAS Click Next 8 Click Finish to exit 9 The backup job is shown on the list Refer to the table below for actions the Action button available to manage the backup jobs Action Description Edit Edit the job settings Delete Delete the job Start Start the job immediately Stop Stop the running job View Logs View the job status and logs Note To back up block based LUNs please use Snapshot and Snap
258. legacy ARM model you can still install MariaDB from the App Center Enable TCP IP Networking You can enable this option to configure MySQL server of the NAS as a database server of another web server in remote site through Internet connection If this option is disabled your MySQL server will only be configured as a local database server for the web server of the NAS After enabling remote connection assign a port for the remote connection service of the MySQL server The default port is 3306 After the first time installation of the NAS a phpMyAdmin folder is created in the Qweb Web network folder You can enter http NAS IP phpMyAdmin in the web browser to enter the phpMyAdmin page and manage the MySQL database Database Maintenance o Reset root password Reset the password of MySQL root as admin 261 o Re initialize database Delete all the data on the MySQL database 262 7 6 NTP Service A NTP Server allows the PCs servers and other network devices to synchronize their time with the same reference the NAS It is useful and sometimes required to keep the time synchronized for all devices in some environments J Enable NTP Server Operating Mode Broadcast Multicast Manycast App pp Setting up NTP Server To set up the NTP Server first go to Control Panel gt Applications gt NTP Service and check Enable NTP Server Select to check the following three operating modes e Broadcast This w
259. len Note e The function or its content is only applicable on some models e The encryption key cannot include dollar signs or equal signs 172 e Encrypted shared folders cannot be accessed via NFS e If a volume has been encrypted the shared folders on that volume can not be encrypted Encrypting and locking a shared folder To encrypt and lock a shared folder follow these steps 1 Enable folder encryption o When you create a folder tick Encryption under Folder Encryption enter a password and choose to save an encryption key o To encrypt an existing folder click Edit Properties under Action in Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders tick Encrypt this folder enter a password and choose to save encryption key 2 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders click Encryption Management under Action 3 Switch to Lock and click OK Encryption verification After a folder is locked that folder will be invisible in File Station If an encrypted shared folder is unlocked it will reappear in File Station Unlocking a shared folder To unlock an encrypted and locked shared folder go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders click Encryption Management under Action and enter the password or upload the encryption key file Encryption Management After the folder is encrypted click Encryption Management unde
260. les and subfolders Apply changed permissions settings except owner protection to all the files and subfolders within the selected folder The option Only the owner can delete the contents will not be applied to subfolders Apply and replace all existing permissions of this folder files and subfolders Select this option to override all previously configured permissions of the selected folder and its files and subfolders except owner protection The option Only the owner can delete the contents will not be applied to subfolders Sharing files To share files on the NAS using File Station right click on the files folders and select Share There are four sharing methods Via email Enter the required fields including mail server from NAS or local computer sender recipient subject message domain name IP and link name choose to include SSL https in the URL and optionally set an expiration time and password in More settings Finally preview the settings or directly share the file Note To share files folders using your own email account your email account must be set up in QTS Desktop gt Options gt E mail Account To social networks Enter the required fields including the social network to share the file post message domain name IP and link name choose to include SSL https in the URL and optionally set an expiration time and password in More settings Create share links only generate a link to prov
261. les in Multimedia folder on the server Enable iTunes Server After enabling this service click the following link to enter iTunes Web Server configuration page Username admin Password To use the iTunes Server enable this feature and then upload music files to the Qmultimedia Multimedia folder of the NAS To configure the iTunes server settings and add smart playlists login to the iTunes server web page http NAS IP 3689 index html Connect the PC and the NAS to the same LAN and run iTunes on the PC Find the NAS name under SHARED and music and playlists will be available Additional Reference e Setup iTunes Music Server on QNAP 314 8 6 Multimedia Management The Media Library service scans for photos music and videos from designated media folders and indexes them for usage in multimedia applications Thumbnails for the media files will be automatically generated to enhance your user experience as you browse through them in their corresponding applications You can manage the settings of the Media Library here The Media Library can scan multimedia files such as photos music and videos from designated media folders and index them Thumbnails of those multimedia files will be generated automatically to enhance your user experience as you browse through multimedia files in their corresponding applications Supported Services Photo Station Music Station ire Video Station DLNA Media Serve
262. ligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom 398 you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and condi
263. links to files This can effectively conserve your NAS storage space as you can keep only one copy of the photos even if you create an album for a special theme You can also right click on Album the category header to expand collapse the album list or add an album For album operations please refer to the section on Creating and managing albumsb4 below 340 e Smart Album List all smart albums Smart albums will only show photos or videos that match specific conditions chosen by users such as today in history random tag and all files and can save you effort in managing photos You can also right click on Smart Album the category header to expand collapse the smart album list or add an album For instructions on smart album operations please refer to the Creating and managing smart albums 344 section e Shared Center Show the photo and video sharing history You can check the name link expiration date and summary of each record and choose to re share the shared items You can also right click on Shared Center the category header to expand collapse the album list e Faces List albums containing photos with face tags Please refer to the Adding face tags to photos 349 section for more details e Recently Include recently imported within two months photos and videos from local device or taken within two months with a camera or recording device e Trash Can All deleted photos and videos can be found here and can be rest
264. listed Click Select a shared printer by name and then enter the address of the network printer The address is in the following format http NAS_IP 631 printers ServernamePR where the NAS_IP can also be a domain name address if you want to print remotely For example http 10 8 13 59 631 printers NASPR3 The wizard will prompt you for the correct printer driver You can also download the latest printer driver from the manufacturer s website if it is not built into Windows operating system After installing the correct printer driver the wizard shows the address and driver of the new network printer You can also set the network printer as the default printer or print a test page Click Finish to exit the wizard The new network printer is now available for printing 146 4 11 2 2 Mac OS 10 6 If you are using Mac OS 10 6 follow these steps to configure the NAS printer function 1 First make sure that Bonjour is enabled on the NAS in External Device gt USB Printer gt Settings You can change the Service Name to better represent the printer 2 On your Mac go to System Preferences and then click Print amp Fax 3 In the Print amp Fax window click to add a printer 4 The USB network printer will be listed via Bonjour Select the default printer driver or download and install the latest one from the printer manufacturer s website Click Add to add this printer 5 Additional opt
265. m the iOS or Android app stores 3 Setting up Qsync Client Launch the installer and follow these steps to set up the Qsync Client 1 To locate the NAS within a LAN simply click Search or key in its IP address or name e g IP address 10 8 1 20 or 192 168 1 100 To connect to a remote NAS over the Internet use your myQNAPcloud address e g andy myQNAPcloud com Enter the NAS login username and password Set up the Qsync local folder on your PC Assign a name to identify the local PC for the Qsync server Click Apply Pair a local folder with the shared folder on the NAS An on A UN Note If the NAS connection ports have been changed please append the port number to the IP address otherwise only enter an IP address Default port number 8080 Starting Qsync Client Double click the Qsync shortcut in Windows to open the Qsync local folder Click the Qsync Client icon on the taskbar to bring up the menu If you copy move files to the local Qsync folder on one of your devices the files will be synced with all the other devices devices with the Qsync Client installed that are connected to the NAS From now on there is no need to copy files back and forth between your PC and these other devices or worry about the size of files as you try to attach them to an email Synchronization 209 There are several methods for synchronizing files Qsync Central Station will automatically synchronize the file
266. m the list gt click Confirm To install the same certificate on another device log into the NAS as an administrator 329 go to myQNAPcloud gt SSL Certificate and click Release to release the certificate Then follow the same above steps to install that released myQNAPcloud SSL certificate on another device On the myQNAPcloud portal site you can review the transaction history in SSL Certificate gt Transaction record There are three transaction types e Apply The certificate has been installed e Release The certificate has been released from the device e Reissue The certificated has been reissued due to a DDNS name change e Extend The certificate s validity has been extended The system will remind you of the expiration date within 30 days of expiration Please renew your certificate before it expires To extend your certificate log into the myQNAPcloud website and go to SSL Certificate gt Certificate License myQNAPcloud Portal The myQNAPcloud portal www myqnapcloud com is an integrated web interface that allows you to e Manage and configure your myQNAPcloud account e Access NAS servers e Use published services from other NAS e Open links shared with you e Be notified of myQNAPcloud activities 330 myaQnaPcioud tLink Service a tate v My Devices 7 Shared folders Share links Access nt services evice detall QWER SE aa Download B towertest af a E O Anh BA a Modified yp
267. mber is 1024 The system keeps this fixed number of versions and automatically rotates stored versions 235 7 Click Backup frequency to configure the backup frequency Select to replicate the data immediately or specify the backup schedule 8 Specify other options as follows for the remote replication job by clicking the Options button and click OK after setup O Enable encryption Select this option to execute encrypted remote replication Note that you must enable Allow SSH connection in Network Services gt Telnet SSH and specify the same port number for SSH and encrypted remote replication Enable maximum transfer rate Enter the value to restrict maximum available bandwidth in KB s If it is not specified the bandwidth for this job is not limited Compress files during transmission Enable this option to allow file compression during the data transfer process This option is recommended for a low bandwidth environments or remote replication over WAN 9 Click OK If you select the Execute backup immediately option the replication task will start at once Otherwise it will be performed according to your schedule Note that the job is recursive Do not turn off the local NAS and the remote server when remote replication is running Ico b Name Enable and Start Stop View Edit Enable Disable Schedule Description Enable connection to a remote server Start a re
268. mbers can receive the file 1 Create user accounts in the NAS for each group member 2 Ensure that a Qsync Client is installed on each member s device 3 Right click on the folder you want to share in the local Qsync folder and click Share this folder as a team folder 4 Select users from the list of local or domain users All of the members in the group will receive a file sharing invitation Once accepted the group members can start accessing this shared folder Remote Access Accessing the NAS over the Internet To connect to a remote NAS over the Internet the administrator must first configure the device name for the NAS in myQNAPcloud The administrator can then share the myQNAPcloud address to allow users to access the remote NAS e g andy myQNAPcloud com Synchronizing photos and videos automatically Qsync Central Station can synchronize your photos and videos from mobile devices to the Qsync folder across all Qsync client devices Steps 1 Install Qfile on your mobile devices by following instructions outlined on the Qsync Central Station Overview page on the NAS or find it from your device s app store 2 Launch Offile 3 Click Settings on the bottom right side of the screen 4 Scroll down and look for Auto upload from photo gallery and click on Set up now 5 Select a NAS to upload photos and videos to 6 Select the folder 7 Select Use default setting Qsync Camera Uploads
269. med after the username If a shared folder of the same name has already existed the NAS will not create the folder 6 Specify the folder settings 7 You can view the new users created in the last step Click Finish to exit the wizard 8 Check that the users have been created 9 Check that the shared folders have been created for the users Importing Exporting Users You can import users to or export users from the NAS with this function Exporting users Follow the steps below to export users from the NAS 162 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Users Click Create gt Import Export Users Select the option Export user and user group settings KR U N BF Click Next to download and save the account setting file bin This file can be imported to another NAS for account setup Importing users Before importing users to the NAS make sure you have backed up the original users settings by exporting the users Follow these steps to import users to the NAS 1 Go to Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Users 2 Click Create gt Import Export Users 3 Select Import user and user group settings Select the option Overwrite duplicate users to overwrite existing users on the NAS Click Browse select the file txt csv bin which contains the users information and click Next to import the users 4 Click Finish after the users have been created
270. mmand line Follow the instructions below to use this feature 1 First make sure the iSCSI LUN backup restore or snapshot jobs have been created on the NAS in Storage Manager gt LUN Backup Connect to the NAS by an SSH utility such as Putty Login the NAS as an administrator Input the command lunbackup The command usage description will be shown uu BR WN Use the lunbackup command to start or stop an iSCSI LUN backup restore or snapshot job on the NAS Note The above procedure should only be carried out by administrators who are familiar with command line interfaces 109 4 2 4 Virtual Disk You can use this function to add iSCSI targets of other NAS or storage servers to the NAS as virtual disks for storage capacity expansion The NAS supports up to 8 virtual disks Supported file systems Format Ext3 Ext4 FAT NTFS and HFS Mount Ext3 Ext4 FAT NTFS and HFS To add a virtual disk to the NAS follow the steps below 1 Make sure an iSCSI target has been created Go to Storage Manager gt Remote Disk and click Add Virtual Disk Enter the target server IP and port number default 3260 Click Get Remote Disk and select a target from the target list If authentication is required enter the username and the password Select the options Data Digest and or Header Digest optional These are the parameters for which the iSCSI initiator is verified when it attempts to
271. models are not listed here visit http www qnap com for more details x86 based NAS TS x39 series TS x59 series TS x69 series TS 509 TS 809 TS 809 Pro TS 809U RP SS 439 Pro SS 839 Pro TS x59 Pro TS 879 Pro TS 1079 Pro TS 879U RP TS EC879U RP TS 1279U RP TS EC1279U RP ARM based NAS TS x10 TS x12 TS x19 series Follow these steps to create a replication job 1 Click Create a Replication Job 2 When the wizard shows up click Next 3 Select the synchronization locations and click Next Make sure the destination device has been formatted and folders have been created Two synchronization options are available one way synchronization and two way synchronization o For one way synchronization you can choose to Synchronize data froma local folder to a remote folder NAS or FTP server a Synchronize data froma remote folder NAS or FTP server to a local folder Synchronize data froma local folder to another local folder or an external drive o For two way synchronization you can choose to Synchronize data between the source and destination 4 Enter the IP address or host name Select the server type Windows Share CIFS SMB FTP server or NAS server with RTRR service enabled For two way synchronization only the NAS server is available o Remote replication to FTP server Specify the port number and if you want to enable FTP with SSL TLS Explicit for encrypted data transfer If the FTP server is b
272. my domain com Password Verify password Root DN cn admin dc my domain dc com Users base DN ou people dc my domain dc com Group base DN ou group dc my domain dc com Initialize LOAP database Delete all users and groups from the LDAP server Enable this NAS to be the client of the LDAP service in it Configuring LDAP Server Follow these instructions to configure the LDAP server 1 Enable LDAP Server Login to the NAS as admin Go to Applications gt LDAP Server and enable the LDAP server Enter the full LDAP domain name and the password for the LDAP server then click Apply 2 Create LDAP Users Under the Users tab click Create a User or Create Multiple Users or Batch Import Users Follow the wizard instructions to create LDAP users Once you have created the LDAP users the NAS can be joined to the domain You can set the permissions of LDAP users and allow them to be authenticated by the NAS 3 Join a NAS to LDAP Domain To allow LDAP users to connect to the NAS join the NAS to the LDAP domain Go to Privilege Settings gt Domain Security Select LDAP authentication and choose LDAP server of local NAS as the server type Then click Apply The NAS is now a client of the LDAP server To view the domain users or groups go to Privilege Settings gt Users or User Groups then select Domain Users or Domain Groups You can also set the folder permission for the domain users or groups 259 4 Join
273. n Microsoft ODX LUN Backup LUN Snapshot Block based LUN recommended Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported with VAAI or from Windows 2012 or 8 Supported Not Supported Yet Snapshot Replica is advised Supported File based LUN Legacy Supported Supported Supported Not Supported Supported Not Supported Not Supported Supported 1 Time Snapshot Please note that in general better system performance can be achieved through block based LUNs thus it is recommended to use block based LUNs whenever possible There are two methods a LUN can be allocated Thin Provisioning and Instant Allocation e Thin Provisioning Allocate the disk space in a flexible manner The disk space can be allocated to the target anytime regardless of the current storage capacity available on the NAS Over allocation is allowed as the storage capacity of the NAS can be expanded using online RAID capacity expansion e Instant Allocation Allocate the disk space to the LUN instantly This option guarantees the disk space assigned to the LUN but may require more time to create the LUN A maximum of 256 iSCSI targets and LUNs can be created For example if you create 100 targets on the NAS the maximum number of LUNs you can create is 156 Multiple LUNs can be created for each target However the maximum number of concurrent connections to the iSCSI targets supported by
274. n and a near real time search engine allowing users to quickly search through the entire NAS to find desired files as soon as possible The uniquely crafted QNAP TF IDF algorithm actively predicts your results as you type for lightning speed Media Streaming Add On Beta 377 The Media Streaming Add On is an add on for stations in QTS File Station Photo Station Music Station and Video Station that allows you to stream your media to different devices in different locations simultaneously using AirPlay DLNA Chromecast and HDMI connected devices With the advanced management of the DLNA Media Server you can also set advanced settings such as DLNA client control menu language and more Photo Station Extension Beta This Photo Station Extension App will enable the face detection and pdf album import features for your Photo Station You will be able to browse the imported pdf files as albums easily on other mobile devices L2TP IPsec VPN Service L2TP Layer Two Tunneling Protocol is a combination of the Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP and Layer 2 Forwarding L2F Compared to PPTP which only establishes a single tunnel between the two end points L2TP supports the use of multiple tunnels IPsec is often used to secure L2TP packets by providing confidentiality authentication and integrity checks The combination of these two protocols provides a high security VPN solution which is known as L2TP IPsec L2TP IPsec i
275. nabled Download Detailed Logs in Options gt Event Logs and executed at least one replication job 234 7 2 3 Snapshot Replica The Snapshot Replica allows you to replicate the volume LUNs between different remote servers using snapshot technology which provides a flexible and efficient backup service for IT professionals To use this function please enable the SSH server Control Panel gt Network Services gt Telnet SSH on the remote NAS first Note that you may also access this function via Storage Manager Storage Manager gt Storage Space gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Replica for volumes or Storage Manager gt iSCSI Storage gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Replica for LUNs Creating Replication Jobs Follow these steps to create a snapshot replication job 1 Click Create a Replication Job 2 Enter a name for this job 3 Click Settings to specify the settings for the remote server Enter the IP address username and password for the remote server Check Local site if the replication job is for your local NAS Note that the login account must have read write access to the remote server and sufficient quota limit on the server Click Test to verify the connection Then click OK 4 Select the local volume to take snapshot of by clicking the Source Volume LUN drop down list 5 Select the destination pool to store the snapshots in the Destination Pools box 6 Keep Snapshots The maximum nu
276. nagement 353 e Securityl25 e Hardwareli2a e Powerhs e Notificationhs e Firmware Updateha e Backup Restoreh3 e External Deviceh4 e System Statushs e System Logshs 46 4 1 General Settings Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt General Settings to configure basic settings of the NAS System Administration im Daylight Saving Time Codepage Password Strength Login Screen Server name Tatel21 You can change the default port number HTTP for Web Administration System port 8080 Enable secure connection HTTPS Port number 443 Force secure connection HTTPS only Note After enabling the Force secure connection HTTPS only option the Web Administration can only be connected via https Apply Topics covered in this chapter e System Adnministrationl4 e Timel42 e Daylight Saving Timel48 e Codepagel4s e Password Strengthl49 e Login Screen 49 System Administration e Basic Settings Enter the name of the NAS The NAS name supports maximum 14 characters and can be a combination of letters a z A Z numbers 0 9 and dash Space period or pure numbers are not allowed Enter a port number for system management The default port is 8080 The services which use this port include System Management Photo Station Music Station File Station and Download Station If you are not sure about this setting use the default port 47 number e Enable Secure Con
277. napshot was taken e Delete Select a snapshot and click Delete to delete that snapshot e Clone a snapshot This action allows you to clone a snapshot into a new volume or LUN To clone a snapshot first select a snapshot click Clone enter an alias for the new volume and select the folders to share after cloning If the snapshot cloned is a LUN snapshot you can map it to an iSCSI target e Set up snapshot schedules Click Schedule select Enable schedule specify the time frequency and retention period The system will take the chosen volume s snapshot by schedule For Smart Snapshot the system will only take a new snapshot if there are new changes made in the selected volume Snapshot Global Settings Click Global Settings in the top right of the Snapshot Manager window and there is one global setting e Make snapshot directory Recently Snapshot visible Mount a snapshot volume as a directory of a shared folder and set the snapshot volumes to be read only in File Station The snapshot directory will appear as Snapshot Click Global Settings in the top right of the Storage Manager window and there is one global setting e When reaching snapshot limitation Choose the policy to handle snapshots when the snapshot limitation is reached There are two choices 74 o Overwrite the oldest snapshot When the number of snapshots reaches the limitation 256 per LUN 1024 total the oldest snapshot will be deleted in
278. nc is a file synchronization service Simply add files to your designated sync folder s and those folders and files will be available on the NAS and all devices linked to it Download NetBak 373 The NetBak Replicator helps you easily back up files from a Windows PC to the NAS including entire disk drives documents pictures music videos fonts emails and more The operation is very simple You can carry out backup tasks in just a few clicks using by setting real time synchronization scheduled backup and auto backup from multiple PCs to the NAS NetBak Replicator also supports backing up to a remote server via FTP and WebDAV through the Internet Download Qget QGet is a powerful utility for download management The software is available for Windows and Mac computers allowing the management of BT HTTP and FTP download tasks of Download Station on multiple NAS QGet enables you to add remove and monitor BT download jobs from LAN or WAN You can manage your download tasks in school or at work QGet supports intuitive drag amp drop of torrent files HTTP or FTP URL to the software interface for convenient adding of download tasks Download vSphere Client plug in The NAS supports vSphere Client Plug in that allows managing VMware datastores on the NAS directly from the vSphere client console In a large scale server virtualization environment management is centralized and straightforward Administrators can easily con
279. nection SSL Allows users to connect to the NAS by HTTPS Enable secure connection SSL and enter the port number If the option Force secure connection SSL only is enabled users can only connect to the web administration page by HTTPS e Disable and hide the home multimedia features such as Photo Station Music Station Surveillance Station Download Station iTunes server and DLNA media server Multimedia features including Photo Station Music Station Video Station both 2 0 and 1 0 5 Surveillance Station Download Station DJ Station iTunes server Media Library and DLNA media server may be hidden or disabled by default on the following NAS models x70U x79 Pro x79U To enable the multimedia features for those models uncheck this option Time e Basic time settings Adjust the date time and time zone according to the location of the NAS If the settings are incorrect the following problems may occur o When using a web browser to connect to the NAS or save a file the display time of the action will be incorrect o The time of the event logs will be inconsistent with the actual time when an action occurs e Manual Setting To synchronize the time of the NAS with the computer time click Update now next to this option e Synchronize with an Internet time server automatically Enable this option to synchronize the date and time of the NAS automatically with an NTP Network Time Protocol server Enter the IP address or dom
280. nections 1 Click the Remote Connection button on the Menu Bar gt Create remote connection 2 Choose to connect to a remote storage via SMB CIFS FTP or WebDAV 3 Fill out necessary details including the protocol codepage hostname IP userame password destination folder and connection name and choose to enable support for multimedia playback and thumbnail display the system will generate thumbnails at the destination if the destination is another QNAP NAS it must have QTS 4 2 or above installed 4 Click Create Check recent connection records 1 Click the Remote Connection button on the Menu Bar gt Connection record 2 Review recent connection records and their details including the connection time connection name protocol Hostname IP port account username codepage and source path 3 To sort the records click on a header Check the current connection status 1 Click the Remote Connection button on the Menu Bar gt Current connection status 2 Review the status of the current connections records and their details including the connection time connection name protocol Hostname IP port account username codepage and source path 3 To sort records click on a header Note e For Remote Connection the maximum number of connections that can be created per NAS is 256 257 To share links by email the email server settings must be properly configured in System Settings g
281. network device can access the VPN via the NAS To enable this function you must 275 change the default gateway on that other device Using a Windows PC as an example 1 Go to Control Panel gt Network an Sharing Center gt Change adapter settings 2 Right click on the connection icon and choose Properties 3 4 Choose Use the following IP address and change the Default gateway to the IP Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP and click Properties address of the NAS that is operating the VPN Client service in this case it is 192 168 1 14 then click OK Connect a VPN server via OpenVPN The NAS also supports OpenVPN which is an open source solution for VPN services It protects a VPN s connection with the SSL TLS encrypting mechanism It is also available on Windows Mac OS X Linux Android and iOS To connect to a VPN server via OpenVPN follow these steps 1 Log into the NAS and go to Control Panel gt Application gt VPN Client gt click Add and choose OpenVPN to connect to a VPN server Enter the connection configuration settings including the profile name server address that you want to connect to and the username and password of the VPN server Choose the same configuration as the OpenVPN server in Server Port Click Certification to import the certificate ca crt exported from the OpenVPN server Tick the following checkboxes depending on your conf
282. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 6 1 2 Regulatory NOICE i esscevccewesteensi ai pemeeteen cadeue ed Laws TINA CERLE EATEN RTE eReader 8 LSI DOCUMENT AnnotatiO M yee ia we ee ate aie eh a keeles ene ea a a aide aie erence ee ee a 10 1 4 Safety Information and PreCautiOns cc ccecce cece eee eee eee eens eee ease ees 11 2 Getting Started ccccccsscecceenecenceeneeeneeneeenaeenaeenaeeneeenaeenaeeeaeeneeenaeenaeenaeenaeenaenns 12 2 1 Hardware Installations seriei iierideri riris se Eeter aas cae EN EIAS veces wes AAEE ASIEN 13 2 1 1 Hard Disk Drive Compatibility LiSt ssssssssssrrnrnsrnnrssrnrrsnrnrrnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 14 2 1 2 ChecCKING Systemi Stats irnir ati oblespasapeegsseesteineds pendesaeeldenadegdegeasesdvdnesteecdes 15 2 2 Software INSCAIACION ese eccccs ven rrinin di ai eS ees dae Coe G sales OOER Ea VEREA 19 2 2 1 Smart Installation Guide iina arinaa viedecdbaddabacoiesaasdddudasstatedae sideacuhaveduaas i 20 2 2 2 GIOUG Installation esaten ia uel gue cies cdeeeta hades evnbevh gach AETA TRAAK odes EEEREN adudesceass 21 23253 GDLINS CANAtlON rana e ob cine bedietar T a ued deveds Me v8ieG abt cdabveddvtas dane 22 22 4 HDMI Installations nen a a a eaa A aie 23 2 3 Getting UTICE esr trna Kaa cues cae ten ise ae oe tes lie cede Rissa ds EE va ddd ee dey tale ad PERM Ae 24 2 4 Connecting to NAS Shared FOIErS ccc cece ence eee eee enna eee eee enaaes 25 241 WINGOWS cir i a tania E RiR vedas aves ca OKERRA EA A
283. nstallation directory is C Program Files OpenVPN 3 Open OpenVPN as an administrator 4 Download the OpenVPN configuration file and certificate from the NAS Applications gt VPN Service gt VPN Server Settings gt OpenVPN Settings 5 Edit openvpn ovpn and replace OPENVPN_SERVER_IP with the OpenVPN server IP 6 Put ca crt and openvpn ovpn into the configuration folder under the OpenVPN configuration subdirectory C Program Files OpenVPN config Note If the OpenVPN client is running on Windows 7 add the firewall rules in the advanced settings of OpenVPN 279 OpenVPN on Linux 1 2 3 Download OpenVPN from http openvpn net index php Install the OpenVPN client on Linux Download the OpenVPN configuration file and certificate from the NAS Applications gt VPN Service gt VPN Server Settings gt OpenVPN Settings Edit openvpn ovpn and replace OPENVPN_SERVER_IP with the OpenVPN server IP 5 Put ca crt and openvpn ovpn into the configuration folder under the OpenVPN configuration subdirectory Run OpenVPN OpenVPN on Mac 1 Download the disk image of OpenVPN client from http code google com p tunnelblick Launch Tunnelblick Download the OpenVPN configuration file and certificate from the NAS Applications gt VPN Service gt VPN Server Settings gt OpenVPN Settings Edit openvpn ovpn and replace OPENVPN_SERVER_IP alfred myqnapnas
284. nt drives can leave a RAID array that still has at least single redundancy on all stripes With this option the RAID array can be functional even when encountering these issues when the RAID is rebuilding Note BBM support is only available for RAID 5 and RAID 6 Expanding RAID Group Capacity With this function RAID group capacity can be expanded by replacing hard disk drives in a RAID group array one by one This option is supported for the following RAID types RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 and RAID 10 Follow these steps to expand a RAID group 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Double click a storage pool to bring up the Storage Pool Management page 3 Select a RAID group and click Manage gt Expand Capacity 4 Select at least one hard disk drive After the description displays Please remove this drive remove the hard disk drive from the NAS or expansion enclosure 5 After the description displays You can replace this drive plug in the new hard disk drive to the drive slot Repeat the same process for all hard drives to be replaced Click Expand Capacity to continue 6 Click Yes 7 The chosen RAID group is expanded Adding Hard Disk Drives With this function new drive members can be added to a RAID group This option is supported for RAID 5 and RAID 6 drive configurations Follow these steps to add the hard disk drive s to a RAID group 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE
285. o to Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center Select Set up a new connection or network 2 Select Connect to a workplace and click Next 278 3 Select Use my Internet connection VPN 4 Enter the myQNAPcloud name or the WAN IP of the NAS and enter a name of the connection Then click Next 5 Enter your username and password which is added from the NAS for VPN access Click Connect PPTP on Mac OS X 10 7 1 Choose Apple menu gt System Preferences and click Network 2 Click Add at the bottom of the list and choose VPN as the interface 3 Choose the VPN type according to the NAS settings to connect Enter the service name 4 In Server Address enter the myQNAPcloud name or the WAN IP of the NAS In Account Name enter your username which is added from the NAS 5 Click Authentication Settings and enter the user authentication information given by the network administrator 6 After entering the user authentication information click OK and then click Connect PPTP on iOS 5 1 Go to Settings gt General gt Network select VPN 2 Select Add VPN Configuration 3 Select PPTP and enter the Description Server Account and Password for the connection 4 Return to Settings gt General gt Network gt VPN and enable VPN OpenVPN on Windows 1 Download OpenVPN from http openvpn net 2 Install the OpenVPN client on Windows The default i
286. of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the 391 requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to forma larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond
287. ogs in Options gt Event Logs and executed a backup job USB One Touch Copy Enable the USB one touch copy button to back up data from USB storage connected to the front panel USB port to the NAS or vice versa This feature is not supported by the TS 809U RP TS 879U RP TS EC879U RP TS 1279U RP and TS EC1279U RP Smart Import Beta When a USB device such as a camera is connected to the front USB port all of the photos and videos on the device will be automatically imported to the NAS without pressing the Copy button Imported files will be stored in SmartImport a newly created folder under the default backup directory During each import only new photos and videos will be imported to a new folder USB One Touch Copy For customized backup configuration please select USB One Touch Copy e Backup direction From the front USB drive to the NAS or vice versa e Backup method o Create directory A new directory will be created on the destination and the source data will be copied to this directory The new directory will be named as the backup date YYYYMMDD If there are two or more backups on the same day the directory will be named with YYYYMMDD 1 YYYYMMDD 2 and so on o Copy Back up data to the destination share If the same file exists the destination file will be overwritten o Synchronize Back up data to the destination share and clear the redundant files If the same file exists the destination file wil
288. older Compress and download the subfolder Rename the subfolder Move the subfolder to another location on the NAS Delete the subfolder Cut a subfolder and paste it to another shared folder Create transcode tasks for the files within the subfolder If you see certain resolution options disabled in the Add to Transcode Beta window it means the selected video files have already been transcoded into these resolutions Cancel Delete transcode tasks created for the subfolder Bring up the Transcode Task window for your review on transcode tasks 248 Add to Favorites Compress Zip Properties Bookmark the subfolder and it will appear under Favorites in the left panel Compress the subfolder Switch to open the right panel Tip For folders and files the shortcut keys are provided for quick file and folder operations Available shortcut keys include e Ctrl C Copy selected files folders e Ctrl V Paste selected files folders e Ctrl X Cut selected files folders e Ctri A Select all files folders e Del Delete selected files folders e F2 Rename the selected file folder e F5 Reload the current list File operations Right click on a file and choose to perform the following actions Action Sort By Copy Paste Share View in Office Online View in Google Docs Description Sort all the subfolders and files within the page by name modified date type or s
289. ommercially and only if you received the object code with such an 392 offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access froma designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed
290. omplete most NAS operations Check the following links to learn more about QTS e Introducing QTSI3 e Using QTS Desktops 36 3 1 Introducing QTS Built on a Linux foundation QTS is shaped from an optimized kernel to deliver high performance services that satisfy needs for file storage management backup multimedia applications surveillance and more The intuitive multi window and multi tasking QTS GUI make it incredibly easy to manage your NAS use its rich home applications enjoy multimedia and install more applications from an integrated App Center QTS also adds value to business applications and effectively increase business efficiency with abundant features including file sharing iSCSI virtualization backup privilege settings and more Coupled with various utilities and smart mobile apps QTS is the ultimate platform for building a personal or private cloud synchronizing data and g sharing files Q Je ars Utilities Click the above figure to learn more NAS for Home Easily enrich home entertainment and content sharing 37 Tons of photos music videos and documents are often scattered across multiple computers in modern homes QNAP NAS feature plenty of handy applications to let you smartly connect and manage your data and enjoy a truly digital life in a well secured home network No boundaries for multimedia sharing at home and no boundaries for sharing content with fam
291. on Music Station Video Station and DLNA Media Server as their content source content will be affected in those applications if new media folders are added or existing media folders are removed from the Media Library 367 9 Mobile Apps QNAP has introduced a list of mobile apps to help users access their NAS with their mobile devices The following are a list of benefits that QNAP mobile apps can bring you Automatically update photos from your phones on your trip When on vacation photos on your mobile device can be automatically uploaded to your NAS allowing you to focus on your photos instead of worrying about running out of space Easily share large files with friends and families Sharing huge files is extremely easy with QNAP mobile apps Share them whenever and wherever you want Browse files stored on your NAS Access your multimedia photos videos and music and office documents Word PDF or Excel stored on your NAS using your mobile device Manage services on your NAS with ease Check the status of your NAS or enable disable NAS application services remotely using your phone Topics covered in this chapter Qfile bed Qmanagerkead Qnotesked Qremotel378 Qmusic 74 Qvideob7 Qphotof7 Qget 37h Vmobilels7h Vcamb7 Qfile Qfile enables you to browse and manage the files on your NAS from your mobile device Manage multiple QNAP NAS in different locations conveniently from your mobile device
292. on The receive load balancing is achieved by ARP negotiation sent by the local system on their way out and overwrites the source hardware address with the unique hardware address of one of the Ethernet interfaces in the bond such that different peers use different hardware address for the server This mode provides load balancing and fault tolerance To connect to a Wi Fi network plug a USB wireless dongle into the NAS The NAS will detect a list of wireless access points You can connect the NAS to a Wi Fi network in two ways Method 1 Connecting to an existing Wi Fi network A list of Wi Fi access points with signal strength are displayed in Wi Fi Network Connection Resean pescan Search for wi Fi nenoaie i in range Secured The Wi Fi network requires a network key 118 Show all network Connect Edit Disconnect Remove Show all Connect to a Wi Fi network If a security key is required you will be prompted to enter the key Edit the connection information You can select to automatically connect to the Wi Fi network Disconnect from the Wi Fi network Delete the Wi Fi network profile Display all available Wi Fi networks Deselect this option to only show configured network profiles Click Rescan to search for available Wi Fi networks Select a Wi Fi network to connect to and click Connect Enter the security key if needed Click Next and the NAS will attem
293. on and then on Sharing History in the main menu Note To share files folders using your own email account first set your email account in QTS Desktop gt Options gt E mail Account Alternatively you can choose to bind your social network accounts and share videos with your Facebook friends To do so follow these steps 1 Go to Settings gt Social Network Binding 2 Check folders under Accessible Folder to share on social network sites 3 Select Bind with Facebook 4 You will be taken to your Facebook account to confirm that Video Station is authorized to retrieve your Facebook friend list 5 After successfully binding your Facebook friends can log into Video Station http NAS_IPorName video with their Facebook account to browse all of the authorized shared videos Video Operations Right click on a video and choose to perform an action from the table Operation Description Play Play the video online in the browser Open with VLC Play the video in a browser window with the VLC player please install the VLC plug in first Download Download the video Copy to Collection Copy the video to a collection 363 Set as Cover Add to Transcode Rotate Set the video thumbnail as the cover of a collection Convert the video to the following resolutions 240P 360P 480P SD 720P HD and 1080P Full HD Rotate the video 90 degrees clockwise or counter clockwise Add to Sharing Li
294. on at the main page of HybridDesk Station You can surf the web like using a web browser on your PC Surveillance Station Local Display Monitor IP cameras and playback recordings stored on the NAS YouTube Enjoy videos on YouTube via HybridDesk Station MyNAS Enter the local NAS administration web page to view the NAS functions and settings Configuring HybridDesk Station Configure the HybridDesk Station by choosing Settings at the HybridDesk Station portal and HybridDesk Station in QTS e HybridDesk Station portal o App Applications can be enabled or disabled here o Display Change the screen resolution and set up to turn off the screen after an amount of idle time o Preferences Here you may change the language or type of remote control and audio output The default setting is HDMI If there is an installed USB sound card you can choose that option in the NAS Audio Output e HybridDesk Station in QTS o Output resolution Change the resolution for the HybridDesk Station portal screen Before you change this setting please make sure that no apps are opened in the HybridDesk Station portal o Overscan This setting can reduce the visible area of a video displayed on the HybridDesk Station portal The higher the percentage the more the visible area will be reduced 306 Remote Control 307 308 Shortc ut Video Menu List Icon Search TV Out Setting Ss Red Home
295. on web page to view the NAS functions and settings o Surveillance Station Local Display An application that allows NAS devices to output high resolution video from IP cameras Note Using Kodi Chrome or other applications may affect the hard drive hibernation of the NAS Remember to exit the application and return to the HybridDesk Station portal To exit an application press the power button on the remote control for 6 seconds at any time Press the one touch copy button on the NAS for 6 seconds to restart the HybridDesk Station For the best HybridDesk Station experience we recommend using a NAS with at least 2GB memory To use the AirPlay function provided by Kodi we recommend using a NAS with at least 2GB memory The HybridDesk Station will restart when formatting an USB external device 303 e The first time Kodi is launched it will index the Multimedia shared folder and it may consume a lot of system resources if the folder contains a lot of multimedia files After installation choose your preferred language on the TV screen Then you will see the HybridDesk Station portal as shown here 4 Enjoying the HybridDesk Station At the HybridDesk Station portal simply choose the application you want to use to start enjoying the service Enjoy the comfort of your living room and play movies photos and music directly on your TV by XBMC or other applications Using HybridDesk Station Taking Pictures with
296. onent and 389 b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
297. or of the UPS Feature of the NAS section Please note that to protect your data once the power outage starts the NAS will automatically turn itself off or enter auto protection mode depending on your settings after 30 seconds regardless of the specified time for either of the above options if the remaining UPS battery charge is lt 15 In this chapter the following topics are covered e USB Modeshish o Standalone Mode USBIish o Standalone Mode SNMP is o Network Master Models o Network Slave Models e Behavior of the UPS Feature of the NASI53 USB Modes Standalone Mode USB To operate under USB standalone mode follow the steps below 1 Plug in the USB cable on the UPS to the NAS 2 Select the option Enable UPS Support 3 Choose between whether the NAS will shut down or enter auto protection mode after the AC power fails Specify the time in minutes that the NAS should wait before executing the option you have selected After the NAS enters auto protection mode the NAS resumes the previous operation status when the power restores 4 Click Apply All to confirm Standalone Mode SNMP To operate under SNMP standalone mode follow the steps below 1 Make sure the NAS is connected to the same physical network as the SNMP based UPS 151 ou BR U N Select the option Enable UPS Support Select APC UPS with SNMP management from the Protocol drop down menu Enter the IP address of the SNMP b
298. or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use 393 in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed
299. order to continue taking new snapshots for data protection o Stop making snapshot When the number of snapshots reaches the limitation 256 per LUN 1024 total no more new and scheduled snapshots will be taken until older snapshot are deleted This option will prevent the deletion of older snapshots without administrators consent Note The When reaching snapshot limitation setting uses the number of snapshots not the space used for snapshots For more details please refer to the Setting Snapshot Reservation section Encryption The disk volumes on the NAS can be encrypted with 256 bit AES encryption to protect against data breaches Encrypted disk volumes can only be mounted for normal read write access with an authorized password The encryption feature protects confidential data from unauthorized access even if the hard drives or the entire NAS were stolen Note The AES volume based encryption is applicable only to specific NAS models Please refer to the product comparison table for details Data encryption on QNAP NAS Users can manage encrypted disk volumes on the NAS Each encrypted disk volume is locked by a particular key The encrypted volume can be unlocked using the following methods e Encryption password Enter the encryption password to unlock the disk volume The default password is admin The password must be 8 16 characters long Symbols amp _ are Supported e Encry
300. ored or permanently deleted Only deleted files and not virtual links will show up in the trash can Using Photo Station Creating and managing albums There are two ways to create an album 1 Switch to the folder view in Manage mode right click on a folder and select Create New Album to turn that folder into an album 2 Drag amp drop photos or videos in Album on the left panel 341 3 Right click on Album on the left panel gt Add Album and specify to share the album with NAS users or with the public if an album is shared with the public photos in that album will be shown on the QTS login screen To manage albums right click on an album and choose to download remove rename share stream play as a slideshow open or configure its settings Creating and managing smart albums Similar to an album there are three ways to create smart albums 1 Switch to the folder view in Manage mode right click on a folder and you will see two smart album options Create a Smart Album and Convert subfolder to Smart Album Select Create a Smart Album to turn that folder into a collective smart album Select Convert subfolder to Smart Album and all the subfolders within that selected folder will become individual smart albums under Smart Album on the left panel 2 Drag amp drop photos or videos in Smart Album on the left panel 3 Right click Smart Album on the left panel gt Add Album and choose the
301. oring protects your data by automatically mirroring the contents of one disk to the second disk in the mirrored pair It provides protection in the event of a single disk failure The storage Capacity is equal to the capacity of the smallest single disk as the second disk drive is used to back up the first disk drive RAID 1 configuration is suitable for storing sensitive data on a corporate or personal level RAID 5 configurations are ideal for organizations running databases and other transaction based applications that require storage efficiency and data protection A minimum of 3 hard disks are required to create a RAID 5 group The total capacity of the RAID 5 group is equal to the size of the disk with the smallest capacity in the array times the number of hard disk 1 It is recommended though not required that only hard drives of the same brand and Capacity are used to establish the most efficient hard drive capacity In addition if your system contains four disk drives it is possible to use three drives to implement a RAID 5 data array with the fourth drive kept as a Spare disk In this configuration the system will automatically use the spare disk to rebuild the array in the event of a physical disk failure A RAID 5 configuration can survive one disk failure without losing any system functionality When a disk fails in RAID 5 the disk volume will operate in the degraded mode There is no more data protection at this stage
302. otocol routers Go to myQNAPcloud gt Auto Router Configuration to enable UPnP port forwarding and open the ports of the PPTP or OpenVPN service on the router 4 Register myQNAPcloud service You can connect to the NAS by WAN IP or myQNAPcloud name To configure myQNAPcloud service check the chapter on myQNAPcloud Service or visit myQNAPcloud https www myqnapcloud com 5 Add VPN users Go to Applications gt VPN Service gt VPN Client Management click Add VPN Users The local NAS users will be listed Select the users who are allowed to use the VPN service and their connection method PPTP OpenVPN or both Click Add o Connect to the private network by a VPN client Now you can use your VPN client to connect to the NAS via the VPN service Note The default NAS IP is 10 0 0 1 under PPTP VPN connection Upload the configuration file to the OpenVPN client every time the OpenVPN settings myQNAPcloud name or the secure certificate is changed To connect to the PPTP server on the Internet the PPTP passthrough options on some routers have to be opened PPTP uses only port TCP 1723 forward this port manually if your router does not support UPnP Additional Reference e You can add an extra layer of security to the VPN service by installing L2TP IPsec from the App Center Please refer to the NAS Add ons s74 chapter for details Third Party VPN Client Setup and Connection PPTP on Windows 7 1 G
303. ounts Also the email recipients or users you share files with can check files shared in File Station gt Share with me on the left panel after they log into the NAS Sharing NAS space Administrators can allocate space to NAS users and specify a storage quota in File Station by following these steps 1 Click Create the icon on the Menu Bar gt Share space with a user 2 Complete the required fields in the Create a User page 3 Enable the quote feature and set the quota size in Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Quote if you have not already done so 4 Specify the email optional and phone number optional for the user 5 Choose to send an email notification to the newly created user optional fill out the message details including mail server from NAS or local computer sender recipient subject message domain name IP and link name and choose to include SSL https in the URL 6 Click Create Remote Connection 256 The remote connection service allows you to easily manage files across local devices external devices cloud services and remote devices froma single interface You can easily carry out file management tasks such as copying and moving from remote to local devices or vice versa The remote connection service supports multiple cloud services such as Google Drive Dropbox and OneDrive and remote device network protocols such as CIFS SMB FTP and WebDAV Create remote con
304. p mkv mts tod trp miv m4v rmp4 divx flv rmvb and rm must be converted to MP4 Tips on file upload e The maximum size of an image file is 2GB e The maximum size of multiple files that can be uploaded at a time is 2GB 2 Launch Photo Station from the Main Menu Desktop shortcut or directly log into Photo Station by going to http NAS_Name_or_IP photo Note The admin login credentials of Photo Station is the same as that of the NAS administrator Familiarizing yourself with Photo Station 335 In Photo Station there are two modes that you can use Gallery mode and Manage mode Gallery mode is designed for a greater viewing experience while Manage mode is provided for easier photo and video management Gallery Mode Menu Bar Name Description Gallery Switch between Gallery mode and Manage mode Manage Advanced Search for photos and videos by title date taken file size Search Bar resolution camera brand color label rating description or tag Multi Select Select multiple items at the same time Network Locate compatible devices in different rooms over your home Media Player network Refresh Refresh the current page Background Show Photo Station tasks such as uploading photos videos Task to your NAS or Picasa Flickr Weibo or YouTube that are currently running in the background Settings Launch Quick Start and show the Photo Station online help Display Switch between thumbnail and
305. p it to a target for now in Step 4 The un mapped LUN will be created and listed under the un mapped iSCSI LUN list The description of each iSCSI target and LUN status is explained in the table below Item Status Description iSCSI target Ready The iSCSI target is ready but no initiator has connected to it yet Connected The iSCSI target has been connected by an initiator Disconnected The iSCSI target has been disconnected Offline The iSCSI target has been deactivated and cannot be connected by the initiator LUN Enabled The LUN is active for connection and is visible to authenticated initiators Disabled The LUN is inactive and is invisible to the initiators Refer to the table below for actions the Action button available to manage iSCSI targets and LUNs Action Description Deactivate Deactivate a ready or connected target Note that the connection from the initiators will be removed Activate Activate an offline target Modify Modify the target settings target alias CHAP information and 96 checksum settings Modify the LUN settings LUN allocation name disk volume directory etc Delete Delete an iSCSI target All the connections will be removed Disable Disable an LUN All the connections will be removed Enable Enable an LUN Un map Un map the LUN from the target Note that a LUN must first be disabled before it can be un mapped When clicking this button the LUN will be moved
306. ples of such activities are e Your friends have added your device as a favorite e Your friends have created a shared link for you e Your friends have shared their device with you To check myQNAPcloud activities follow these steps 1 Log into the myQNAPcloud portal site 2 Click Notifications on the left of the screen or the notification icon next to the device search box 333 8 9 Photo Station Photo Station 5 0 is an online photo album used to organize photos and videos on the NAS and to share them with friends and family across the Internet With Photo Station users can drag amp drop photos into virtual albums sparing them from having to tediously move copy files around and helping to save storage space as they only need one copy of their photos on the NAS when they create albums with special themes Smart albums can also be used to automatically collect content that matches search criteria and helps users to neatly manage their photos Photo Station X PhotoStation 5 Calley A a AD Shared Photos T ai a LE n BESPLATNO This chapter covers the following topics e Starting Photo Stationb34 e Familiarizing yourself with Photo Stationfs3 e Using Photo Station 4h e Media Library and Privacy Settingsk4 Starting Photo Station Depending on your NAS model Photo Station may be enabled by default and can be launched from the Desktop or the Main Menu If not install and enable it
307. plication job Stop a replication job View job status and logs clear logs Edit the settings of a replication job Enable or disable a scheduled replication job The system displays logs of all replications jobs at the bottom of the screen Click Clear all logs to clear job logs Deleting Replication Jobs 1 Select a replication job from the list 2 Click Delete 236 3 Click OK Options To change connection options click Options and specify the timeout period of the number of connection retries In case the password used for access to the remote server is changed you can click Change Password and click the edit button under Action to change the password used for that server 237 7 2 4 Cloud Backup Amazon S3 Amazon S3 Simple Storage Service is an online storage web service offered by AWS Amazon Web Services It provides a simple web service interface that can be used to store and retrieve data from anywhere on the web With Amazon S3 you can upload data from your NAS to Amazon S3 or download the data from Amazon S3 to your NAS You need to register an AWS account from http aws amazon com and pay for the service After signing up you need to create at least one bucket root folder on Amazon S3 using an Amazon S3 application We recommend the Mozilla Firefox add on S3Fox for beginners After setting up the Amazon S3 account follow these steps to back up or retrieve data from Amazon S3 u
308. process is complete the Add to QTS button will turn to the Open button and you can directly click this button to launch this newly installed app This newly installed app will then show up in My Apps Note e Make sure the NAS is connected to the Internet e QNAP is not responsible for troubleshooting any issues caused by open source software add ons Users are encouraged to visit the QNAP community forum or contact the creators of the open source software for solutions 290 To update an App click Update and click OK to confirm Alternatively you can click Update All on the menu bar to install all updates and Refresh to check for the latest updates The button will turn to Open to signify that the update is complete To remove an App click an installed App to open its introduction page Click Remove on the page to uninstall it from the NAS and click OK to confirm Offline Installation To install apps when the NAS is offline or to install beta apps that are not officially available on the QNAP App Center users can download the application qpkg from the QNAP website http www qnap com go qpkg html or forum http forum qnap com unzip the files and click Install Manually on the menu bar to install the Apps manually 8 2 DLNA Media Server The NAS supports two types of DLNA Media Servers QNAP DLNA Media Server and Twonky Media DLNA Server W Enable DLNA Media Server Beta Se
309. ps refer to the following links e Storage Poolsl6 e Volumes e RAID Groups 7 63 A storage pool is designed to aggregate physical hard disk drives into a large storage space and to provide enhanced RAID protection for it You can perform the following actions to manage storage pools e Creating New Storage Pools 64 e Removing Storage Pools 5 e Safely Detaching Storage Pools 65 e Expanding Storage Pools e Setting a Thresholds e Setting Snapshot Reservation 7 e Creating New Volumes for Storage Pools es e Creating New iSCSI LUNs for Storage Poolsl s Creating New Storage Pools Follow these steps to create a new storage pool 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 2 Click Create gt New Storage Pool 64 3 Select the enclosure unit hard disk drive s RAID type and hot spare disk and click Create 4 Set the percentage of storage spool space that is reserved to store snapshots 5 Please note that all data on the selected hard disk drive s will be erased Click OK if you are certain about this 6 A new storage pool will be created Removing Storage Pools Follow these steps to remove a storage pool e Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space e Double click a storage pool to be removed to bring up the Storage Pool Management page e Click Remove gt Remove Pool e Click Apply e The selected storage pool will be removed
310. pt to connect to the wireless network You can view the status of the configured network profiles Message Connected Connecting Out of range or hidden SSID Failed to get IP Association failed Incorrect key Auto connect Description The NAS is currently connected to the Wi Fi network The NAS is trying to connect to the Wi Fi network The wireless signal is not available or the SSID is not broadcast The NAS is connected to the Wi Fi network but could not get an IP address from the DHCP server Check the router settings The NAS cannot connect to the Wi Fi network Check the router settings The entered security key is incorrect Automatically connect to the Wi Fi network This is not supported if the SSID of the Wi Fi network is not broadcast 119 Method 2 Manually connecting to a Wi Fi network To manually connect to a Wi Fi network that does not broadcast its SSID network name click Connect to a Wi Fi network You can choose to connect to an ad hoc network in which you can connect to any wireless devices without the need for an access point To set up follow these steps 1 Enter the network name SSID of the wireless network and select the security type o No authentication Open No security key required o WEP Enter up to 4 WEP keys and choose 1 key to be used for authentication o WPA Personal Choose AES or TKIP encryption and enter the encryption key o WPA2 Personal Enter a s
311. ption key file Upload the encryption key file to the NAS to unlock the disk volume The key can be downloaded from the Encryption page after the disk volume is successfully unlocked Before you start Please remember the following before using the data encryption feature of the NAS 75 The volume encryption feature of the NAS is volume based A volume can be a single disk a JBOD configuration or a RAID array To only encrypt a shared folder please refer to the Shared Folderlte chapter Select whether or not to encrypt a disk volume before it is created on the NAS A volume cannot be encrypted after it is created unless the disk volume is initialized Note that initializing a disk volume will clear all data on the disks Disk volume encryption cannot be removed without initialization To remove encryption on the disk volume the disk volume must be initialized and all the data will be cleared Keep the encryption password or key safe If the password is forgotten or the encryption key is lost the data cannot be accessed and cannot be recovered Before starting read the instructions carefully and strictly adhere to them Note Data encryption functions may be unavailable in accordance to the legislative restrictions of some countries ex Russia Belarus Ukraine Kazakhstan and Uzbekistan Creating new encrypted disk volumes 1 Log into the NAS as an administrator Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage
312. r Media Library e Scan Setting Three options are provided for the media scan o Real time scan New files are scanned in as soon as they are added to media folders o Scan by schedule Specify a start and end time for the scan and it will be automatically conducted on a daily basis o Manual Scan You must click Scan now to check for new media e Set media scanning priority to high The option will allow the media library to immediately process media files in order to quickly generate thumbnails When the NAS needs to run scan tasks and transfer files at the same time it will lower the file transfer speed and prioritize media scan tasks e Multimedia code page setting Change this setting to the corresponding code for non UTF media files for fonts and characters in the associated applications to be displayed correctly e Rebuild media library indexing By rebuilding the media library the NAS will scan the 315 specified media folders and replace the existing library with a new one The media library is enabled by default In some cases the media library needs to be disabled when multimedia applications are not installed on the NAS To disable the media library click Deactivate Media Library If the media library is not enabled services like Photo Station Video Station and Music Station as well as the DLNA Media Server will not function correctly To re enable the media library click Activate Media Library Me
313. r Action in Control Panel gt Privilege Settings gt Shared Folders to edit encryption settings e To save the encryption key select the Download tab and enter the encryption password to export the key e You can choose to automatically mount the encrypted folder by selecting Mount automatically on start up in the Save tab Enter the encryption key to mount the folder automatically for access This option will be automatically enabled if the Save encryption key is checked when encrypting the folder Folders that do not have this option enabled will be locked after the system restarts e To prevent access to the encrypted folder enable the lock function in the Lock tab Select Forget the saved key if you want the folder to remain locked after the 173 system restarts i e without auto mount when system starts To unlock the folder later click Unlock Share Folder and then enter or import the encryption key to unlock the folder ISO Shared Folders You can mount ISO image files on the NAS as ISO shares The NAS supports mounting up to 256 ISO shares TS 110 TS 119 TS 120 TS 121 TS 210 TS 219 TS 219P TS 220 TS 221 TS 410 TS 119P TS 219P TS 112 TS 212 support up to 256 network shares only including 6 default network shares The maximum number of ISO image files supported by these models is less than 256 256 minus 6 default shares minus number of network recycle bin folders Follow these st
314. r friends to log into the Photo Station and browse shared albums e Backup Restore Export or import a configuration file of all albums and smart albums for their configuration backup and restoration e Miscellaneous o Always ask me to enter my password when accessing Private Collection Photo Station will prompt users for a password every time they try to access the Private Collection o Select a shared folder as the default folder to store photos uploaded to Shared Photos Set a default shared folder to store uploaded photos 338 Browsing Mode Timeline Sort Add Album Photo Video Filter Zoom in Zoom out Background Color Slideshow Import Download o Automatically create matching album An album with the same name you specified in the file upload process will be automatically created under Album on the left panel after you upload photos If this is disabled only the physical folder will be created under your designated upload shared folder o Always start in Manage mode Check this option to always start Photo Station in Manage mode Switch between different browsing modes thumbnail browsing mode list browsing mode timeline browsing mode and folder browsing mode to browse photos and videos Show Hide the timeline Sort items chronologically in an ascending or descending order Create an album or smart album Display either photos or videos or both Zoom in to enlarge the t
315. r covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the 397 patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of th
316. r later and follow these steps 1 Upload videos to a shared folder on the NAS You can upload videos to the NAS in 3 different ways 1 Install Qfinder on your PC or Mac set up a network drive and upload files to your preferred shared folders For details on setting up a network drive please Connecting to NAS Shared Folders 251 2 Click Shared Videos or Private Collection on the left panel and Import up arrow on the main menu to import videos from the local PC A new shared folder with the date that files are 356 uploaded will be created on the NAS to store uploaded files for Shared Videos this newly created shared folder is located under the multimedia folder for Private Collection this shared folder is located under the home folder A corresponding collection will be created under Video Collection as well 3 Switch to folder view browsing mode and drag amp drop videos to a preferred folder With the first and third approach you can choose which folder on the NAS that you want to upload videos to Tips on file upload e The maximum size of an image file is 2GB e The maximum size of multiple files that can be uploaded at one time is 2GB 2 Launch Video Station from the Main Menu Desktop shortcut or directly log into Video Station by going to http NAS_Name_or_IP video Familiarizing yourself with Video Station cme asses E a T Left Panel Hide Show the left panel
317. re system temperature power status system fan speed and power fan speed Locate Click this button and the chassis LEDs of the selected NAS host will under blink for easy identification Action RAID Click this button and select a RAID group to check its details Group including capacity RAID group name RAID type and disk member Managing Disks Click beside the NAS host in the system component panel and select a disk to check its general information The legend shown under the system component panel is provided to indicate the types of hard disk drives e Cache A disk drive configured as cache e Data A disk drive that contains data e Free An empty disk drive that does not have any data on it e Spare A disk drive configured as spare drive for a RAID group e Error A disk drive detected with errors could be bad sectors or I O errors and it is recommended that this disk drive is to be replaced immediately 57 e Warning A disk drive is approaching failure Refer to the following table for actions available to manage a disk Action Disk Info Disk Health Scan Now under Action Locate under Action Set as Enclosure Spare under Action Disable Spare under Action New Volume Description Click this button to check details of a disk including the model model number serial number capacity firmware version ATA version and ATA standard Click this button to check
318. re to allow any TFTP client access 7 Click Apply Note To set up PXE with your NAS please use a static IP for your NAS enable its 269 270 7 10 Virtualization QNAP business class Turbo NAS is a virtualization ready storage solution designed to optimize your virtualization operations In addition to the support for VMware vSphere Microsoft Hyper V and Citrix XenServer this storage solution includes the cutting edge VAAI for iSCSI VAAI for NAS and ODX Offloaded Data Transfer technologies to offload the heavy duty file operations from the servers and flexible volume management approaches such as Thin Provisioning and Space Reclaim to manage your volumes more effectively To double system performance QNAP offers a number of network accessories that support 10Gbe transmission speeds and the SSD Cache feature that capitalizes on SSD technologies Besides the remarkable QNAP vSphere Client and QNAP SMI S Provider are available to increase management productivity and efficiency Note Each feature mentioned in this chapter is applicable only to specific models Please refer to each respective section for supported models Server Virtualization The Turbo NAS supports three types of server virtualization applications VMware vSphere Microsoft Hyper V and Citrix XenServer For details on each of the solutions and supported models check here VAAI for iSCSI and VAAI for NAS The Turbo NAS supports VMware VAAI vS
319. re listed here Recycle Bin Deleted files or folders can be found here Right click on deleted items in the recycle bin to permanently delete or recover them Right Panel Properties Click this tab to review file and folder details click Calculate Size to calculate the size of a folder set the media type for the folder and configure auto transcoding settings for the folder Permission Click this tab to configure shared folder permissions For steps on setting folder permissions please refer to the below Set file folder level permission section Using File Station 247 Creating shared folders To create a shared folder click next to a volume specify the folder name folder description disk volume user access privileges and advanced settings in the shared folder creation dialog window and click Create Subfolder operations Right click on a subfolder and choose to perform the following actions Action Sort By Create folder Copy Paste Share Open Download Rename Move Delete Cut Paste Add to Transcode Beta Cancel Delete Transcoding Transcode Information Description Sort all the subfolders and files within the page by name modified date type or size Create a subfolder Copy a subfolder and paste it into another shared folder e Share the selected folder via email e Publish the selected folder on social networks e Set sharing details Enter the chosen subf
320. ress so that the remote computer is able to connect to the FTP server 201 6 3 Telnet SSH Enable this option to connect to the NAS by Telnet or SSH encrypted connection only the admin account can remotely login Use Telnet or SSH connection clients for example putty for connecting Make sure the specified ports have been opened on the router or firewall After enabling this option you can access this server via Telnet or SSH connection Note Only the account admin can login remotely Allow Telnet connection Port number 13131 fi Allow SSH connection Port number 22 Enable SFTP To use SFTP SSH File Transfer Protocol Secure File Transfer Protocol make sure the option Allow SSH connection has been enabled 202 6 4 SNMP Settings Enable SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol on the NAS and enter the trap address of the SNMP management stations SNMP manager for example a PC with SNMP software installed When an event warning or error occurs on the NAS it will report a real time alert to SNMP management stations SNMP After enabling this service the NAS will be able to report information via SNMP to the managing systems Enable SNMP service Port number 161 SNMP trap Level Information Warning Error SNMP version SNMP V1 V2 Community public SNMP MIB The fields are described as below Field Description SNMP Trap Level Select information to be sent to the SNMP managemen
321. rn More and choose to download and install the utilities on your PC For introductions related to computer utilities refer to the Computer Utilitiesls73 chapter Method 2 Installing from the product CD ROM If the NAS contains a CD ROM then it will contain QNAP Qfinder myQNAPcloud Connect and NetBak Replicator Browse the CD ROM and access the following contents e Quick Installation Guide View the NAS hardware installation instructions e Install QNAP Qfinder This will install QNAP Qfinder for Windows e Install myQNAPcloud Connect This will install myQNAPcloud Connect for Windows e Install NetBak Replicator This will install NetBak Replicator a backup utility for Windows e User Manual and Application Notes Instructions for installing and using the NAS 24 2 4 Connecting to NAS Shared Folders After installing the hardware and software it is time to connect to the shared folders on the NAS Refer to these links for the connection setup e Connecting to NAS shared folders in Windows 2e e Connecting to NAS shared folders in Mac or Linux 27 25 2 4 1 Windows There are two methods for connecting to shared folders of the NAS when using Windows Method 1 Connect to the shared folders of the NAS by using the QNAP Qfinder 1 Launch QNAP Qfinder Select your NAS and then click Tool gt Map Network Drive 2 Select a shared folder on the NAS to be mapped as a network drive and click Map Network Drive 3 En
322. roid iPhone BlackBerry or Authenticator Windows Phone 43 Start 2 step verification 1 Install the authenticator App on your mobile device For Android and iOS devices install the Google Authenticator App from their respective App stores For Windows Phone install the Authenticator from its Store 2 The system times of your mobile device and NAS must be synchronized It is recommended to use the time provided from the Internet 3 Go to Options gt 2 step Verification and click Get Started Complete the steps in the wizard to set up the NAS and your mobile device 4 Configure your authenticator App by scanning the QR code or by entering the Secret Key into the App 5 Enter the code generated from the app to the NAS to verify the correct configuration 6 Select an alternative verification method by emailing you a security code or by answering a security question if you cannot use your mobile device To email a security code the SMTP server must be properly configured in Control Panel gt Notification gt E mail Sign in QTS with 2 step verification After your username and password are verified you will be promoted to enter a security code Enter the code currently provided from the authenticator app to sign in to QTS If you cannot use your mobile device or your device is lost you can select Verify another way to sign in with your chosen alternative verification method Stop 2 step verification If you w
323. rom Qfile the name of the device will be shown as Qfile Android or Qfile iPhone c If users move or copy files to the Qsync folder in the File Station the name of the device will be shown as Qsync File Station 5 Event Logs Lists activity details by user Team Folder Lists information about team folders including folders that you shared and folders that are shared with you Shared Folder Administrators can decide which shared folders will be synced with client devices If a user has Read Write or Read only and synchronization privileges ona shared folder it can then be synced with their client device 8 Shared File Links Lists the status of shared links 9 Version Control You can set the maximum number of version for your files and check the space used for Version Control Using Centralized Mode for Centralized Management Administrators can now apply pre configured settings to devices that connect to the NAS for the first time restrict users right on modifications to all or certain preference settings of their client utilities edit settings for individual Qsync client devices online or set a Management password a master password for all client devices To apply pre configured settings on connected devices follow these steps 1 Log into the NAS as an administrator gt Qsync Central Station 2 0 gt Management settings Click Edit default settings Under the Synchronize
324. rs and all videos are only visible to authorized users Private Collection List all videos located in the home folder and those multimedia files can be viewed by yourself only Qsync List videos synchronized from the Qsync service Video Collection List all virtual collections All entries listed under a collection are only links to the physical files This can effectively conserve your NAS storage space as you can keep only one copy of the videos even when you create a collection for a special theme For collection operations please refer to the below section on Using Video Station Smart Collection List all smart collections Smart collections will only show videos that match user defined classifications such as Home Videos Movies TV Shows and Music Videos and can save effort in managing videos For instructions on smart collection operations please refer to the section on Using Video Station below Recently Include recently imported videos within a month from a local device or taken with a camera or recording device Trash Can All deleted videos can be found here and can be restored or permanently deleted Only deleted files and not virtual links will show up in the trash can Note The home folder can only be accessed by its owner and NAS administrators Private or personal videos should only be stored in your home folder For media folder configuration refer to the Multimedia Management chapter For user setup
325. runking mode selected on the NAS Port Trunking is only available for NAS models with two or more LAN ports The port trunking options available on the NAS Field Description Switch Required Balance rr Round Robin mode is good for general purpose Supports static Round load balancing between two Ethernet trunking Make Robin interfaces This mode transmits packets in sure static sequential order from the first available slave trunking is through the last Balance rr provides load enabled on the balancing and fault tolerance switch Active Active Backup only uses one Ethernet General switches Backup interface It switches to the second Ethernet interface if the first Ethernet interface does not work properly Only one interface in the bond is active The bond s MAC address is only visible externally on one port network adapter to avoid confusing the switch Active Backup mode provides fault tolerance Balance XOR Balance XOR balances traffic by splitting up Supports static outgoing packets between the Ethernet trunking Make interfaces using the same one for each sure static specific destination when possible It trunking is transmits based on the selected transmit hash enabled on the 116 Broadcast IEEE 802 3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation Balance tlib Adaptive Transmit Load Balancing policy The default policy is a simple slave switch count operating on Layer 2 where the source MAC address is coupl
326. rvice Name PMKen559 420 Select default user account admin Scan now Jf Restart Note DOLNA Media Server requires Media Library to be enabled Please configure the settings in Applications gt Multimedia Management gt Media Library The displayed contents of DLNA server will be based on the system administrator account permissions and media library settings In order to start the service of TwonkyMedia please install it from App Center first QNAP DLNA Media Server is developed by QNAP and Twonky Media DLNA Server is a third party media server To allow DLNA media players to access and play the NAS multimedia content via QNAP DLNA Media Server enable the QNAP DLNA Media Server and configure the Media Library and the default user account 292 To allow DLNA players to access and play NAS multimedia content via Twonky Media DLNA Server enable it and click the link http NAS IP 9000 to enter the TwonkyMedia DLNA Media Server configuration page Go to TwonkyMedia Settings gt Basic Setup to configure basic server settings The Qmultimedia or Multimedia folder contents will be shared to digital media players by default You can go to Basic Setup gt Sharing gt Content Locations to change the folder or add more folders After configuring the settings you can upload music photos and videos to these specified folders 293 8 3 Download Station Download Station is a web
327. s gt Shared Folders gt click the Access Permissions button next to the folder to be configured Note Both LDAP users and local NAS users can access the NAS via File Station FTP and AFP LDAP Authentication Technical Requirements with Microsoft Networking Required items to authenticate the LDAP users on Microsoft Networking Samba 1 A third party software to synchronize the password between LDAP and Samba in the LDAP server 2 Importing the Samba schema to the LDAP directory A Third party software 184 Some software applications are available and allow management of LDAP users including Samba password For example e LDAP Account Manager LAM with a web based interface available from http www ldap account manager org e smblidap tools command line tool e webmin ldap useradmin LDAP user administration module for Webmin B Samba schema To import the a Samba schema to the LDAP server please refer to the documentation or FAQ of the LDAP server A samba schema file is required and can be found in the directory examples LDAP in the Samba source distribution Example for open ldap in the Linux server where the LDAP server is running it can be different depending on the Linux distribution Copy the samba schema Edit etc Idap slapd conf openidap server configuration file and make sure the following lines are present in the file Configuration examples The following are some con
328. s while CD installation is only for certain models check your package contents to see if it includes an installation CD All users are encouraged to use cloud and online installation if possible Contact our technical support department if any problem arises during the installation process http www qnap com support 19 2 2 1 Smart Installation Guide Follow the steps in this section to complete online installation for your NAS 1 aA un KRW N Go to http start qnap com Choose the number of HDD bays and the model of your NAS and click Start Now Click Hardware and follow the on screen instructions to get hardware ready Scroll down to Install firmware and click Local Installation Choose your operating system to download install and run Qfinder After installing Qfinder launch it to search for your NAS Double click on your NAS in Qfinder to start the Smart Installation Guide Follow the on screen instructions to the built in Qfinder Setup Wizard will guide you along the way to complete the firmware installation Proceed to log into QTS with your QTS account username and password to log in QTS is the operating system for the Turbo NAS 20 2 2 2 Cloud Installation Follow the steps in this section to complete cloud installation for your NAS 1 Connect your NAS to the Internet and on your PC go to start qnap com and scroll down until the Install firmware section Click Cloud In
329. s across your computers and mobile devices that have the Qsync Client installed and they will also be synchronized to the Qsync folder on the NAS 1 For PCs drag and drop files to the local Qsync folder 2 For mobile devices Qfile copy or move files into the local Qsync folder 3 For the NAS copy or move files to the Qsync folder using File Station Offline editing You can edit your files offline and Qsync Central Station will automatically synchronize the changes made once your device is online Sharing Sharing files by download links You can share files by sending download links to those who have not installed Qsync Client For Windows 1 Right click on the file that you want to share in the local Qsync folder and click Share the link 2 Choose to send the link via email or copy the link to directly share it 3 Click Settings to see more options including creating a SSL link the expiration date or password For the NAS right click on the file that you want to share in the Qsync folder within 210 File Station and click Share For mobile devices launch Qfile to share the file in the local Qsync folder by clicking the icon to the right and click Share The file recipients can click the link or copy and paste it to a web browser to download the file Sharing folders with a group You can share a folder with a user group If any member from the group shares the files in the folder other me
330. s supported by most clients including Windows Mac Linux and mobile devices MyQNAPcloud SSL Certificate After installing the myQNAPcloud SSL Certificate App you will see the user interface on QTS myQNAPcloud to download and install your purchased SSL certificates from the myQNAPcloud website https www myqnapcloud com SSL certificates bring better protection when connecting to your QNAP NAS via myQNAPcloud DDNS Surveillance Station 378 Surveillance Station is a professional network surveillance system and video management system As one of the standard NAS applications the Surveillance Station can be activated on the App Center to turn your NAS into a professional network video recorder When used with compatible IP cameras Surveillance Station can perform the following operations real time monitoring recording playback alarm notifications Intelligent Video Analytics and video management to help you secure your assets and property CloudLink CloudLink is the best remote access service provided by myQNAPcloud that allows you to connect to your device via the Internet using the myQNAPcloud website www myqnapcloud com No complicated port forwarding settings on the router are required just install CloudLink App on device App Center and sign in myQNAPcloud ID QID on your device Then you can access files from the myQNAPcloud website CloudLink will select the best connection for you according to your network environment
331. s to the iSCSI target from multiple initiators for cluster aware file systems such as VMware Virtual Machine File System Enter the target name and alias Choose to click CRC Checksum to select Data Digest and or Header Digest Then Click Next Enter the username and password for Use CHAP authentication and or Mutual CHAP and click Next Check Use CHAP authentication and only the initiator is authenticated by the iSCSI target and users of the initiators are required to enter the username and password specified here to access the target Check Mutual CHAP for two way authentication between the iSCSI target and the initiator The target authenticates the initiator using the first set of username and password The initiator authenticates the target using the Mutual CHAP settings Click Next Click Finish A new target will be created Creating iSCSI LUNs Follow the steps below to create a LUN for an iSCSI target 1 2 3 Click Create Select iSCSI LUN only and click Next Choose the LUN type and LUN allocation method enter the name of the LUN and specify the LUN location disk volume on the NAS the capacity and alert threshold for the LUN Click Next Select a target to map and click Next 95 5 Confirm the settings and click Next 6 Click Finish 7 A LUN will be created and mapped to a target as specified in Step 4 To create an un mapped iSCSI LUN select Do not ma
332. s unique One myQNAPcloud name can only be used for one NAS e A registered myQNAPcloud name will expire in 120 days if your NAS remains offline within that period Once the name is expired it will be released for registration by other users e For My DDNS if the default port is not used you will need to specify the port number when accessing network services 1 In Cloud Portal web based NAS services are shown Select Publish to publish the NAS services to the myQNAPcloud website Select Private to hide published NAS 327 services from public access The private services on the myQNAPcloud website are only visible to specified users with the myQNAPcloud access code If a disabled NAS service is published the service will be inaccessible even if the corresponding icon is shown on the myQNAPcloud website http www myQNAPcloud com 2 Set myQNAPcloud Access Code Enter a 6 16 characters a z A Z 0 9 only code that NAS users will need to enter when they attempt to view private NAS services on the myQNAPcloud website 3 Click Add Users and specify up to 9 local NAS users who are allowed to view private NAS services published on the myQNAPcloud website 4 Select the connection method the myQNAPcloud Connect VPN utility and or myQNAPcloud website 5 To send instructions to use the myQNAPcloud service to users via email select the users and click Send Invitation 6 Enter the email address Click Send Note To
333. scanning antivirus scanning file backup or multimedia conversion List all external storage devices and USB printers that are connected to the NAS via its USB or SATA ports Click a listed device to open the File Station for that device Click the External Device header to open the External Device page for relevant settings and operations for details on File Station refer to the File Station chapter Click the eject icon up arrow icon to eject the external device Check for recent system error and warning notifications Click Clear All to clear the list To review all historical event notifications click the Event Notifications header to open the System Logs For details on System Logs refer to the System Logshs chapter e Profile Specify your email address and change your profile picture You can also check System LogslIt5 4 and edit the Login Screenf 4 here e Wallpaper Change the default wallpaper or upload your own wallpaper e 2 step Verification Enable 2 step Verification to enhance the security of user accounts For details refer to the 2 step Verification 42 section e Change Password Change your login password 40 E mail Account Set the email address to use when sharing files via email in Music Station Photo Station Video Station or File Station Miscellaneous o Auto logout after an idle period of Specify the idle period before the current user is automatically logged out o Warn me
334. se to add it to Now Playing on the left panel email the link of it publish it share it with a link delete it rename it or modify the settings of that playlist the email publish and share options are only available if Share with the public is enabled in Playlist Settings Sharing playlists As you create a playlist you can choose to share it with other NAS users choose whether all NAS users can edit the playlist or only the album creator administrator can edit the playlist the public or not to share at all leave both options unchecked and set the valid period on the playlist creation page If a playlist is set to share with the public you can right click on it and select Email to email it Publish to publish it to social networks or Link Code to generate and paste the playlist link on your blog forum or instant messenger programs You can still edit the playlist later and the updated playlist will be presented when viewers click the same link again You can also share a list of songs as you do with the playlist To do so click Sharing on the right panel drag amp drop songs under Songs on the right panel from the middle and use the Email Social Sharing or Link button to share this list of songs Note that the difference between sharing a playlist and a list of songs is that for a playlist it is the entire playlist that you created under Playlist on the left panel For a list of songs it is a lis
335. se use the Format feature with caution e For encryption related options Change Download Save Lock this Volume refer to Encryptionl7s e It is recommended to format disk volumes larger than 2TB with EXT4 e Snapshot is applicable to the following models TS 269L TS 269 Pro TS 469 Pro TS 469L TS 469U RP TS 469U SP TS 470 Pro TS 470 TS 569 Pro TS 569 TS 669 Pro TS 669L TS 670 Pro TS 670 15 869 Pro TS 869L TS 869U RP TS 870 Pro TS 870 TS 870U RP TS 879 Pro TS 879U RP TS 1079 Pro TS 1269U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1679U RP TS EC879U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC1279U SAS RP TS EC1679U RP TS EC1679U SAS RP SS EC1279U SAS RP SS EC1879U SAS RP SS EC2479U SAS RP TS EC2480U RP TS EC1680U RP TS EC1280U RP TS EC880U RP TS EC1080 Pro TS EC880 Pro TVS 471 TVS 671 TVS 871 TVS 871U RP TVS 1271U RP TVS 463 TVS 663 TVS 863 TVS 863 Configuring Alert Threshold The alert threshold is used to remind users when the capacity of a chosen volume is used up to the specified threshold level A warning message will pop up when the specified threshold is reached To set an alert threshold select a volume in Storage Space to bring up the Volume Management page click Actions gt Set Threshold enter the threshold level and click Apply The alert threshold is set Creating New Shared Folders 1 Go to Storage Manager gt STORAGE gt Storage Space 72 2 Double click a volume to bring up th
336. ses from Windows servers It highly reduces loading of Windows servers and improves the performance of copying and moving operations for Windows 2012 hosts using the QNAP iSCSI storage For more details on ODX check here 10 Gbe Support A 10GbE 10 Gigabit Ethernet network is essential for businesses that demand high bandwidth for virtualization and fast backup and restoration efficiency for an ever growing amount of data QNAP s 10GbE Turbo NAS series is an affordable and reliable storage solution for deploying a 10GbE environment For detail on 10Gbe support its application technical specifications physical interfaces applications and the compatibility list check here SSD Cache Based on the SSD technology the SSD cache feature is designed to boost access performance of the Turbo NAS As the name SSD Cache implies SSD drives need to be installed to enable this function To learn how to set up SSD Cache on the Turbo NAS check here vSphere Client The vSphere Client for QNAP Turbo NAS is an interface between ESXi and the Turbo NAS This tool allows system administrators to manage VMware datastores on the QNAP Turbo NAS directly from the vSphere Client console and verify the status of all QNAP Turbo NAS units For setup details on vSphere Client check here QNAP SMI S Provider QNAP SMI S Provider is a required component for the support of System Center Virtual Machine Manager SCVMM 2012 With this tool the Turbo NAS c
337. sfer speed of traffic to and fromthe Thunderbolt port 123 124 4 5 Security Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Security to configure relevant security settings for your NAS Security Level Network Access Protection Certificate amp Private Key Allow all connections Deny connections from the list Allow connections from the list only Enter the IP address or network from which the connections to this server will be allowed or rejected IP Address or Network Domain Time Left for IP Blocking Security Level Specify the IP address or network domain from which connections to the NAS are allowed or denied When the connection of a host server is denied all the protocols of that server are not allowed to connect to the NAS After changing the settings click Apply to save the changes Network services will be restarted and current connections to the NAS will be terminated Network Access Protection Network access protection enhances system security and prevents unwanted intrusion You can block an IP for a certain period of time or indefinitely if the IP fails to login to the NAS from a particular connection method Certificate amp Private Key 125 Secure Socket Layer SSL is a protocol for encrypted communication between web servers and browsers for secure data transfer You can upload an SSL certificate issued by trusted providers After uploading an SSL certificate users can connect to th
338. shot Replica Restoring iSCSI LUNs A LUN image can be restored to the NAS Users can choose to overwrite the original LUN or create a new one by renaming the LUN To restore an iSCSI LUN to the NAS follow these steps 1 Go to Storage Manager gt LUN Backup Click Create a job 107 2 Select Restore an iSCSI LUN and click Next 3 Specify the protocol IP address host name and folder path of the restore source Click Test to test the connection Then click Next 4 Browse and select the LUN image file and click Next 5 Select the destination and click Next 6 The settings will be shown Enter a name for the job or use the one generated by the NAS Click Next 7 Click Finish to exit The restore job will be executed immediately Refer to the table below for actions the Action button available to manage restore jobs Edit Edit the job settings Delete Delete the job Start Start the job immediately Stop Stop the running job View Logs View the job status and logs Creating iSCSI LUN Snapshots A read only LUN snapshot can be created and mounted to an iSCSI target on the NAS for data access from other hosts or LUN backup The contents of the LUN snapshot will remain the same regardless of the changes made to the original LUN Before creating an iSCSI LUN snapshot make sure at least one iSCSI LUN and one iSCSI target has been created on the NAS 108 To create an iSCSI LUN snapshot
339. sing the NAS 1 Click Create a Replication Job 2 Enter the remote replication job name 3 Select the usage type Upload or Download and enter other settings A bucket is the root directory on Amazon S3 You can test the connection to the remote host testing by clicking Test Other settings are optional 4 Specify the local directory on the NAS for replication 5 Enter the replication schedule 6 Click Finish The replication job will be executed according to your schedule 238 7 2 5 External Backup The following topics are covered in this chapter e External Drivelz3 e USB One Touch Copy 4 External Drive The NAS supports real time and scheduled data backup between internal disks volumes on the NAS and external USB eSATA storage devices To use this feature follow these steps 1 Connect one or more storage devices to the USB or eSATA if available interfaces of the NAS 2 Click Create a new job 3 When the wizard is shown read the instructions carefully and click Next 4 Select the backup locations a Select an external disk volume from the drop down menu The NAS supports EXT3 EXT4 FAT NTFS and HFS The storage device s general information will be shown b Select Map this backup job to the volume ID only to map the backup job to this particular external storage device The NAS will recognize the device and automatically execute the backup job according to the settings every time it is
340. sk 4 usns a Note Some of the features mentioned on this page are applicable to certain NAS models only QNAP Flexible Volume Architecture The QNAP Flexible Volume Architecture consists of the following four layers HDD Management Storage Pool Volume and Shared Folders as shown below a cs gt 50 Each layer is designed to cover an aspect of the storage system and all four layers combined can achieve total protection for your storage system This architecture supports four distinct types of volumes adapted by QNAP over the years and each volume type supports different storage features 51 Features Performance level Online RAID migration Online RAID expansion File based LUN Block based LUN Thin provision SSD cache JBOD RAID expansion JBOD expansion roaming Snapshot Snapshot Replica Snapshot Vault Legacy volume High Static Volume High QTS 4 1 Storage Pool Flexible Volume Medium QTS 4 2 Storage Pool Flexible Volume Medium For specific setup of the Storage Manager please refer to the following links 52 e Dashboard s54 e Storagelse e iSCSI e Virtual Diskh1 53 4 2 1 Dashboard The Storage Manager dashboard provides an overview for IT administrators to easily monitor and manage storage allocations Overview There are three sections on the page Disk Volume LUN and Storage Pool They are
341. ssions for AFP File Station 176 and FTP will automatically follow Windows ACL configuration 177 5 4 Quota To efficiently allocate storage space you can specify quotas that can be used by each user When this is enabled and a user has reached the quota the user cannot upload any more data to the NAS By default no limitations are set for the users You can modify the following options e Enable quota for all users e Quota size on each disk volume After applying the changes the quota settings will be shown Click Generate to generate a quota settings file in CSV format After the file has been generated click Download to save it to your specified location 178 5 5 Domain Security The NAS supports user authentication by local access right management Microsoft Active Directory Windows Server 2003 2008 2012 and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP directory By joining the NAS to an Active Directory or a LDAP directory the AD or LDAP users can access the NAS using their own accounts without extra user account setup on the NAS e No domain security Only the local users can access the NAS e Active Directory authentication domain members Join the NAS to an Active Directory The domain users can be authenticated by the NAS After joining the NAS to an AD domain both the local NAS users and AD users can access the NAS via the following protocols services o Samba Microsoft Networking o AFP o FTP o F
342. st Streaming to Remove Delete Movie Information Add Tag Rating Color Label Add the selected videos to the sharing list Stream videos to compatible devices in different rooms over your home network Delete the video Review movie information such as genre director cast etc of the selected video Tag the video Rate the video Color label the video Finding your videos quickly To quickly locate videos you can rate or classify them To do so right click on the videos and then tag rate or color label them To mark classify multiple videos click the Multi select button on the main menu or hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard select your desired videos and right click the videos to rate or classify them After 364 videos are tagged rated or color labeled they can be searched by their rating color label or tag in the search bar on the Main Menu Viewing videos Double click on a video to switch to the video viewing mode and use the buttons to view videos D O 60900 Name Description o 1 Play Pause Play Pause 2 Stop Stop playback 3 Seek Bar Control the playback progress 4 Mute Volume Mute Unmute and adjust the volume 5 Resolution Change resolution and transcoding settings 6 Subtitles Manage subtitles of the video 7 Streaming to Stream videos to compatible devices in different rooms over your home network 8 Full Screen Switch to the full screen mode Note
343. stallation and in the Start Cloud Installation step click the Start Cloud Installation button Alternatively you may scan the QR code using your mobile phone to start cloud installation 2 Enter the cloud key cloud key can be found from the sticker on top of your QNAP NAS and click Enter Before proceeding to Step 4 activate your myQNAPcloud account after your account registration is confirmed an email will be sent to the email address provided to create your myQNAPcloud account and the account activation link will be included in that email For details refer to myQNAPcloud Service chapterb23 in this manual 3 Fill out all fields to register your myQNAPcloud account or sign in your myQNAPcloud account check I agree to myQNAPcloud Terms of Use and QNAP Privacy Policy and click Next Step If you already have a myQNAPcloud account please select Sign in myQNAPcloud account and login with your account credentials Type in the name of your Turbo NAS to register it and click Register Install a hard drive on your Turbo NAS if you have not already done so Click Begin to install firmware on your Turbo NAS Click Start to start the quick setup Confirm all details and click Proceed O ON AD oO A Follow the onscreen instructions 10 Click Connect and Login QTS 11 Key in the user ID and password to login your Turbo NAS Note If you encounter a Device not found message ensure that 1 Your NAS has
344. t Notification gt SMTP Server Up to 1000 sharing links are supported For best performance use one of the following browsers IE 9 Firefox 3 64 Safari 5 or Chrome Do not close the browser before the file transfer process upload or download is completed or the process will fail For Remote Connections you must install the Connect to Cloud Drive app from the App Center before connecting to cloud services Using a remote connection is identical to an external device and ongoing tasks will be terminated if the NAS is restarted or powered off Limitations of your cloud service account may affect what files can be transferred Please check the account details with your cloud service providers for more information regarding what files can and cannot be transferred When transferring a large amount of files over CIFS SMB using a remote connection some antivirus software may cause the transfer to fail If you encounter this problem please temporarily disable your antivirus software and try again Due to performance limitations of web browsers and PCs you may not be able to upload a large amount of files in one task If you encounter this problem please separate your upload task into multiple tasks or use another upload method 258 7 4 LDAP Server The LDAP server of the NAS allows the administrator to create users to access multiple NAS servers with the same username and password Enable LDAP Server Full domain name
345. t stations Trap Address The IP address of the SNMP manager Specify up to 3 trap addresses SNMP MIB The MIB is a type of database in ASCII text format Management used to manage the NAS in the SNMP network The Information Base SNMP manager uses the MIB to determine the values or understand the messages sent from the agent NAS within the network You can download the MIB and view it with any word processor or text editor 203 Community SNMP V1 V2 SNMP V3 An SNMP community string is a text string that acts as a password It is used to authenticate messages that are sent between the management station and the NAS The community string is included in every packet that is transmitted between the SNMP manager and the SNMP agent The NAS supports SNMP version 3 Specify the authentication and privacy settings if available 204 6 5 Service Discovery Go to Control Panel gt Network Services gt Service Discovery to configure the UPnP discovery service and Bonjour After enabling this service your NAS can be discovered by any operating systems that support UPnP Enable UPnP Discovery Service po y UPnP Discovery Service When a UPnP device is added to the network the UPnP discovery protocol allows the device to advertise its services to the network control points By enabling UPnP Discovery Service the NAS can be discovered by any systems that support UPnP Bonjour By using Bonjour your
346. t of songs you have chosen from different albums Note To stream media files to HDMI or Chromecast using the Network Media Player the Media Streaming Add On must first be installed in the App Center Multi zone control and streaming Music Station works with your NAS Audio output USB speaker Soundcard HDMI Bluetooth and Network Media Players DLNA Chromecast AirPlay making it easy to stream music to many types of devices It can stream different music to all the 322 supported devices in your home or the same music in sync at the same time You can change the output device by using the streaming mode button ear piece icon on the player panel and then by double clicking a song to start playing it on that device You can add more songs to the Now Playing list to play your desired songs on that device Note To stream media files to HDMI or Chromecast the Multimedia Extension Pack must first be installed in the App Center Please check the QNAP website for supported USB speakers Some models with 3 5mm audio output may not support USB audio output Radio stations only support playing under streaming mode and Bluetooth Changing covers Album covers can be automatically found for your music allowing you to organize your music better If an appropriate cover cannot be found you can also import your own image to use as the album cover To change album covers follow these steps 1 Switch to Artist or Album
347. t will be opened in the browser the VLC plug in needs to be installed first Download the file If the chosen file is a video that has been transcoded you can choose its resolution and download the file If multiple files are selected for download they will be compressed before the download Rename the file Move the file to another location on the NAS Delete the file Cut a file and paste it to another shared folder Create a transcode task for the file Create transcode tasks for files within the subfolder If you see certain resolution options disabled in the Add to Transcode Beta window it means the selected video files have already been transcoded into these resolutions Cancel Delete transcode task Bring up the Transcode Task window for you to review transcode tasks Extract the compressed file 250 Compress Zip Compress the file Mount ISO Mount the iso image as a shared folder on the left panel After the file is mounted you can click that shared folder to access the content of that iso image To unmount an iso file right click on the iso mounted shared folder in the left panel and choose Unmount Properties Switch to open the right panel Note For IE 8 the maximum size of a file that can be uploaded to the NAS by File Station is 2GB if the Java plug in is not installed We recommend using a modem web browser to access File Station Due to limitations with Google Chrome when using t
348. tab choose whether to remotely remove any files on the NAS during synchronization 217 4 Under the Policy tab set conflict policies and filter settings 5 Under the Mails tab set up the email option and sender details 6 Click Apply To allow all users to configure their own client utility follow these steps 1 Log into the NAS as an administrator gt Qsync Central Station 2 0 gt Management settings 2 Select Central Configuration Mode and tick the preference settings that users are allowed to modify for their Qsync client device 3 Click Apply To edit settings for individual Qsync client devices follow these steps 1 Log into the NAS as an administrator and navigate to the Devices page in Qsync Central Station 2 Click the Edit settings for Qsync utility icon under Action for the device to be modified 3 Modify its preference settings including synchronization policy and mail settings To set a management password follow these steps 1 Log into the NAS as an administrator and navigate to the Management Settings page in Qsync Central Station 2 Select Central Configuration Mode 3 Tick Enable your management password Enter the password and click Lock 218 7 Business Applications The following NAS functions are designed to meet business needs oo H Overview to System Settings A Privilege Settings T Network Services amp Station Manager HybnidDesk
349. task with the following buttons 353 Button Name Description PDE Priority Adjust the order each task is executed x Remove Remove the selected task from the list Note This feature is only available for specific NAS models Please check the product page software specification on the QNAP website www qnap com to see if this feature is available for your model Background Transcoding Task Background transcoding is when a video file is converted in advance potentially avoiding high CPU usage if the video will be simultaneously accessed by many users You can manually add videos to be transcoded using File Station Photo Station or Video Station Video files can be converted to 240p 360p 480p 720p and 1080p and will be saved in the Transcode folder that is in the same directory as the video Manage all transcoding tasks using the following buttons Button Name Description Stop Stop Suspend all ongoing tasks in the list Transcoding Transcoding Remove All Remove All Remove all tasks that are yet to finish from Incomplete Incomplete the list Tasks Tasks Remove All Remove All Remove all complete tasks from the list Complete Tasks Complete Tasks Refresh Refresh Refresh the list Manage each task with the following buttons Button Name Description Dr Priority Adjust the order each task is executed x Remove Remove the selected task from the list Auto Transcoding Folder 354 This feature is desi
350. ter function 1 2 Click Network Printer and then select Internet Printing Protocol ipp Enter the N OO w A Click the System tab choose Administration Then select Printing Click Add NAS IP address in Host printers is already present Enter the printer name after printers in the field Queue Before you continue click Verify to test the printer connection The operating system starts to search for the possible drivers Select the printer driver from the built in database or search online Choose the correct printer model and driver Depending on the printer some additional printer options may be available in the next step You can rename this printer or enter additional information Click Apply to exit and finish The network printer is now available for printing 150 4 11 3 UPS By enabling UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply support you can protect your NAS from abnormal system shutdown caused by power disruption There are two options provided on the UPS page for the NAS during a power failure 1 turn off the server after the AC power fails or 2 enter the auto protection mode after the AC power fails For option 1 the NAS will shut itself down after the specified time For option 2 the NAS will stop all running services and unmount all volumes to protect your data after the specified time For details on NAS behavior during a power failure refer to the Behavi
351. ter these topics are covered e iSCSI Configuration 92 e Optimizing iSCSI Performancels8 e Advanced ACLI98 e Snapshotle9 Note The function or its content is only applicable on some models To check for applicable models please refer to the product comparison table on the QNAP website iSCSI Configuration The NAS supports the built in iSCSI service To use this function follow the steps below 1 Install an iSCSI initiator on the computer Windows PC Mac or Linux 2 Create an iSCSI target on the NAS 3 Run the iSCSI initiator and connect to the iSCSI target on the NAS 4 After successful logon format the iSCSI target disk volume The disk volume on the NAS can then be used as a virtual drive for the computer Between the computer and the storage device the computer is called an initiator because it initiates the connection to the device and the storage device is referred to as a target An iSCSI LUN is a logical volume mapped to the iSCSI target and there are two types of LUNs file based LUN and block based LUN File based LUN is the legacy LUN while block based LUN is available for certain NAS models Please refer to the product comparison table for details The table below lists the features supported by block based LUNs and file based LUNs 92 VAAI Full Copy VAAI Block Zeroing VAAI Hardware Assisted Locking VAAI Thin Provisioning and Space Reclaim Thin Provisioning Space Reclamatio
352. ter my password when accessing Private Collection and Qsync and each time a user is trying to access 358 those categories that user will be prompted for a password Right Panel Timeline Check online help quick start guide or version information Hide Show the right panel List videos chronologically in a timeline Date Filter Import Filter videos by date Import videos Sharing Return Choose to email publish or share the link of a collection Return to the root level of the Video Collection or Smart Collection when you are in your created collection Sharing History Tag Filter Show the history of files that have been shared Filter videos by tag 359 make sure that your device is compatible with the file format used by the video Some video formats may experience issues when streaming via DLNA Apple TV or Chromecast If any of these issues arise during video playback you can consider transcoding your videos into universally compatible media formats For more details on transcoding please refer to the Transcode Management ks chapter Some media players do not support pausing during playback If this happens playback will continue even if you use the pause feature Left Panel Shared Videos List all the videos in all shared folders on the NAS except videos in the home and Qsync folde
353. ter the username and password to connect to the NAS and click OK 4 Select a drive in the OS to map the folder chosen in Step 2 and click Finish 5 The mapped folder will appear when opening the File Explorer in Windows Method 2 Connect to the shared folders of the NAS by using File Explorer or Run 1 Open the Windows File Explorer click on Network on the left and find the workgroup of the NAS If the NAS cannot be found browse the whole network to search for the NAS Double click the name of the NAS to connect to it or use the Run function in Windows Windows key R Enter NAS_name or NAS_ IP 2 Enter the default administrator name and password the default login ID and password are both admin 3 Upload files to the shared folders 26 2 4 2 Mac or Linux Mac Users There are two methods to connect shared folders on a NAS Method 1 Using QNAP Qfinder 1 Launch QNAP Qfinder select your NAS and go to Connect gt Open in File Explorer 2 Enter your login ID and password 3 Select the folder you want to mount and click OK 4 The folder is mounted Method 2 Connecting to Server 1 Choose Go gt Connect to Server 2 Enter the NAS IP address 3 Enter your login ID and password 4 Select the folder you want to mount and click OK 5 The folder is mounted Linux Users On Linux run the following command mount t nfs lt NAS IP gt lt Shared Folder Name gt lt Director
354. that the disk volume needs to be manually unlocked each time the system restarts 78 Users can expand a RAID group add hard drive s to a RAID group migrate a RAID group configure a spare drive enable a bitmap and recover a RAID group for a chosen volume while the data contained in the RAID group remains intact In this chapter the following topics are covered e RAID Group Introduction 7 Expanding RAID Group Capacityfa Adding Hard Disk Drives e2 Migrating RAID Configuration 23 Configuring Spare Drives s3 Enabling Disabling Bitmap 83 Recovering Failed RAID Disk Volumes 84 RAID Group Introduction RAID group types Refer to the table below for explanations on RAID types Field Single Disk RAID 0 Striping Description A single stand alone RAID group can be set up for your NAS However this setup does not provide any redundancy protection So in the event that a disk is corrupted or otherwise damaged all data on that disk will be lost A striping RAID group combines two or more disks into one large logical disk It offers the fastest disk access performance but no data redundancy protection in the event of disk failure or damage The disk capacity is the sum of all disks Disk striping is usually used to maximize disk capacity or to accelerate disk access speed Please note that RAID 0 configuration is not recommended for storing sensitive data 79 RAID 1 Mirroring RAID 5 Disk Mirr
355. the drop down menu on top of the page 3 Specify the allowed IP addresses and host names The following IP address and host name are used as example here o IP address 192 168 12 12 or 192 168 o Host name dnsname domain local or domain local 4 click Add to enter the IP address and host name and then Apply Notifications on characters used e Wildcard characters You can enter wildcard characters in an IP address or host name entry to represent unknown characters e Asterisk Use an asterisk as a substitute for zero or more characters For example if you enter domain local the following items are included a domain local cde domain local or test domain local e Question mark Use a question mark as a substitute for only one character For example test domain local includes the following test1 domain local test2 domain local or testa domain local When you use wildcard characters in a valid host name dot is included in wildcard characters For example when you enter example com one example com and one two example com are included Folder Encryption Shared folders on the NAS can be encrypted with 256 bit AES encryption to protect data The encrypted shared folders can only be mounted for normal read write access with the authorized password The encryption feature protects the confidential data of the folder from unauthorized access even if the hard drives or the entire NAS were sto
356. tial data loss from unforeseen issues arising during the system update 4 Click Browse to select the firmware image for the system update Click Update System to update the firmware The system update may take seconds minutes or longer to complete depending on the network connection status The NAS will inform you when the system update has completed Update Firmware by QNAP Qfinder The NAS firmware can be updated using Qfinder by following these steps 1 Select a NAS model and choose Update Firmware from the Tools menu 2 Login to the NAS as an administrator 3 Browse and select the firmware for the NAS Click Start to update the system 137 4 10 Backup Restore Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Backup Restore to back up restore your NAS or restore your NAS to factory default settings Backup Restore Settings Restore to Factory Default Back up System Settings To backup all settings including user accounts server name and network configuration ete click Backup and select to open or save the setting file Backup Restore System Settings To restore all settings click Browse to select a previously saved setting file and click Restore to confirm Browse Backup Restore Settings e Back up System Settings To back up all the settings including the user accounts server name network configuration and so on click Backup and select to open or save the setting file
357. tion Rotate the photo 90 degrees counter clockwise photos only Launch the media viewer to view the photo photos only Refer to the Viewing photos and videosh4A section for more details Display file details properties and a description of the photo photos only Launch the media viewer to view the photo photos only Refer to the Viewing photos and videos s49 section for more details Rotate the photo 90 degrees clockwise photos only Launch Media Viewer and play the selected item Play the video or photo in a browser window Play the video in a browser window videos only the VLC plug in must be installed Stream videos to compatible devices in different rooms over your home network Share the photo or video on social networks via email or link Download the photo or video For photos there are four sizes small medium large and original for videos you can choose to download the video file please choose Original or video thumbnail please choose small medium or large Copy the photo and video to an existing album or create a new album and then copy the item to that new album 344 Add to Transcode Edit Rebuild thumbnail Delete Information Set Coordinates Add Tag Rating Color Label Convert the video to the following resolutions 240P 360P 480P SD 720P HD and 1080P Full HD videos only Edit the photo online using Pixlr Editor or Pixlr Express
358. tions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM 399 IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR
359. to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help Modifications Any modifications made to this device that are not approved by QNAP Systems Inc may void the authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment CE Notice QNAP Turbo NAS models comply with different CE compliance classes Please refer to the table for details FCC CE NAS Models Class A Class A TS EC1679U RP TS EC1279U RP TS EC879U RP TS 1679U RP TS 1279U RP TS 1270U RP TS 1253U RP TS 1253U TS 879U RP TS 870U RP TS 853U RP TS
360. to be accessible for SMB 3 clients This option is only available after SMB3 is enabled After it is enabled all communications via 167 Microsoft Networking will be conducted via SMB3 and encrypted All SMB3 clients will be able to connect to NAS via Microsoft Networking o Recycle Bin Enable the Network Recycle Bin for created shared folders Restrict the access of Recycle Bin to administrators only for now will ensure that files deleted and moved to the Network Recycle Bin can only be recovered by administrators Please note that the Recycle Bin option is only available after you enable Network Recycle Bin in Control Panel gt Network Services gt Network Recycle Bin o Enable Sync on this shared folder Enable this option if you want to sync the contents in this shared folder Refer to Qsync Central Stationl208 for more details 6 Click create to complete the setup To delete a shared folder select the folder checkbox and click Remove You can select the option Also delete the data Mounted ISO image files will not be deleted to delete the folder and the files in it If you do not select to delete the folder data the data will be retained in the NAS You can create a shared folder of the same name again to access the data Icon Name Description 2 Folder Edit the folder property Select to hide or show the network Property drive enable or disable oplocks folder path comment restrict the access of Recycle B
361. torage APIs for Array Integration to increase operational performance in virtualization environments With VAAI data processing is offloaded to the Turbo NAS and standard virtual machine management and deployment can be performed more efficiently consuming less ESXi CPU memory and bandwidth resources VAAI includes two parts 1 VAAI for iSCSI and 2 VAAI for NAS VAAI for iSCSI supports the following four features e Full Copy hardware assisted copy Processes the full copies of data within the Turbo NAS without requiring that the EXSi host reads and writes the data This feature can reduce the loading for ESXi hosts and speed up the cloning process for virtual machines 271 Block Zeroing hardware assisted zeroing Enables Turbo NAS to zero out a large number of blocks to speed up the provisioning of virtual machines This feature can reduce the loading for ESXi hosts and increase capacity allocation efficiency for virtual machines Hardware assisted Locking Enables granular locking of block storage devices rather than locking the entire LUN in SCSI This feature permits the VMware vSphere environment to scale up for more virtual machines and more ESXi hosts without performance penalty and boosts efficiency when a single datastore is shared by a number of ESXi hosts Thin Provisioning with Space Reclaim Releases the LUN space when virtual disks are deleted or migrated This feature can report disk space consumption more accuratel
362. tra partition Before you start to use the iSCSI target service make sure you have created an iSCSI target with a LUN on the NAS and installed the correct iSCSI initiator for your OS About Xtend SAN iSCSI initiator ATTO s Xtend SAN iSCSI Initiator for Mac OS X allows Mac users to utilize and benefit from iSCSI It is compatible with Mac OS X 10 4 x to 10 6 x For more information visit http www attotech co roducts product php sku INIT MACO 001 Using Xtend SAN iSCSI initiator Follow the steps below 1 After installing the Xtend SAN iSCSI initiator you can find it in Applications 2 Click the Discover Targets tab and choose Discover by DNS IP or Discover by iSNS according to the network topology In this example we will use the IP address to discover the iSCSI targets 3 Follow the instructions and enter the server address iSCSI target port number default 3260 and CHAP information if applicable Click Finish to retrieve the target list 4 The available iSCSI targets on the NAS will be shown Select the target you want to connect to and click Add You can configure the connection properties of selected iSCSI target in the Setup tab Click the Status tab select the target to connect to Then click Login to proceed The first time you login to the iSCSI target a message will remind you the disk is not initialized Click Initialize to format the disk You can also open Disk Utilities to initialize
363. tripe across a number of disks to provide fault tolerance and high speed data transfer The storage Capacity of a RAID 10 group is equal to the size of the disk with the smallest capacity in the array times the number of hard disks in the array 2 It is recommended that only hard disk drives of the same brand and capacity are used to create a RAID 10 group RAID 10 is suitable for high volume transaction applications such as a database that require high performance and fault tolerance A maximum of 2 failed disks from 2 different pairs are allowed in RAID 10 Note To install a new disk when the server is running first be sure the disk volume is in the degraded mode Or wait to hear two long beeps after the disk crashes and then insert the new disk in place of the failed disk Two or more disks can be combined into one larger volume Files are sequentially saved on physical disks The overall capacity of the linear disk is the sum of the capacity of all disks This configuration does not provide disk failure protection failure of one drive will cause the entire array to be lost A JBOD group is generally used for storing a large amount of data It is not appropriate for storing sensitive data 81 Bad Block Management BBM BBM uses the bad block list log for each drive and uses it to allow the system to fail single blocks rather than entire drives This is especially useful for RAID arrays Bad blocks in different places on differe
364. trol the status of the NAS and datastores and create additional datastores to multiple ESXi hosts in just a few clicks Download Qsnap Qsnap is a handy utility that can assist in quickly capturing screenshots on your PC They can be quickly edited saved and shared allowing quick note taking and productive communication Download 374 11 NAS Add ons The following NAS Add ons QPKG are recommended to help you explore other NAS possibilities Storage and Backup e Backup Versioning Betals7 e Gmail Backup Betal374 Virtualization e Container Station Betal7 e Virtualization Station Betab7a Productivity e Notes Station Beta 377 e Qsirch Betab7 Entertainment e Media Streaming Add On 7 e Photo Station Extension Betakb7 amp Security e L2TP IPsec VPN Servicels74 e MyQNAPcloud SSL Certificateb7a e Surveillance Station7 Connectivity e CloudLink B7 Business e Signage Stationb7 Tool e Diagnostic Tool Betab7 e Q centerls74 375 Please refer to the software specification page on the QNAP website for further details If a certain Add on is not supported by your NAS that Add on will not be available when you search it in the App Center e For more Apps please visit the QNAP site http www qnap com go qpkg html Backup Versioning Beta Backup Versioning enables version control option in RTRR backup jobs When creating a RTRR backup job the option version control
365. ually install a QPKG add on Manually 289 5 Sort Sort apps by category name or release date Left Panel e Public Apps List apps that are set to be accessible by the public To set an App as a public App please go to My Apps check Show on login screen at the bottom of the App icon box and that App will show up in the login screen Please note that to show public Apps on the login page first enable the photo wall style login page For details on login screen setup please refer to herea e My Apps List Apps that are currently installed on the NAS e Update List available updates for apps that are currently installed on the NAS e My Licenses List licenses for all Apps to be installed on the NAS You can also add and activate your licenses e All Apps List all Apps that can be installed on the NAS e QNAP Essentials List Apps developed by QNAP e Recommended List Apps recommended by QNAP they could be either developed by QNAP or third party developers e Beta Lab Lists Apps that are currently in development e Partners List Apps developed by QNAP partners e Apps by types From Backup Sync to Education those are App categories listed to facilitate your App searches Using App Center Searching apps To search for an App enter the keyword in the search bar Installing updating and removing apps To install an app click the Add to QTS button and the installation process will begin After the installation
366. under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying 7 Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used sep
367. ure is intended for use by administrators and users who have knowledge of Linux servers LDAP servers and Samba A running LDAP server is required when using this feature Requirements Required information settings e The LDAP server connection and authentication information e The LDAP structure where the users and groups are stored e The LDAP server security settings Connecting QNAP Turbo NAS to LDAP Directory Follow the steps below to connect the QNAP NAS to an LDAP directory 1 Login to the NAS as an administrator 2 Go to Privilege Settings gt Domain Security By default No domain security is enabled This means only local NAS users can connect to the NAS 3 Select LDAP authentication and complete the settings o LDAP Server Host The host name or IP address of the LDAP server o LDAP Security Specify how the NAS will communicate with the LDAP server Idap Use a standard LDAP connection default port 389 lIdap Idap SSL Use an encrypted connection with SSL default port 686 This is normally used by older version of LDAP servers Ldap ldap TLS Use an encrypted connection with TLS default port 389 This is normally used by newer version of LDAP servers o BASE DN The LDAP domain For example dc mydomain dc local o Root DN The LDAP root user For example cn admin dc mydomain dc local o Password The root user password o Users Base DN The organization unit OU where users are stor
368. use this function the email server settings must be properly configured in System Settings gt Notification gt SMTP Server CloudLink CloudLink is an innovative service provided by QNAP for remote access to your NAS over the network without changing router settings even if UPnP is not supported After you enable the service click the switch on the blue banner to enable disable the service the direct access link will be shown on the page and you can provide this link to your friends for them to access to your NAS using their mobile device or computer Access Control This function allows you to control who can search for your device and access published NAS services on the myQNAPcloud website or with mobile apps remotely via CloudLink The following options are available e Public Everyone can search for your device on the myQNAPcloud website and access your public services e Private Only you can access your NAS remotely on the myQNAPcloud website or with mobile apps via CloudLink e Customized You can specify who is allowed to access your device on the myQNAPcloud website or with mobile apps by entering their registered accounts 328 here Or you can add email addresses of your friends who are not currently myQNAPcloud members to send them an invitation To set access controls first set the Device access controls to Customized then click Add to add QID account holders SSL Certificate myQNAPcloud
369. usic My Favorite Radio with you from Music Station Tuneln A mS 172 47 33 181 8080 v i Trash can x 10 Item s ees P Send i Cancel 0 29 3 00 Automatic Part II Automatic HR This chapter covers the following topics e Starting Music Station 319 e Familiarizing yourself with Music Station 618 e Using Music Stationb24 e Media Library and Privacy Settingsk23 Starting Music Station Depending on your NAS model Music Station may be enabled by default and can be launched from the Desktop or the Main Menu If not install and enable it in the App Center for QTS 4 1 or later versions only and follow these steps 1 Upload music files to a shared folder on the NAS There are three ways to upload music files to the NAS 1 Install Qfinder on your PC or Mac set up a network drive and upload files to your preferred shared folders For details on setting up a network drive please check the Connecting to NAS Shared Folders 25 chapter 2 Click Songs or Private Collection on the left panel and click up arrow icon or Click up arrow icon to import music files from a local PC A new shared folder named 317 with the date that files are uploaded will be created on the NAS to store uploaded files for Songs this newly created shared folder is located under the Multimedia folder for Private Collection this shared folder is located under the home folder The newly uploaded music files can be found under R
370. veillance Station Enable Photo Station After enabling this service you may click one of the following links to enter Photo Station Enabling Photo Station Check Enable Photo Station and click the below links to directly login to the application Check Show the photos of Sharing Management on the login screen to display photo albums on the login page This will allow users to directly view the photos of the chosen album as a guest Photo Station can only be launched after it is enabled in the Station Manager For more Photo Station details please refer to the Photo Station 334 chapter Enabling Music Station Check Enable Music Station and click the below links to directly login to the application Music Station can only be launched after it is enabled in the Station Manager For more Music Station details please refer to the Music Stationls17 chapter Enabling File Station Check Enable File Station and click the below links to directly login into the 351 application File Station can only be launched after it is enabled in the Station Manager For more File Station details please refer to the File Station4 chapter Enabling Download Station Check Enable Download Station and click the below links to directly login to the application Download Station can only be launched after it is enabled in the Station Manager For more Download Station details please refer to the Download Station Download Stationl294 chapter Enabl
371. what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source froma network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and nonc
372. will synchronize with the existing domain controller If no other domain controllers are online restore only the first domain controller and join the other NAS servers as the domain controller back To restore a domain to a previous state with multiple domain controllers first disable the domain controller feature on all NAS servers restore only the first domain controller and join the other NAS servers as domain controller back 194 6 Network Services Go to Control Panel gt Network Services to configure network services on the NAS Control Panel CiCsacn a Gea 2 Se Overnew ss Network Services 3 System Settings B A Privilege Settings A mie th M o Hin Mac NFS s Network Recycle Bin S Qsync Central Station 2 0 n ka Applications For setup details refer to the following links e Win Mac NFSh9 e FTPRo e TIelnet SSH0 e SNMP Settingsho3 e Service Discoveryko3 e Network Recycle Bin 208 e Qsync Central Station 203 195 6 1 Win Mac NFS Go to Control Panel gt Network Services gt Win Mac NFS to configure networking services Enable file service for Microsoft networking Server description Optional NAS Server Workgroup WORKGROUP Standalone server AD domain member To enable Domain Security please click here LDAP domain authentication To enable Domain Security please click here Current Samba ID Advanced Options Apply In this chapt
373. y avoid out of space conditions increases NAS space utilization and saves IT cost VAAI for NAS offers the following three features Full File Clone Enables the Turbo NAS to copy all data within the NAS without requiring that the ESXi host reads and writes the data This feature can reduce loading for ESXi hosts speeds up the cloning process for virtual machines Extended Statistics Enables vSphere to query space utilization details for virtual disks on QNAP NFS datastores including the size of a virtual disk and the real space consumption of that virtual disk This feature can report disk space consumption more accurately increase NAS space utilization and save IT cost Reserve Space Reserves the pre allocated space of virtual disks thick provision eager zeroed disks in QNAP NFS datastores This feature can increase virtual disk read write performance thin provision disks vs thick provision disks With the support of VAAI for iSCSI and VAAI for NAS the Turbo NAS can boost storage performance more than 120 times faster to create new virtual machines in a virtualized environment For more details on VAAI for iSCSI and VAAI for NAS check here ODX Offloaded Data Transfer 272 The Turbo NAS supports Offloaded Data Transfer ODX in Microsoft Windows Server 2012 making it a high performance iSCSI storage solution in Hyper V virtualized environment Supporting ODX the Turbo NAS can be offloaded with all the copying proces
374. y of system information such as the server name CPU memory firmware and system up time on this page Note CPU and memory information is only available on certain NAS models Network Status View the current network settings and statistics on this page They are displayed based on network interface Click the up arrow in the top right to collapse the interface page and the down arrow to expand it System Service View the current settings of system services provided by the NAS Hardware Information View basic hardware information of the NAS 155 Resource Monitor You can view the CPU usage disk usage and bandwidth transfer statistics of the NAS e CPU Usage Shows the CPU usage of the NAS e Memory Usage Shows the memory usage of the NAS by real time dynamic graph e Disk Usage Shows the disk space usage of each disk volume and its shared folders e Bandwidth Usage Provides bandwidth transfer information of each available NAS LAN port e Process Shows information about the processes running on the NAS e Disk Performance Shows IOPS and latency of the selected volume Note Disk Performance is only available on certain NAS models 156 4 13 System Logs Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt System Logs to configure the logs settings of your NAS sk1 Device detected The Single Disk Volume Drive 1 The file system is not clean it you go to Storage Manager to run Check File System
375. y to Mount gt For example if the IP address of the NAS is 192 168 0 1 to connect to the shared folder public under the mnt pub directory use the following command mount t nfs 192 168 0 1 public mnt pub Log into the NAS with the specified user ID use the mounted directory to connect to the shared folders Note You must login as the root user to initiate the above command 27 2 5 Connecting to NAS by Web Browser To connect to the NAS by a web browser follow these steps 1 Enter http NAS IP 8080 in the web browser Or if using QNAP Qfinder simply double click on the NAS to open the login page 2 Enter the administrator s login id and password Enable Secure login Secure Sockets Layer login to allow a secure connection to the NAS If a user without administration rights logs into the NAS the user can only change the login password the default login ID and password of the NAS are both admin 3 The NAS Desktop will be displayed 2 6 Migrating from Old NAS Users can migrate their existing NAS to another NAS model with all the data and configuration retained by simply installing all the hard drives of the original source NAS on the new destination NAS according to its original hard drive order and restart the NAS Due to differing hardware designs the new NAS will automatically check if a firmware update is required before system migration After the migration has finished all of the settings
376. yndns com http update ods org http www dhs org http www dyns cx http www 3322 org http www no ip com http www Selfhost de http www oray com Additional Reference e How to set up proxy server on QNAP Turbo NAS for optimized website access e Set up DDNS Service for Remote Intemet Access to QNAP NAS 122 4 4 Thunderbolt Management Go to Control Panel gt System Settings gt Thunderbolt Management to configure the NAS Thunderbolt settings Thunderbolt Bridge Address Edit Status IP Address Subnet Mask 2 Auto assign Thunderbolt Interface Thunderbolt 1 Thunderbolt 2 N A N A Bandwidth Usage Thunderbolt bridge Minutes ago On this page you can configure Thunderbolt Bridge Addresses the Thunderbolt interface and monitor bandwidth usage e Thunderbolt bridge address Each Thunderbolt port allows you to connect up to six Thunderbolt devices The default mode for Thunderbolt ports is to automatically assign IP addresses Click on the Edit button to assign a Thunderbolt IP Bridge Address e Thunderbolt interface This displays your Thunderbolt interfaces and related port information A NAS or a JBOD expansion unit can be connected to the Thunderbolt port If a JBOD expansion unit is connected to the Thunderbolt port you can view the expansion devices in the Storage Manager Click Refresh to reload the Thunderbolt interface information e Bandwidth usage This area displays the tran

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

残留農薬測定 ELISA キット HORIBA SmartAssay  Bedienungsanleitung de Operating instructions en Mode d  Monster Central PCT 100 MC Starter Kit with Power Control User's Manual  Energy Sistem Photo Frame M10  0901025 DPF-302 FRENCH MANUAL£¨º£¶û·½°¸£©.cdr  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file